Home

WIN-PAK 2, Release 4 User Guide

1. Modem Condigquastion Marii Loog Phone Humber zaer com 1 OF Cancel 4 Enter the Name of the modem being added to the Modem Pool The name Modem defaults into the field 5 Enter the modem s Local Phone N umber the modem connected to the communication server s port Include the area code and dialing prefix if they are required to dial in from the remote site 6 Use the Port on Server list to select the port to which the modem is connected GSuLLLUeIBOId 7 Click OK Repeat this procedure for each modem in the pool 8 Create an ADV for the Modem Pool Click Add in the ADV section of the configuration window 9 On returning to the Modem Pool Configuration window after setting up the ADV click Next then click Finish on the final configuration window 240 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Setting Up a 485 HUB Loop on the Modem Pool Device Iof x Communication Server Q C 100 loop E 9 Main Drop Line H E Q Main Muster Drop Line Add New 485 ACK NAK Loop H a Modem Pr Configure Isolate Delete 1 Once the Modem Pool has been defined right click it and select Add New 485 ACK NAK Loop to open the Loop Configuration Basic Information window shown below Loop Configuration Basic Information APE Loop Genlaation Dase Inionateon ADA Aare Pari Doi gic VO Poll Inderal ak Descnpton en Ter Pa J Leca Hoigiit oe 12 Hiet Pan
2. Add New N 1000 Panel Programming 247 The Panel Configuration Basic window is displayed Panel Configuration Basic Panel Canligiit aliens Haii p Sishu I Adder 5 Ce Hei Cancel Help 1 Enter a unique Name for the panel using up to 30 alphanumeric characters This is a required field 2 Enter a Description of the panel if desired This field holds up to 60 characters 3 Select the Type of panel being added Type 248 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 4 5 Select the Firmware Version being used in the panel Firmware Version 2 02 x This refers to the version of firmware of the PROM chip in your N 1000 panel The default is 8 02 Select the version that your panel is using Different panel options are available depending on which firmware version is being used Indicate the Status of the panel Active is used when a panel is configured and present Inactive should be used for a panel that is present but temporarily disconnected for maintenance Card additions or deletions sent to an Inactive panel are saved until the panel is made active When active these files are automatically sent Not Present allows a system to be defined before the physical installation is complete If the panel is marked Not Present no card additions or deletions are sent or saved Enter the panel s hardware Address This address corresponds to the DIP Switch se
3. ce No inforrnation has been saved to WIN PAK at this point in the wizard If any changes need to be made to the information you entered in the last steps do so now The only way to change the information if the Next button is pressed is to press the Cancel button and start over lt Back Next gt Cancel The user is given the option to go back and edit the configuration before saving it or save the configuration and continue 14 Click Back to go back and edit the configuration or click Next to save what is configured thus far and continue with configuration If Next is clicked the What Next screen will appear next illustration 166 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide P Quick Start Wizard What Next Select one of the following configuration options Add another Panel to an existing Loop Add another Loop nished with hardware configuration Click Next to continue The user is given the options of adding another panel to an existing loop adding another loop or finishing the configuration For the purpose of introducing the Quick Start Wizard in a concise manner this procedure assumes the operator chooses to finish the configuration Quick Start Wizard Add Cards After selecting to finish the configuration and clicking Next the first Add Cards screen will appear Would you like to add a range of cards at this time Yes Not at this time Click N
4. E a 3 Set the Height and the Width of the badge in millimeters The badge outline resizes to these dimensions The default badge size is 50 mm high by 80 mm wide These dimensions work with most PVC printers NOTE To change the badge orientation from landscape horizontal to portrait vertical enter the larger dimension in the Height field 4 Click OK to apply the settings and return to the Badge Definition window WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Badge Definition Window Right Click Menus The right click menu is used for a number of control functions with the Badge Definition window Ruler Definitions The Inches and Millimeters options on the Badge Definition right click menu allow you to determine if you want the rule displayed on window to measure in inches or millimeters A check mark indicates which option is currently in use To switch from one unit of measure to another simply select the desired unit from the menu Zoom Factor Selecting Zoom Factor from the Badge Definition right click menu allows you to enlarge or reduce the badge layout view via the Zoom dialog Sone ho C mE fi n E r hk r 50 rs C Ewi C Daim fino x a Badging 347 Snap and Grid Settings The Snap menu item indicates via a check mark whether the Snap To setting is on or off The Grid Settings option calls a dialog with which you can indicate if grids should be tumed on for the badge layout
5. F Operai Acie Higi Dabe and Tare Operater Actors Operators Devices Sot Order Fun fisin dacha Daiabana T Operate Acker Fiun Ragor wf Doce Lockad Doo Pulsed Dou Pestowed To Time Zone Deed Shure Doc Timed Pubes Dooce Linate y Du Uinghunted Erag Output Daak Filters v Group Dek naga A fir Eres Gro Puke 4 Grou Aerie ba Tiet 7 Group Tired Puia W inp Radon To Tire Zmes A inp Srunted 2 kpi UiniShuntend i SeA D rebati al 5 Use the Operators tab below to select the operator s to be included in the report ial Opesiatot Actes Hegi Dstt ard Tame Operator Actors Operators Devcer Sot Cicer Fun froin Asctive Datibac T Operates inie il of WINPE Scheu Taren w Bi Seth 5 emay J aa of Dait Preik y Juraii abriet v dJohn Dia Speier Adn aa Lren Fmi Perper Cieputrard hanaga y Hamsi sin Soscundy Ad shalt w Tiit Disi Secudp 14 hi 524 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 6 Use the Devices tab below to select the device s to be included in the report i Connunecation Sarvs Comput Mord fe Dari Aleem al Local Siciga on 12 51 A Duse ot Ear Const Otis 7 Use the Sort Order tab below to select the sort order of the report Reports 525 NOTE When an operator runs a Command file or generates a Schedule it is recorded in the Operator column as Command File Server or Schedule Server instead of the
6. The order of transactions in both lists is determined by priority and time The highest priority transactions are first and transactions with the same priority are shown with the most recent first Using the Alarm View Command Buttons A set of buttons on the Alarm View window allow you to easily handle basic routine alarms tasks Acknowledge Ack To acknowledge an alarm select it from the list of incoming alarms and click the Ack button When the alarm is acknowledged it moves to the list in the lower pane of the Alarm View window unless the auto clear option is selected from System Defaults The background color of the transaction is now grey and the color of the alarm text changes as well green for normal yellow for trouble and red for alarm This color changes with each new condition Transactions remain in the Acknowledged Alarm section of the window until they are cleared Silence Allows operator to silence the alarm for 60 seconds without actually acknowledging it This feature is enabled in the Alarms Handling section of the System Default Configuration User Overview 117 NOTE Clear To clear one or more transactions select them from the list and click the Clear button Freeze To temporarily stop the display of incoming messages click the Freeze button When the Freeze button is clicked the button text changes to Release Freezing stops the screen from scrolling as new information appears Cl
7. When this process is complete click OK to retum to the main database window Now the item in this case the time zone can be deleted by selecting it from the database list and clicking D elete Copying Database Records Some databases e g Badge Layouts and Action G roups have a Copy function Select a record and click the Copy button to make a duplicate which can be renamed and edited WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Printing Database Reports Click the Print Report button at the bottom of a database window to view and print a report on the current database G enerally a filter dialog opens allowing you to select settings for the report Detail Database Record Windows Many WIN PAK 2 0 databases have both a main database window and a secondary or detail window The secondary window is sometimes called the Record view as it shows information on a particular database record Highlight a database record from the list in the main window and select the Detail View check box The detail view of the database record opens This new window shows information on the currently selected record The following illustration shows the detail view of a Card database record Notice the two tabs displayed along the top of the window used to display different types of information C User Overview 79 NOTE Tree You can activate the detail view by selecting a record from the main database window and clicking the Edit
8. Use the Sort Order drop down lists to select the categories determining how you want the card holders sorted The categories chosen can be sorted in Ascending and Descending order Ascending order will sort the card holders alphabetically or numerically and Descending order will sort the card holders in reverse alphabetical or numeric order Reports 499 8 Click the Advanced Filter Card tab next illustra tion The Card Holder report can be also be filtered by a number of Card criteria CodHoider Fite Sot Advanced Card Fits The Card Report can be filtered according to Whether a Card is Attached to the card holder Unattached or Both The number of Photos or Signatures Assigned to the card Unassigned or Both 9 Use the Print all cards assigned to the card holder Print no of photos assigned and or Print no of signatures assigned check boxes to set global parameters for information to be included in the report 10 Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report 11 Click Close to exit the Card Holder report and return to the main Reports database window 500 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Card Holder Tab Layout Report 1 Select the Card Holder Tab Layout report from the Reports database window 2 When the Report Card Holder Tab La
9. Badging 381 3 In the Expression field enter the specific data to be contained in the barcode or make a selection from the Fields list D ouble click on a field to add it to the Expression field 4 Select the desired Length and Fill Character See next section for desription 5 Click OK to save any changes and retum to the Barcode Data tab Barcode Properties Definitions Expression Any combination of text or database fields can be entered Type in the desired expression text or select one of the Fields You can double click a Field to enter it in the Expression field Fields Select a field and double click it to add it to the expression All the Card and Card Holder note fields are displayed in this list Variable Length If the Variable Length check box is selected the field length is adjusted to match the number of characters in the data item Length If a value is entered for Length the data item will be truncated or padded so that it is precisely that number of characters Fill The character used to pad the data in order to fit a fixed length field Justify Only applies to fixed length data items If a data item is shorter than the number of characters allotted for it it can be justified left center or right within those characters All other characters are set to the Fill character 382 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide When several data items have been entered they can be reordered using the Mov
10. Programming 219 3 Set the Loop Verification Interval This determines how often a test signal is sent through the communi cation loop verifying the loop s integrity The loop s data bandwidth will be reduced if the test interval is shortened or the loop s data bandwidth can be increased if the test interval is lengthened The test signal is a relatively short signal and using the default value of 60 seconds is an optimum setting If the test signal is not received within the defined time interval a Loop Trouble alarm is gener ated 4 Select either or both buffer check boxes Buffer all panels on exit and Unbuffer all panels on startup to apply buffering instructions Select Buffer on Exit to automatically buffer all panels when the communication server is stopped Select Unbuffer on Startup to automatically unbuffer all panels when the communication server is started NOTE Logging in or out of the database server doesnt affect the communincation server The communication server runs until it is shut down either manually or by shutting down the operating system GHuLLLUesBOId 5 Indicate the Time Zone in which the loop is lo cated 6 Set the Panel Defaults I O Poll Interval defaults to 60 seconds Sets the frequency for the signal sent to the panel to verify communication and to check the panel s input and output states The loop s data bandwidth will be reduced if the test interval is shortene
11. WIN PAK Guard Tour Server is running in the WIN PAK Service Manager Guard Tour Unsequenced Action Group Action Message Description Checked The guard has checked the required input reader Input Alarm Point Input Supervised Action Group Action Message Description Input Active The input is in the alarm state Input Normal The input is in the normal state Input Trouble The status can not be accurately displayed due to tampering Modem Pool Ack NAK Action Group Action Message Description Modem Pool OK Modem pool is working properly Modem Pool Trouble Modem pool is NOT working properly Programming 201 Monitor CCTV Monitor Action Group Action Message Description CCTV Monitor OK CCTV Monitor Trouble Monitor is working properly Monitor is NOT working properly N 1000 II Panel Panel N1000 II Action Group Action Message Description Auxiliary Port Failure Auxiliary Port Normal Panel Communication Alarm Panel Communication Normal Panel Reset Poll Response Alarm Poll Response Normal Primary Power Failure Primary Power Normal N 1000 II and N 1000 IV Panel N1000 III IV Action Groups Action The auxiliary communication port is not working The auxiliary communication port is working Communication with the control panel has been lost Communication with the control panel has been restored The control panel has been reset The control panel is NOT respo
12. Action Group GHuLLLUeIBOId amp Select Language Translate gt gj Command File fa Guard Tour ij Floor Plan Definition 1 Select an Action Group from the database window and click the Edit button to open the Action G roup detail view next illustration WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Set the Priority you want assigned to the selected Action If the priority is 0 the action state will not be displayed in the Alarm Monitor Control Map or Floor Plan View 1 is the highest priority 99 is the lowest Select the Time Zone during which you want the action group activated The default setting is Always meaning the defined actions take effect regardless of the time Select any Command Files you want activated in response to the selected Action A command file must be created to perform CCTV camera monitor switching Select the Sound File to be activated in response to the Action Select a Digital Video Camera from the list you want activated in response to the selected action Programming 197 7 Select the Write to History option if you want the action written to the history file Select the Print option is you want this action printed on the alarm printer 8 Insert the Message you want sent to the Alarm Detail view in response to the action 9 Click OK to save the Action Group settings and return to the Action Group database window ADV Action Groups To view a list o
13. BuLLLUeIBOJd 1 Enter a unique Name for the CCTV Switcher using up to 30 characters This is a required field 2 Enter a Description of the CCTV Switcher if desired This field holds up to 60 characters 226 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Select a CCTV Switcher Type from the list Typical options include Burle e Dedicated Micros e Geutebruck e Javelin NCI CCTV e Panasonic e Pelco e Vicon 4 Select the Port to which the CCTV Switcher is connected 5 Enter the Bits per Second communication rate for the CCTV Switcher The default is 9600 6 The Data Bits Parity and Stop Bits fields for the CCTV Switcher The default Data Bits is 8 Parity in None and Stop Bits is 1 IP Address If TCP IP Connection is selected as the Port the IP Address or Node name field must be filled in Encryption Password If TCP IP Encrypted Connection is selected as the Port the Encryption Password field must be filled in with the exact case senistive password used when the LAN hardware was installed 7 Set up an ADV for the CCTV Switcher Click the Add button in the ADV area of the window upper right comer Once an ADV is established for the switcher the type cannot be changed 8 On returning to the Basic Information window after setting up the ADV click Next to advance to the CCTV Switcher Configuration Cameras window next illustration Programming 227 CCTV Switcher Configuration Cameras OCTY Swatches Co
14. Click and hold the upper half of the Zoom In Zoom Out button to slowly zoom the camera in Click and hold the lower half of the button to slowly zoom the camera out Camera Pan and Tilt Control The control arrows on the Live Monitor window pan the camera left and right and tilt it up and down Click and hold the camera control arrows to move the camera The left arrow pans to the left the right arrow pans to the right The up arrow tilts the camera up while the down arrow tilts the camera down If the cursor is moved over the live viewing area arrows appear Clicking these cursor arrows has the same effect as the control arrow buttons Setting Pan and Tilt Limits Limits should be set on the panning and tilting actions of each camera Limits ensure a camera does not tilt or pan to a point that is stressful on the hardware Limits also keep the camera s view to that which is useful The following steps demonstrate how to set the upward tilt limit for a camera Repeat these steps for downward tilt left pan and right pan on each camera 1 Use the up and down arrows to tilt the camera to the highest point needed 2 Right click on the up arrow and select Set Limit from the control menu displayed Clearing Limits To clear limits right click on the arrow with the limit you want to clear and select Clear Limit from the control menu User Overview 127 _ Set
15. Chapter 6 Card Holders Within the WIN PAK 2 0 System a card is typically a combination of a card holder record and a badge template Chapter 6 shows you how to set up card holder templates and include customized note fields on the templates as well as associating a card holder with a card and a badge Chapter 7 Translation WIN PAK 2 0 allows the translation of the User Interface This chapter explains how to use a language text file to translate the User Interface and how to create your own language file Additionally procedures are outlined showing how to change dialog and menu text into another language or into terminology that better suits your needs Chapter 8 Reports To assist in your operations and system maintenance WIN PAK 2 0 allows you to generate a variety of reports that can be exported viewed on screen or printed Chapter 9 Database Maintenance Database Maintenance provides tools for removing unused information from databases Welcome 21 Conventions Within the WIN PAK 2 0 System there is often more than one way to perform a task For example you can open the Card Holder database by clicking the Card Holder toolbar button or by selecting Card Holder from the Card menu Wherever available this guide describes the menu method of performing tasks Throughout the manual parenthetic material is enclosed in parentheses or blocks Material in parentheses is clarifying information Material i
16. Pulse Switch to Time Zone Control Timed Pulse Buffer Unbuffer Custom Command Refresh Custom Command Preset Custom Command camera ADV monitor ADV camera ADV 0 65 335 sec 0 Hard 1 Soft 0 65 335 sec Programming 331 NOTE When a panel is buffered transactions are stored in the panel RAM memory When a panel is unbuffered it transmits stored information to a computer then continues to transmit ongoing access transactions to that computer Transactions are not stored in the panel RAM A buffer command can be either hard or soft Normally when an unbuffered panel receives a buffer command it switches to the buffered mode When the buffered panel receives an unbuffer command it switches back However if a panel receives multiple soft buffer or unbuffer commands it does not switch modes until it receives the same number of buffer or unbuffer commands However a hard buffer or unbuffer command overrides any number of soft commands When a panel receives a hard buffer or unbuffer command it switches state regardless of how many soft buffer or unbuffer commands it has received Gu LLwuesBb01d Adding Custom Commands If the standard commands contained in the system don t quite suit your needs you can easily add a custom command for CCTVs Panels and RS232 Connections With the Command dialog displayed 1 Select a device from the ADV Category list 2 Select the specific devi
17. Sec Hn Hr Pesta y 5 Boo ei ro r a pat J te EE T o OF Arti z 3 z Xe 1 From the Name list on the Outputs window select the check box to the left of each output point you want to activate Once an output point is selected other options on the window become available WIN PAK 2 0 sets some output points as active and may assign them an interlock value These default settings vary depending on the type of panel and whether or not you have chosen the anti passback option All of these settings can be edited 2 Use the Time Zone drop down list to attach a time zone to each output point The output point will be energized active during the selected time zone For example you want output 1 Door 1 unlocked during the time zone defined as First Shift 268 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE Select First Shift as the time zone Output 1 Door 1 is de energized outside the selected time zone locking the door Enter a value in the Pulse Time field to set the amount of time that the output point is energized when triggered The field can be set from 0 63 seconds 0 63 minutes or 0 63 hours In the case of output points Interlocking refers to linking the changing state of the output point to either another output point an input point ora group of outputs Refer to Enabling Interlocking for Outputs section ahead for details on setting up interlocking Create ADVs as needed for system control For
18. Select the Status Input Shunt Device point that will be used as the status point for the door Enter the Shunt Time for the Status Input Shunt Device Point This is the amount of time the input point is shunted deactivated when triggered by a valid card read Enter the Debounce Time for the Status Input Shunt Device Point This is the amount of time that an input must be in alarm condition or return to normal before it is recognized as an alarm or normal For example an input with a debounce time of five must be in alarm condition for five seconds before it is reported as an alarm The same is true when returning to normal condition Click OK to return to the Readers window Panel Configuration Finish Click the Finish button to complete the configuration process The N 1000 panel is now added to the communication loop as shown below H Device ojx G Devices E Command File Server Communication Server amp C 100 loop Main Drop Line Q Main Muster Drop Line Modem Pool ACK NAK Q East Coast OfficeAWarehouse Local Storage 1st Street Local Storage on 1st Street iid Programming 279 Interlocking Input and Output Points The interlocking feature allows an input point or output point to take a specified action based on the change of state of another input point or output point In an interlock seq
19. Set Command Timeout Connect Remote Disconnect Remote Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Buffer All Panels Unbuffer All Panels Set Retry Count Set Command Timeout Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Energize De energize Pulse Timed Pulse Restore to Time Zone Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Initialize Cancel Initialization Buffer UnBuffer Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Control box for PTZ camera control Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Left click drag and drop on CCTV monitor to view the camera on the monitor If digital video then live digital video will be viewed User Overview 133 Panel Buffer Commands When a panel is buffered transactions are stored in the panel RAM memory When a panel is unbuffered it transmits stored information to a computer then continues to transmit ongoing access transactions to that computer in the unbuffered mode of operation A buffer command can be either hard or soft Normally when an unbuffered panel receives a buffer command it switches to the buffered mode When the buffered panel receives an unbuffer command it switches back However if a panel receives multiple soft buffer or unbuffer commands it does not switch modes until it receives the same number of buffer or unbuffer commands An example of this would be to buffer soft buffer certain panels in the system while leaving other panels unbuffered then shutting d
20. The Backup and Restore utility will only backup the WIN PAK 2 0 hardware and history database information Other data such as badge images signatures badge and floor plan graphics are not backed up by this utility This data is normally found in the WINPAK2 DATABASE folder with Badgelmage FloorPlanImage and Userlmage subfolders D uring the WIN PAK 2 0 installation prompts are provided to allow the installer to place these subfolders at other locations in your system Therefore you may not find these subfolders in the WIN PAK 2 folder Backup of these data folders can be accom plished using standard Windows backup or copying utilities Both should be done at the same time to keep all information current Backup 1 Select Backup amp Schedule from the main Backup and Restore window to create a new backup WIN PAK 2 0 3 Backup amp Schedule Restore Modify Schedule 2 When the Backup Information window is displayed enter a unique Backup Name as well as an op tional Description y rt 9 of n 0 S v ni 0 5 D 5 al 0 538 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Select a database Backup Type Complete will make a complete backup and Differential will backup only the differences from the last complete appended or differential backup Backup Restore Schedule Application WIN PAK 2 0 9 shop ninesi Hila Type F Tartan Cac M Targtane tea er dnb Foss hp P Toe
21. The Complete Access Control Software User Guide TD0021 rev0802 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Information in this document is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Northern Computers Inc 1999 2002 Northern Computers Inc All rights reserved Microsoft Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows NT Microsoft SQ L and MSDE are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Burle Javelin Panasonic Philips Vicon D edicated Micros G eutebruck Pelco Wiegand Hughes IDI Proximity Casi Rusco Cotag Proximity D orado Magstripe Cards Sielox Wiegand Cards Sielox Proximity Cards NCS 25 Bit Cards NCS 29 Bit Cards Kidde Cards Continental 36 Bit Cards Continental 37 Bit Cards and other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners User Non Disclosure Agreement 3 User Non Disclosure and License Agreement Important This Agreement must be read before proceeding with any Northern Computers Inc software By installing this software you agree to the terms of this Agreement Important This software is a proprietary product of Northern Computers Inc It is protected by
22. When the communication server is started another message will appear several seconds later indicating that it is now working This procedure only needs to be done once the first time All other additions made by the wizard will become available immediately after the wizard is finished BuLLLUeIBOJd Time Management WIN PAK 2 0 Time Zones Within the WIN PAK 2 0 System a Time Zone is a range of hours and days that is given a name These named time periods are used to define when actions such as doors unlocking or cards are valid are allowed in the access control system For example when a panel is configured you choose which time zones are available at the panel 170 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Time Zones are made up of blocks of time or slots a start time and end time and days on which the Time Zone is valid Since a given Time Zone may contain more than one block of time the number of blocks is indicated when the Time Zone is created There is no limit on the number of Time Zones that can be created however a maximum of 63 time slots can be downloaded to an N 1000 series panel WIN PAK 2 0 keeps track of the number of slots applied to a given panel and signals if you exceed the limit Time Zones are combined with definitions of physical devices to create access levels An access level then determines when and where access is allowed A list of defined Time Zones can be viewed in the Time Zone Database You can s
23. Attendance Report ssssssssssrssrssestrstittnstnttat tnst At nat AntASEAANENEASEANEENEENEANEN SEENEN ENE 488 Card REPON inao aae aa ea TAE AA Sna Ca ee eo eines 489 Card History Repo esiaine aaa eE Aa AKER n ania iha 492 Card Holder REOTA iiiereri nnna aiae aa ia ni deren 496 Card Holder Tab Layout Report ssssssssssrisrierisrierierririerierinrierierinrrennrennne 500 Command File Report tec onc nied soe ial Ae a a dane 501 Gontrol Area Reporters rnai eea ao a aAA EA EARE TAA AA ERER iN 503 Device Map Report sareren Senet aoe ae ti enh denies 504 Floor Plan Reports usisna at a ssid seedling atone 511 Guard Tour Repor nde in ATA A E A a cin a aea 512 HiStOny Reporma onnee i a ein a ene eaae AE AAEN Aani 513 Holiday Group Report ssasssssssssssrssrssisisrastnstitnstnstantnntntnntnnntnnntnnnnnnnnennnnnanaa 519 Note Field Template Report ssssssssssssiissrsrssristnsissrietntintnttntrnintrnnrnninnnn nenn na 520 Operator REPOM aninvaeiin uetan inaa a E dire a audience 520 Operator Actions Report s sssssssssrsssssissrstsnsistiatinsistinttntintnatuntnnnnntnstne tantre 522 Operator Level REPOrt ivis a e pa ia a a 526 Schedule Report 3csccisc ois co ag ae aa assess ee ee ated ota derabbsem cates 527 TIME ZONE REP OME seis eke ai AeA Bae ee an ain 528 Tracking and Mustering Area R polt cecceccesceeeeceeeeeetietieetneeceenaeteee 530 16 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide IX Database Maintenance wivciisercscevatevnvereusnncdeniesdsnensscavianstenstestst
24. Canada Tijuana and your current time is 7 00 a m and you want to generate a report for today from 8 00 am to 10 00 am for the facility in New York you would select GMT 5 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada to indicate that the time elements are relative to New York three hours ahead in the future relative to your time Use the Transaction Filter tab to select the type of Card events the report should include Select all that apply listed below Transactions Reports all card events normal alarm host grant Clears Reports the card alarm events that were cleared by the operator Acknowledgements Reports the card alarm events that were acknowledged by the operator Operator Messages Reports the operator message that was entered for the alarm card event 494 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Transactions can be filtered to selected ADVs by clicking on the Filter ADV button Navigate through the Control Map structure right clicking on the branch es or device s to select or invert select ADVs Click OK to return to the Transaction Filter window The Sort on Sequence ID will diplay the report that the event was written to the WIN PAK 2 0 database instead of chronological order This can be helpful in reviewing when an event was actually received to the WIN PAK 2 0 computer When a new event is seen on the Alarm View it is given a sequence ID and any changes that occur relative to that first event
25. Generating and Printing 520 521 Overview 479 484 Estimating Report Size 482 Exporting Reports 482 Previewing Reports 483 Printing Reports 484 Report Window Conventions 481 Time Zone Report Generating and Printing 528 529 Tracking and Mustering Area Report Generating and Printing 530 Repots Schedule Report Generating and Printing 527 Reverse Read LEDs 257 Right Click Menus User Interface 73 RS 232 Connection Adding 229 230 S Schedule Server Overview 33 Scheduler 176 178 Scheduling an Event 176 178 Searching and Sorting Database Lists 75 Selecting a Language for Translation 466 Servers 203 216 Command File Server 207 216 Communication Server 203 206 Guard Tour Server 209 210 211 212 Overview 33 Tracking and Muster Server 213 216 Service Manager Overview 61 Setting UpADVs 189 191 Setting Up Card Holders 418 434 Software Concepts 29 33 Abstract Devices ADVs 29 Command File Guard Tour Muster Schedule Servers 33 Communication Server 33 Data Trees 31 Database Server 32 Floor Plan View 30 Multiple Server Design 32 User Interface 29 Index 577 Sounds 101 Standalone Systems System Setup 40 System Defaults 105 108 Alarm Handling 106 108 System Events 111 Viewing 112 System Manager Connecting Networked WIN PAK 2 0 Modules 56 Overview 62 System Requirements 37 44 Hardware 37 Modems and Communication Ports 39 Operating System 37 Panel Firmware 39
26. N 1000 Panel Name Loop 1 Panel 1 Reader 1 Loop 1 Panel 1 R1 Reader 2 Loop 1 Panel 1 R2 11 If desired type unique names rather than accepting the default names Then click Next to continue The Reader Time Zones screen will appear Operating System Windows 2000 m Server Communication Port COM1 Q C100 on se amp Cameras Communication Loop Current Loop ae one Loop Name Loop 1 Panel Address 1 Panel Type N 1000 Panel Name Loop 1 Panel 1 Reader 1 Loop 1 Panel 1R1 Time zone None z Reader 2 Loop 1 Panel 1R2 Time zone None z lt Back Next gt Cancel 12 From the Time Zone list select the appropriate time zones when the doors should be automatically unlocked Then click Next to continue The Pulse Times screen will appear next illustration Programming 165 Pf quick Start Wizard Pulse Times Operating System Windows 2000 Communication Port COM1 H C100 on amp Camera S te roae i Loop Name Loop 1 Panel Address i Panel Type N 1000 Panel Name Loop 1 Panel 1 Communication Loop Current Loop Reader 1 Loop 1 Panel 1R1 Time zone None Pulse 10 sec Reader 2 Loop 1 Panel 1R2 Time zone None Pulse 10 sec d lt Back Next gt Cancel 13 If desired type different pulse times than the default times Then click Next to continue The Continue screen will appear P Quick Start Wizard Create Loop x Lm r 9 3 3
27. NOTE The ADV selected determines which commands are available 8 From the Command list select the desired com mand Commands that are not listed can be sent to a panel as Custom Commands See the following procedure NOTE If parameters are required for the command you have se lected choose them or enter the required variables in the Parameters area of the window 9 Click OK to close the Command window The new command is added to the list in the Command File Record window 10 Click OK to close the Command File Record window and save the changes to the Command file Du LLLuesiBb0O1d NOTE Add as many commands as you wish to this file If necessary use the Move Command arrows to adjust the order of the commands you have entered 330 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Available Commands The following list shows standard commands available when defining Command Files ADV Commands Parameters CCTV Camera CCTV Switcher CCTV Monitor Door Input Loop Output amp Group Panel Server All RS232 Connect Go Home Go to Preset Iris Open Iris close Pan Left Pan Right Refresh Stop Tilt Down Tilt Up Zoom In Zoom Out Custom Command Switch Camera to Monitor Camera ID Monitor ID Refresh Switch Camera Camera ID Lock Pulse Timed Pulse Unlock Shunt Switch To Time Zone Control Unshunt Buffer All Panels Unbuffer All Panels De energize Energize
28. Searching Menu Text ceccecceeeceeeceseecseecseecneseeseeeeaeesaeeeeesaessaeseesneeeeeetaes 473 Sorting Untranslated Items 0 0 ccc ccc esseenecene sete eeeeeeaeeeeesaseeseeseeeeaeetaes 473 Changing Other System Text 0 0 cece cette cne eects cee tetecieesesaeceenaes 474 Searching Menu Text sivci sic tevin tested pene a ut ah hl adel a a 476 Sorting Untranslated IteMS ce cece eeeeene eens eeteeeeee eee eeeteeeaeeneeseenseeeas 476 Testing Translation 22 2 2 on tit ceca ane inal hina as 476 Importing a Language File oo eee ee eee eee eee e teeter teeta eesti estat ce eaetaee 476 VIIL Repone ges tess tiaia EEEE AE ORE EE 477 OVENVICW aitiin RAs aetitheia ta iti As ies A a ea ie eee arenes 479 Report Window ConventiOns ecceeceeeceee eee eceeeneeeeeecteeceeeaesneeteeeeetnaeens 481 Estimating Report Size oo eecceccsceeseeeneceeeeeeeeceeeeteeeteeeeee eases seneeseeeaetaee 482 Exporting REPOS iiini iini iiaa Atta nh eTA dea a ae 482 Previewing Reports 0 cecceceeeeeeesseesseerneeeeeteeeteeeeteetaeeaeeeeteeeseeetaetiaetiaee 483 PANUNG REDONS nc Bunce tects OG ORM NW bee elated 484 Reporting from Archived Databases o ceccecceeseeeceeeteeeeeeseeeeneeteeneeeeeeeaeens 484 Generating and Printing Reports 00 0 cece cette cee etter Atta En NEA NEANANEENE EEEE EEE EE EEEE EEEE 485 AGCeSS Area ROpO Toro reersiireeriis aerias raArE ki Eer ERI TAARN REIRON PEAS EPIRI REAA NP ERE ASTEI 485 Access Level Report mitin iona eaea hele a 486
29. Tree Structures 79 User Non Disclosure and License AgreementImportant 3 User Overview Daily Operations 109 147 Operator Guide Overview 69 System Settings 81 108 User Interface 69 80 Vv Video Backgrounds 358 Video Capture Card For Video Badging 39 Viewing and Reassigning Operators 89 578 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide W Wallpaper 103 Wiegand Card Formats 250 WIN PAK 1 x 42 WIN PAK 2 0 Features 26 29 Access Control Management 27 Cards and Card Holders 28 Communications 29 Flexible Views and Control Features 28 Windows 2000 NT 26 Windows NT 32 Wizard Installation 157 169 Panel Configuration 245 246 Working with Cards 445 460 Associating Badges and Cards 456 458 Bulk Card Add and Delete 453 456 Previewing and Printing Cards 459 460 Workstation Defaults 98 104 Alarm Printer 100 101 Directories 102 Record Retrieval and Performance 99 Restore 104 Sounds 101 Wallpaper 103 Northern Computers Inc 135 West Forest Hill Ave Tel 414 766 1700 Web Site Oak Creek WI 53154 Fax 414 766 1798 www nciaccessworld com
30. abstract device names included on the report when it is generated Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report Reports 5 oO ul Generating a Server Device Report Server device reports can display all or a range of servers 1 Select Servers on the Filter D evice tab to open the Server tab of the report window Device Fier Server Fiter Ber kan Active Dataa Print Connunicaton Sawer Al Othe Sena Servet to Pie Export Fi 7 ae Ore Ta Desai om Come 2 Indicate whether to print Comm Server information or All Other Servers in the report 3 In the Servers to Print area of the window select one of the following to define the report All reports on all servers One reports on an individual server using the From field activated when the One radio button is se lected Range reports on a designated range of servers using the From and To fields These fields are acti vated when the Range radio button is selected 506 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Reporting on Communication Loops Loop device reports allow you to indicate whether to report on a C 100 or 485 PCI loop 1 Select Loops on the Filter Device tab to open the Loop tab of the report window 2 Select the appropriate radio button to indicate the Type of loo
31. attempted Click any space in the table to enter a site code If no site code is defined then site code checking is not performed GHuLLLUeIBOId When the system is set up for ABA card formats Site Codes cannot be entered Hardware Options The available hardware options vary depending on the type of panel selected The AEP 5 supervised input board and ERB Expanded Relay Board are only used with N 1000 II panels If the Groups option is selected you can select one or two AEP 3 Output Expansion Boards Each board adds eight output relays to a panel 260 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Advanced Options Click the Advanced button to further define the panel configuration The Panel Configuration Advanced Options window is displayed Panel Configuration Advanced Options Panel Configuration Advanced Options Multiple Interlock Protection CIPFR Power Fail Reroute OD Option Duress OOL 16 bit card number plus sitecode 0J 20 bit card number plus sitecode BMKPODOZO e o Mo SO 1 Enable or disable the Advanced Options as neces sary for your panel configuration Items listed in the Advanced Options area of the window are depen dent upon selections made earlier in the configura tion process 2 When you have selected all desired Advanced Options explained in the following section click OK to return to the Options window 3 Click Next to advance to the Panel Configuration
32. button At this point the detail view becomes active and the selected record can be edited Clicking Add on the main window opens a blank record dialog allowing a new database record to be entered Workstation Defaults can be set so that the Detail View opens whenever a database is opened To enable this option select Several WIN PAK 2 0 features use trees to display information Trees allow information to be organized into logical or geographical groups The tree structure is created as you program your access control system therefore it is tailored to meet your specific needs There are four tree structures used within the WIN PAK 2 0 System Device Map Control Map Access Area Map and Tracking Area Map The D evice Map is unique in that devices are actually defined as they are added to the tree structure The other trees define the hierarchy or relationship of the resources not the resources themselves Workstation Defaults on the System menu Click the C Always show record view check box on the Defaults tab A 5 Structures 3 For example Access Areas are defined by a lists of entrances The Access Area tree shown here provides a way to view the data F Acces Ana e E East Cost Hune p Locs ia B whole Conpary Show dovaleble eines WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide The tree can be collapsed so that only the top level of information is displayed By clicking the plus sign to the left of a folder t
33. eiea hci Aa Informabon Eet ad Beooratace Gait Anaa eel j se ee LE 4 Select a card number with an appropriate access level and click OK to return to the Cards tab The card number and access level are now listed in the card holder record You can add multiple cards by repeating this procedure If no cards are available open the Card database by clicking the Add button on the Cards tab See Adding a Card from the Card Holder Database following section for more information Adding a Card from the Card Holder Database You can add a card to the system while adding or editing a card holder by opening the Cards tab then clicking Add to open the Card Record window Card Holders 421 Enter the Card Number and select the Access Level for the card Select any other options you want in order to configure the card Click OK to save the card and return to the Card Holder Record window Deleting a Card Holder Record 1 Open the Card Holder database window from the Card menu 2 Select the desired card holder and click Delete 3 You are prompted to confirm the card holder dele tion You are also notified if there are any depen dency conflicts that need to be taken care of cards photos signatures assigned to the card holder before continuing Card Holder Dependency Conflict X You have requested to delete a Card Holder This Card Holder has Cards and an Image or Signature Detach
34. f Right click the badge and select Properties Select the Badge tab of the Badge O bject Properties window Click the Capture button The Capture Image window is displayed showing the live view from your video camera If TWAIN is selected as your video DLL you will have a different view and will need to select the source and get the image woes Bhesa i 4 ET a oe S AAR ol j me Miata He alal sjt Shearer ij alaj 7 Fai Digi a i ja Coat ij Bo as Finikiy D 1 l jt Compe ij aj Click Settings to expand the window and access the video settings Adjust the Video settings explained below until the picture is satisfactory If you are not using a flash set the Grab settings to the same values as the Video settings If you are using a flash reduce the Grab Brightness and Contrast Exact settings will vary depending on the type of flash and other lighting elements being used The exact settings can only be determined by experimentation 6 Click Freeze to capture the image Once the picture is frozen or captured you can make a number of adjustments The Freeze Live button toggles between static and live view image When the desired image is on screen click Freeze to keep it Click Live to switch back to the live camera view Adjust the slides at the right of the background image to enhance the quality Badging 361 7 Use the cropping frame to crop the image and adjust its proportions If
35. the Selected Time Zone list shows the time zone name and Description the Number of Slots the time zone requires and the Slot the time zone occupies on the panel 1 Select a Time Zone from the Available Time Zone list and click the down arrow to move it to the Selected Time Zone list Double clicking items in either list box will move them to the other list with the exception of the Always and Never On options GSuLLLUesIBOId 2 Ifyou are using holiday overrides select the Holi day Group that applies to this panel 3 Click Next to advance to the Panel Configuration Options window next illustration The N 1000 panel has 63 time zone slots so it is possible that in a very large system the number of time zones could exceed the number of available slots In that case it would be necessary to select only the time zones that apply to a given panel To help the user determine the number of slots available the number of slots used is displayed for each time zone WIN PAK 2 0 will display a warning if more than 63 Slots are selected for this panel 254 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Panel Conhiguiaion Mpili _JAEP S Supertieed Inputa Enable or disable options as desired Refer to the descriptions of the options below Select the Anti Passback check box to enable Anti Passback which discourages users from entering with others without using their own cards Cards must be used at a designated In reader then at a
36. txt copy of the report 5 Click Close to exit the Holiday Group report win dow and return to the main Reports database 520 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Note Field Template Report 1 Select the N ote Field Template report from the Reports database window When the Note Field Template window is displayed the Filter tab is blank The Note Field Template report shows the field name and the template or note field definition Hepa Kote Fie Teaplalc 2 Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report 3 Click Close to exit the Note Field Template report window and return to the main Reports database Operator Report 1 Select the Operator report from the Reports data base window The Reports O perator report window opens with the Filter O perator tab displayed Hepat Deialdi Reports 521 2 Further define the O perator report by selecting one of the following options All reports on all operators One reports on an individual operator using the To field activated when the One radio button is se lected Range reports on a designated range of operators using the To and From fields activated when the Range radio button is selected Click the Sort tab and select a Sort Order for the report Repot Operstor E Ciperstor Tyne Opetatos Lewel H
37. vertically within the text box and it can be rotated within the box at set intervals Creating a Text Box ona Badge 1 Click the text button A on the Badge Definition window toolbar Click in the badge layout area and drag the text box to the desired size and shape e Move the text box by selecting it and using the four headed arrow to drag it to the desired position e Resize the text box by selecting it and using the two headed arrow to drag one of the sizing handles to the desired position If you use one of the corner sizing handles you can change the height and width of the box at the same time Adding and Editing Text Once a text box has been created you can add or edit text within the box 1 Right click inside the text box and select Properties The Badge Text O bject Properties dialog is displayed next illustration Badging 373 Badge Element Layout X Text Block Colors Positioning Text Fields Name Card Number Issue Activation Date Expiration Date First Name Last Name Home Phone Significant Other PH Significant Other N Hair Calar kaal Font V Size font to box Cancel Apply Help 2 On the Text Block tab enter the desired text in the Text field 3 To place specific card holder data in the text box make a selection from the Fields list D ouble click on a field to add it to the Text area of the dialog 4 Use the Size font to box check bo
38. which can be any number from 1024 through 9999 Select a num ber that is not used by another device on the network and enter it into this field The default should work fine Change this only if duplicate protocol points exist 5 Alarms with a higher priority lower number than the setting entered in the Alarm Priority for Notification field appear in the Event view 6 Alarms with a higher priority lower number than the Alarm Priority for required acknowledgment setting appear in the Alarm view and must be acknowledged before being cleared 7 Select the Write Transactions to file check box if you want a record of the server transactions written to a file C Program Files WIN PAK 2 RSD UMP GSuLLLuesbOid This option should only be selected and used for diagnos tic purposes Deselect the Write Transactions to file check box after use 8 Create an ADV for the Communication Server by clicking the Add button in the ADV area of the window 9 Click the Next button to continue The Com Server Configuration Ports window will be displayed next illustration 206 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Com Server Configuration Ports 1 Select the check boxes indicating the Ports on this server that are used for the access control system 2 Click Next Then click Finish Programming 207 Command File Server In order to use the Command File functions a Command File Server must be configured on the D evice M
39. 0 eeeeceeeeeeteeee cette tte etnetneeteeetiee tee taeeieeneenas 128 FloorPlans and ADV Control FUNCTIONS 0 0 eeeeeeceee etter etetteteetteetee eee 131 Control Map iecsssicteitact cinta fess aki mated a aaa hte ee 134 Managing Devices from the Control Map eeeeeceeeceeeceeeeteeteeeeeteeeeteaes 135 Command PES 3 8 aad ads ea tt aha ERa Aas el etiepennda aes 136 Running Command File sec ihe tee dee Gade 136 GU ard TOUN siso oul a ia atia edad ton banda eet adr aA foes awn oe 137 Starting a Guard TOUL ve snes smir na ater tones Wha Aa E Navi Rat enti 137 Tracking and MuStens nin nia oot ot asin Rion iia eden aa de 140 Monitoring the Tracking and Muster VIEW cccccceeeeeeeeeeeseetneeeteetteeteeeaes 141 Refreshing the Muster VIEW ccceeccceceeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeneteeetestetteeteeneetieeeae 142 Deleting Events from the Muster LiSt 0 ccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeetseeeeetteeceeeaes 142 Printing a Muster Report 0 0 eececeeeceeeeee ene ene eee eenee cesta taestaeteeesceetieeeaes 143 10 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Digital Vid G0 25 ntisciendsat E a Pian iad Ge T 144 Filer CONTO leri unana ni Sao Oe ani aot acing habia 145 Digital Camera Controls 0 eee eee eee eee eee teste teens teenie eter eetaee 146 Right Click Menu OPtiONS 00 eee eee eee eee eet e tees ete tee teeteetiee cee tenaeel 147 IV Programming ciesa a a e a a aa a AVN as Seat EEN 149 Programming OVervieW cece ieee tr i tt Atta EANEENEAEENNEANEANEENEAEE
40. 411 Mask Character Descriptions 0 eee ceeeeeee eee ee etter teres steer teeteetetaee 411 Setting Up Card Holder Tabs ssssssssessssssisersrsssrssrnrentrstntnnstnnnntinstinntensrnrinrenersnn 413 Adding a Card Holder Tab sssssssssssiserssrssissrsrrssrsrinrintnsrnntintnernntnsrinnnnsnn 414 14 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Editing or Deleting a Card Holder Tab oo eeecceeceecceceeeieeeieeeeeeeeeeeaee 416 Configuring AutoCard LOOKUP eect eect eee tee tener tetas tieetieecetaenieeneeeaes 416 Setting Up Card Holders oo ccceeccecceseecsecseeeneceeeeeeeeeesaeecaeeneeseeeteeesaeeaseeenieeneeeenes 418 Adding Card Holders aid miasmoj unien a at aaa aas 418 Attaching a Card to a Card Holder sssssssssresierssrisrisserierisinsrierseriernerenin 420 Adding a Card from the Card Holder Database sssi 420 Deleting a Card Holder Record sssssssssrssrsisrrstrsrisristnstisristnnrnnrnnnnrnnrnenna 421 Removing a Card from a Card Holder ssssesssssessessrisrierssrierseresrieinrrenrnernns 422 Adding User Defined Card Holder Information ssseeeessesersriererererrrnss 422 Card Holder PHOTOS tinnu innia sna Anat a aa a a ces 423 Importing a Card Holder Photo ssssssssississisrrsisrisrisrnsrisristnnrrsrnnrnnrnnnnneens 424 Importing Additional Card Holder Photos sssssssssessrsersrrsersssrrsrrsrrnrienrerens 427 Deleting a Card Holder Photo cceeceeccececeeecceeeeeee eee eeetieseeeeneeceeeenae 427 Capturing Card Holer Photos ceceesecsceseeeec
41. 7 rt Y J ct O 64 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Registering Software Online You can register your WIN PAK 2 0 software online by visiting the Northern Computers Inc web site at www nciaccessworld com Or select Registration from the Northern Computers Inc option on the WIN PAK 2 0 Help menu Internet Explorer will open at the registration site Help 4 Help Topics Northern Computers Inc gt Fa On the Web zj License P Contacts Yal About WIN PAK 2 0 SJECRETY Fax Registration You can print out the registration form on your software CD and FAX it to Northern Computers at the number indicated on the form Call in Registration Call Northern Computers Customer Service at 800 360 6067 Be prepared to give the Customer Service Representative both the CD Key and the Site Code You will be given a Site Key Enter this number in the Site Key field activating the license for your software The number of clients and number of servers licensed for your system is now displayed in the License dialog A new Site Code appears in the Site Code field Installation 65 NOTE NOTE CAUTION License Files The encryption software writes files to your hard drive as part of the licensing You must take care not to move or damage these files or your license will be invalidated and you will not be able to access your system The license files cannot be moved There is no License
42. A larm Priority PROM Programmable Read only Memory Pulse A command to energize an output point or shunt an input point for a specific amount of time Push Bar A door unlatching device When pushed it releases a lock If the push bar is connected electronically to the controller it signals the controller that an egress event has taken place R RAM Refers to random access memory used in a computer or control panel Reader Any device that reads encoded information from a card or token and transmits the information to a control panel Real Time Processing events as they happen Redundant Having two or more ways of doing things Redundant hardware indicates that two or more items exist for every single function The duplicate hardware can replace failing hardware at a moment s notice Re enable Return the system to normal operation Relay An electronically operated switch that when activated by a change in conditions on an electronic circuit activates other devices on the same or another electronic circuit Glossary 565 REX Request to exit device Refers to a button pushbar or similar device that allows free egress without setting off an alarm RFI Radio frequency interference S Secure To arm or enable Serial Port A plug on a computer that is normally used for communications functions These functions include attaching a computer to a modem or a computer to communications loops that are conne
43. Attached Cards b Q L oJ Q 0 ui m Images and Signatures Delete Attached Images C Detach Attached Images Cancel 4 Use the Card Holder Dependency Conflict dialog to indicate whether you want to delete the cards and images or detach them from the card holder 5 When asked to confirm the deletion click OK to delete the card holder Click Cancel to retain the card holder 422 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE Mere Hoaren Merkel Sgiath Disisi Vehicles Al infomation HomePhone Cak Cast Biometics Removing a Card from a Card Holder Card holders can have multiple cards assigned to them Therefore cards can be added to or removed from card holders as needed To remove a card from a card holder select the desired card holder from the Card Holder database window and click Edit Open the Cards tab and select the Card Number to be removed Click Detach to remove the card from the Card Holder Record Click OK to exit the Card Holder Record window A card s history events created while attached to multiple card holders will be associated with the appropriate card holders Adding User Defined Card Holder Information Select one of the defined tabs For this example select the All Information tab of the Card Holder Record window to enter details on the card holder Card Holders 423 Any note fields and tabs configured via the Note Field Template and Card
44. Camera CCTV Camera Action Group Action Message Description CCTV Camera OK CCTV Camera Trouble The camera is working properly The camera is NOT working properly Camera P T CCTV Camera Action Group Action Message Description CCTV Camera OK CCTV Camera Trouble The pan tilt camera is working properly The pan tilt camera is NOT working properly Cards Entrance Reader Action Group Action Message Description Anti Passback Violation Card Not Found Expired Card Host Grant Card downloaded Host Grant Door unlocked Invalid PIN Invalid Site Code Invalid Time Zone Trace Card Valid Card A card was denied entry because it has already been used going in out without properly going in out A card was denied entry because it was unknown to the reader A card was denied entry because it has been expired by date Access was granted to the user if event is within two minutes of computer time The control panel was updated with valid card information Access was granted to the user if event is within two minutes of computer time The control panel was not updated with valid card information A card was denied entry because it was used with an invalid PIN A card was denied entry because it did not have a proper site code A card was denied entry because it was used outside its time period A card that is being traced was used and entry was granted A valid card had been used and e
45. Chutputs B Communication Ports amp Hadena Programming 301 The Add Devices window is displayed Add Devices Device Type Description Lx a East Coast Parking Entrance Reader a East Coast Parking Exit Reader Du uLULIDOId 2 Use the Device Type list to select the type of device to be added to the Control Area When you select a Device Type the Name Description list shows all devices not currently assigned to the Control Map 3 Highlight each device to be added to the Control Area and click Add The device is immediately placed on the Control Area window The device is no longer available on the Add De vices window Continue this procedure until all the required devices are included in the Control Area 302 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 4 Click the close button X in the upper right corner of the window to close the Add Devices window The Control Area Tree will be displayed ES Dues Alam at Local Storage on Tat St E Dutess at East Coast Dine E gt Dues at Eas Coas Diice E Dues st Local Sbuags on 14 Sbst 3 Esa Cos ie DD Eat coas Eniances Reade Est Cost Panek amp Com E Eai Cotano sche FHE Loca Orice j Loca Storage on TH Sirel E Hute Reader Eai Gate E Husa Reader West Gaie Show Awiabie Devices Showing Available Devices Devices can also be added to the Control Area Tree by clicking the Show Available D evices check box on the Control Area window
46. Displays the height bearer bars left and right borders Check Digit Error detection Show Spacer Displays the space before and after the barcode data Switch Text Switches top and bottom text The barcode data displayed as text is placed above the barcode The text entered into the Text field is displayed below the barcode Check Digit 2 Error detection Arial The selected text font Courier N ew The selected text font Bold Applies bold format to the text Italic Applies italic format to the text Editing Barcode Colors Before changing the barcode color note that most barcode readers are infrared and require that the barcode be black resin black 1 Right click the barcode box and select Properties Select the Colors tab of the Badge Barcode O bject Properties window 2 Click the Foreground Color browse button to open the Color window Select a color swatch for the barcode or create and select a custom color 3 Click OK to return to the Colors tab The new barcode color is displayed in the Foreground Color field Badging 385 Changing the Barcode Background Color Before selecting a background color note that visible light barcode readers require some contrast between the barcode and the background If the background color is too dark the reader will not be able to read the code 1 Right click the barcode box and select Properties Select the Colors tab of the Badge Barcode O bject Properties win
47. Holder Database by selecting the Card Holder option on the WIN PAK 2 0 Card menu or by clicking the Card Holder toolbar button The Card Holder database list displays existing card holders by first and last name The information in the Card Holder database can be searched and sorted by first or last name or by any note field The Search and Sort fields allow you to search the database and choose the order in which the card holders are listed Refer to the Working with Database Windows section of chapter 3 for details on working with the Search and Sort fields Adding Card Holders You can add or edit card holder information or delete card holders from the main Card Holder database window 1 With the Card Holder database window open click the Add button Card Holders 419 2 The Card Holder Record window is displayed with the Name tab open Caid Hoer 3 Enter the Card Holder s First and Last Name NOTE This is the minimum information required to add a record to the database If you click OK at this point the new card holder is added to the database without any cards being attached Q a5 o Q 0 v 420 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE Attaching a Card to a Card Holder 1 Open the Cards tab of the Card Holder Record window 2 Click Attach The Select window is displayed 3 Click Find to display a list of available card num bers Maa Hommindorssion Medion Sionfecarnilgher
48. Multiple devices can be configured Configuring RapidEye Digital Video 1 From the Configuration menu select Device gt Device Map The Device window will open Foevce aoa gy Dei Connmcation Saver 2 In the Device window above right click on the Devices folder and select Add gt RapidEye The RapidEye DVSS Configuration window will open below Rapidiye OVS Configuration i Ea Find F3 Conmmand File Server U Schedule Server paj Guard Tour Server amp Tracking fi Muster Sarvar o Rapis 3 J kieki Uspet Pasawrond Dermipion 216 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide e Lamers Configuration or 2 No AD 3 Ho AD Jd Ho AD 5 amp T B J amp Ho D Ho AD JB Ho AD 13 3 Type in the Name User and Password parameters The Description parameter is optional NOTE The DVSS Name must be the same as the name of the RapidEye Site being connected to NOTE The User and Password must be the same as defined in the RapideEye Multi software in order to control a RapidEye device 4 Click Next to bring up the RapidEye Camera Con figuration window below No Ag Ho A 110 Ko AD 117 hio ADi J12 Ho ADi zj Lory ord Ti 5 For each camera defined in the RapidEye system enable a camera ADV then click Add The sequential order of the ADVs correspond directly to the sequential order of the RapidEye cameras Selecting the Pan and T
49. Multiple Hard Drive Setup Considerations Multiple hard drive setup follows the same basic guide lines for single hard drive consdierations except that the WIN PAK database is installed on a separate hard drive logical or physical Since WIN PAK only monitors the database s hard drive and free space the partition or physical location of the OS is not monitored In a multiple hard drive configuration where the database is located on a separate drive it is customary to also locate the photo ID images layouts and floor plan data on the database drive This provides additional protection against O S crashes where the O S s hard drive may need to be reformatted before the OS is reinstalled A typical example A single 9 GB hard drive is partit ioned to a 2 GB C and a 7 GB D The C partition con tains the O S and WIN PAK program only This leaves about 1GB or 50 free space on the OS partition The 7 GB D partition contains the WIN PAK MSDE database photo ID badge information including photos signatures and layouts and floor plan information Database Maintenance 547 This example assumes a starting capacity of 7 GB minus 2 GB full database minus 3G B MSDE recommended free space leaving 2 GB left for photo ID and floor plans The warning thresholds for 7GB of partitioned hard drive space may be nominally set as indicated below Database Warning Threshold 1600MB 80 utilization Alarm Threshold 1800MB 90 utili
50. OK to return to the Command File Server Configuration window Click N ext Then click Finish to add the server to your Device Map Programming 209 Schedule Feive Ciril iia irr Ecrede Ben i fe Schedule Server In order to use the Schedule functions a Schedule Server must be configured on the Device Map Normally the Schedule Server is located on the same machine as the Database Server Configuring a Schedule Server 1 From the Configuration menu select Device gt Device Map The Device window will open 2inlx gy ia Find 3 Cormand File Server 2 In the Device window above right click on the Devices folder and select Add gt Schedue Server The Schedule Server Configuration window will be displayed 3 i BuLLLUeIBOJd 3 Enter a unique Name for the Schedule Server using up to 30 characters This is a required field 210 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide If desired enter a Description of the Schedule Server using up to 60 characters Enter the Machine N ame where the server is located This is usually the same machine as the Database Server It is generally not necessary to change the Protocol End Point However there are multiple servers Communication Command File Guard Tour Tracking and Muster and each must have a unique protocol end point which can be any number from 1024 through 9999 Select a number that is not used by another device on the networ
51. PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Select the interlocking Point from the drop down list NOTE Only input points output points or groups that have already been activated appear on this list If the point you need is not listed go to the correct dialog and activate the point then return to this window 4 5 Select the Alarm Action for the interlocked point This is the action that the second point will take when the initial input becomes active Alarm and Normal Actions include e No Action e Energize De Energize e Pulse e Pulse Off Follow Invert Follow Indicate the Normal Action for the interlocked point This is the action the second point will take when the initial point returns to normal status Default Panel Input Definitions The following list shows typical input point defaults Input N 1000 II N 1000 III N 1000 IV 1 o Ny num BW N 9 11 12 13 16 May be used as matrix keypad inputs when the keypad option is enabled Door 1 Status Door 2 Status Egress 1 Egress 2 General Alarm General Alarm General Alarm Primary Power General Alarm Tamper General Alarm Door 1 Status Door 2 Status General Alarm General Alarm Egress 1 Egress 2 General Alarm General Alarm General Alarm General Alarm General Alarm Door 1 Status Door 2 Status Door 3 Status Door 4 Status Egress 1 Egress 2 Egress 3 Egress 4 General Alarm General Alarm General Alarm Programming 267
52. PAR 2 N Tha bobi gop is wed by Tesch Anes Hobday Gup not deleted Du wuLULIDOId Click OK to retum to the Holiday G roup database window and isolate the Holiday G roup WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 1 Select the Holiday Group to be deleted and click the Isolate button The Isolate window is displayed indicating the panels using the Holiday G roup Eat Coast Diboe Eat are Man Lobby Sales Fio 2 Use the drop down list at the bottom of the window to assign a different Holiday Group to each affected panel 3 Click OK to return to the Holiday Group database window 4 Click Delete to remove the selected Holiday Group from the database Programming 185 Device Map The Device Map accessed from the WIN PAK 2 0 Configuration menu allows you to view the physical devices that make up your access control system and shows how they are connected to one another Physical Devices and Abstract Devices Access control system devices are identified by adding them to the device tree As each physical device e g a panel or a modem pool is added to the Device Map a logical representation known as an ADV abstract device should be created for it ADVs are hardware independent devices allowing a management layer between the hardware WIN PAK 2 0 software and the database These AD Vs are then used on floor plans and control maps to monitor and control the devices Each ADV is associated with an Action Group wh
53. Remove Shared Files or Resources window appears select Yes to all to remove all shared files if the purpose of removal is to reinstall the WIN PAK 2 0 program because some files have become corrupted Select No to all if the WIN PAK 2 0 program will not be reinstalled on the computer Reboot your PC after completing the removal process and before reinstalling WIN PAK 2 0 or any other software The Uninstall program does not remove database information It only uninstalls the program You will need to manually delete the WIN PAK 2 0 directory to recover hard drive space The default location will be on the C Program Files directory unless changed during the installation Installation 61 Service Manager The WIN PAK 2 0 Service Manager is a utility which allows the administrator or operator to easily start and stop the software services Open the WIN PAK Services window by double clicking the shortcut icon on your desktop or by selecting it from the Windows Program menu Northern Computers Inc group p WIH PAK Semeei El MPA Dilihidi Serve Runa PA wr PA Arches Dolabsse Sener Riumming asen H W PAE Correr aira Garu Running E WH PAE Conard Fike 5 arai Ruming B WTH PA Schedule Sarn Furing Sp a SATA PAR ister enas Aung fa WIH PAE Guard Tow Sare FRiuming 7 rt Y J ct O The installed program components are listed and the Status column indicates whether or not each is running Select the se
54. Right click the panel and select Initialize from the subsequent menu The Panel Initialization O ptions window opens Maintaining the Ctrl key down while selecting multiple panels allows you to initialize a group of panels with a minimal number of key strokes F Panel Configuiation Options Tine and Date FF Cad F Command File E Hoia FF Tire orta F ig Peria F Dupa Points Groups If you want to send all information to the panel click Select All This will replace all panel program ming with the new information being sent Otherwise if you want to update selected informa tion do not select Panel Configuration O ptions Select the check boxes for each type of information you want to send then click OK Programming 283 NOTE NOTE Panel Initialization Options Once the Panel Initialization process is started progress can also be viewed in the Event Viewer The Initialization process can be canceled by right clicking the Panel and selecting Cancel Initialization Panel Configuration O ptions Sends all panel configuration information This resets your panel programming It is recommended that you use the Select All feature button when the Panel Configuration Options are to be sent Time amp Date Updates panel time and date with the time and date of the computer You may notice a pause for up to 50 seconds when the time and date are sent because the time is sent at the top of the comput
55. The actions available are as follows No Action Energize No change Shunts to previous input De energize Pulse Pulse Off Follow Invert Follow Un shunts Momentarily Pulses off input Follows state of Follows input point shunts input currently being component A opposite state state point point for duration shunted Then where energize of component A of defined shunt restores inputto shunt time shunted state de energized unshunt Output Group No Action Energize De energize Pulse Pulse Off Follow Invert Follow No change Activates De activates Momentarily Pulses off output Follows the state Follows to previous output output energizes output currently being of component A opposite state state NOTE point for duration energized Then where energize of component A of defined pulse restores output shunt time to energized de energize state unshunt Initializing Panels When panels are first added to the system they must be initialized so that the information entered during panel configuration can be sent to the panels Likewise whenever there is a change in the panel configuration Panel Configuration Option Holiday Time Zone or Interlocking changes the new information must be sent to the panels The only exceptions to this are ADV changes panel and reader names or individual cards and card holders which are automatically sent to the panels Panels are initialized from the Control Map view or fr
56. Tine Fe Urabe f Send Cad DE Changes 2 Enter a Schedule Name for the event 178 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 4 Select an event Type Other options on the window may be activated depending on the type selected Schedule types include e Activate and Deactivate Cards e Dial Remote Area e Run Command File e Send Date and Time e Update Custom Access Level Dial Remote Area If Dial Remote Area is selected as the event type as indicated in previous illustration fields in the Dial Remote Area of the window should be defined Select a Remote Area from the drop down list Indicate the action to take place upon dial up Buffer Unbuffer Send Card DB Changes or Send D ate and Time Run Command Files If Run Command File is selected as the event type above the Command File field is active and a selection should be made 5 Indicate the Frequency with which the event is to occur 6 In the Next Scheduled Date amp Time area of the window indicate the date and time at which the event should occur Click the N ow button to reset the date and time fields to the current date and time Selecting Now does not implement the schedule 7 Click OK to save the schedule definition and return to the Schedule database window Programming 179 Holiday Groups A Holiday Group is a collection of holiday definitions Some holidays like New Year s D ay occur on the same date every year while others occur on a different date
57. To initialize the panel s click on Operations Control Map and click on the by Quick Start Control Area to open up the branch Right click on the panel that was added and select Initialize Select All and click OK A panel initialization status window will display the initialization progress Repeat the procedure for as many panels as were added to the system Multiple panels can be initialized at the same time on an RS 485 line If C 100 is being used initialize one panel at a time If this is the first time the wizard was run and there were no previously defined WIN PAK communication ports then the communication server needs to be restarted Restart the communication server by stopping it from the WIN PAK Service Manager and then start it An error indicating that the communication server is not responding will appear if the WIN PAK User Interface is open Click OK When the communication server is started another message will appear several seconds later indicating that it is now working This procedure only needs to be done once the first time All other additions made by the wizard will become available immediately after the wizard is finished It is normal to receive alarm activities from the panel during the beginning of the initialization process These alarms will be displayed on the Alarm View window To acknowledge the alarms click on the first event and then hold the shift key down and select the last event You may use
58. Transfer utility It is recommended to obtain a WIN PAK 2 0 hardware key WP2KEY for multi drive RAID configuration computers to avoid licensing problems if one of the drives needs to be replaced 7 rt Y J ct O Norton Speed Disk Utility Using Norton Speed Disk can invalidate your license Do Not use Norton Speed Disk before making changes to the utility indicated below Speed D isk is the defragmentation utility included in Symantec s Norton Utilities To prevent loosing license files 1 Open Speed Disk and select O ptions Customize and then Unmovable Files from the File menu 2 Specify that the ent key and rst files cannot be moved 3 Save the new profile by selecting Files O ptions Optimization Save Speed Disk can now be run without affecting your license files Chapter 3 User Overview Operator Guide Overview User Interface System Settings Daily Operations User Overview 69 Operator Guide Overview User Interface The User Interface section of this chapter covers the basic conventions used throughout the graphical user interface including an overview of the GUI menus and toolbar options how to work with database windows and how to log in to the system The System Settings section of this chapter explains how to set up operators and operator levels how to configure workstations and how to set certain system defaults The Operations section provides de
59. a Database Backup before deleting records 7 Are you sure that you want to delete the records before the selected Date Click Yes to proceed with the deletion process Click No to stop the deletion 6 A status bar displays the progress of the deletion process including the name of each database as it is processed Unwanted history files can also be removed from the databases This is generally done after you make a backup copy of your database files Use the Delete History utility to delete history records prior to a selected date Database Maintenance 535 Deleting History from Database 1 Select Database Maintenance from the WIN PAK 2 0 File menu The Database Maintenance dialog opens on your desktop Database Haintenanca D eneee Ci etested Apeid E Dete History Uni Das TE Chang Datshene Tabe a c 2 Select the Delete History check box 3 Click the Change button and select a date for the Until Date field 19 20 Zi 22 23 24 25 26 27 FH 29 WH 1 3 d 5 4 Click Today to select the current date or select a date from the calendar History up to today but not including today will be deleted 5 Click OK to return to the Database Maintenance window y rt g of n 0 S v a 0 5 D 5 A 0 536 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 6 Click Start A prompt reminds you to make a backup copy of the databases before deleting records Click Yes to proceed with the
60. a a 112 Opening Event View occ ccecceeeeeseececeeeeeeeseecaeeeeeeeeeesaeseeeseeteeneeneeetaes 113 Filtering Event ViOWS perisitua aein udii a Vaia a eters AA E i 113 Linking Event View with a Floor Plan sesssssssssssrssrierisssrierirrnsriersrreernererens 114 Alan ViCW Srita ee eats Mt Dee ie Mee elem 115 Using the Alarm View Command Buttons eseese 116 Alarm View Right Click M NUS cccecescceeeeeeeeeneeeneteeetneeteseeeeceetaeteeseeeaaes 117 Filtering Alarm VieW jis aaa aad ian naa a ALERE aeii NENEA 117 Linking Alarm View with a Floor Plan oo ccceseecteeee ects eeteeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeeeaes 119 Alarm View Details s scicsstdicentiactetaditiaieedaten a e e dune nantes 120 Adding a Note to an Alarm ceececcceeeeee cee eneeene eee eteeeceeetestaeseeeneeecaeeeaes 121 Auto Gard LOOKUP weit i state dred Sieh Uraaa APEERE AETIA IRA RER a aia TES meee 121 Activating AutoCard LOOKUP 0 0 ceccccecceeteeee teeter eects eeneeteeteseeeeieeceeeaes 122 Live MONITOR MIGW iieri enai feats conned coded oneesd paedes f petit tela inate anan 124 Opening Live Monitor VieW c cee cece cette ee cee ete tene tte eeeeetee tee taeeneenenias 124 Controlling the Camera oo eee eee et reeset teens te etieecenaeeeeneeeas 125 WINSPAK 2 0 CCTV OPUONS witch ecesid ekon Sad ele hand 127 Floor Plan Vie Wienia E ell a wad ionkhands 128 Floor Plan Control FUNCtIONS 0 0 eecceeceee ete etee eee eeee cette cee taeseaeseaesneeeceeeeaes 128 Opening a Floor Plan VIEW
61. and click the Next button to advance to the next window The Back buttons on the dialogs allow you to review or edit information Click the Cancel button to exit the setup process without saving any information entered System documentation is available via the Help button When you have finished all of the dialogs the Next button text changes to Finish allowing you to save your entries and complete the setup process 218 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE Create an ADV for your communication interface when you program it so the ADV is available when you set up your Floor Plan or Control Area Definition and to report events to the viewers Adding C100 Panel Loop A C 100 Panel Loop represents a configuration of one or more N 1000 panels A loop requires only one communication port on a communication server and there can be up to 63 panels per loop With the Device Map open right click the Communication Server that you are connecting to select Add then select Panel Loop C 100 from the pick list The Loop Configuration Basic Information window is displayed Loop Configuration Basic Information C100 Leap Conliguiation Basic abismal aE Pal JE G4 T0001 Centrs Tiree U5 Cansdal J 1 Enter a unique Name for the panel loop using up to 30 characters This is a required field 2 If desired enter a Description to further identify the panel loop This field is optional and holds up to 60 characters
62. area of the badge Other items are then placed on this background The outline in the Badge Definition window next illustration shows the printable area 352 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE There are three ways to provide a background fora badge select a single color for the background capture an image for the background or import a graphic that can be added to the Background Image list Use the Badge tab to import background images as well as to determine how the program will fit the image to the available space If no badge object is selected when the dialog is opened the settings apply to the entire badge If a shape bitmap or other object is selected a different Object Properties dialog appears and the settings apply to the selected object Background Images can be imported into the WIN PAK 2 0 database from any directory Once added to the WIN PAK 2 0 database background image files are available to any workstation Scanned images photos taken with a digital camera and artwork created in a drawing or paint program can all be incorporated into your badge design However they do need to be saved in one of the following supported file types bmp jpg pcx and tga Badging 353 The Stretch Width Stretch Height and Keep Aspect Ratio options allow graphics to fill placeholders that are not exactly the same size as the graphic The stretch options make the graphic fill the space as you hav
63. as of the individual operator 8 Click the Run Report button to generate the report FF peste schon Hop am t omaamme ay ee Q owt Mel 2 Operator Actions Re H Tet r tea L mm y dal S AA Oe Jair Ceit Opcador lagged n ded 03 2002 Oa LI Jabr Diae Djma khta Ja 15 Aa OF 155 Jakes Dear Op meader logged on del 3 SE OF EI Jabr Cie Og enter bagged Ont Jel 15 BD OF 857 Jabr Dar Smd Data md Tima Crepun Hormio ded 5 SOR OF dake Disk Send Die m Tre Computed Moret Jai bi DO Oa Jahn Dian Send Di ed Time Compu Homie ded 15 SE OF a 8 Jahr Die Opecder lagged in ii Se es Jabr Dae Oipemador bagged Chat Jel 05 OD 07 Se Jahn Chie ipui torisi Wert Labbe in def 05 2 aiia Jabr Dae Tra Lhethaas dl Wart Lakky ini Jed 05 GP Fd Aah Derr ingeiSkorded Wee Dabiy nd de 14 SO OPE Jabra Deel Theta Wart Latty bn 4 Jaiba SO OT Jaha Dar Operaior lagged Oui Je 03 2S OT Jako Dos Ciperales bagel in Je 15 200 ed Jahn Dae Opmer lagged Chai ded i BS EN Jabr Dist Opes logged in Jol bs BD I labri Dian Cig maier lagged ii Fed Bes SOS OF LT Aube Feat Opmer lagged Ohi dol 6 SO UF LB Jan Dion Cmar bagged Ghai da b A a ai Jahr Die pme lagged in dol ES SS 0 Jahri Das Pid rebates Wert Lowber After the O perator Actions report is generated above it can be exported to Excel HTML ASCII PDF or TIFF formats or printed by clicking the appropriate control button in the tool bar located at the top o
64. components to which the O perator has access and the Time Zone defines when the operator can log in to the system O perator access is password protected and proper password security must be maintained Once WIN PAK 2 0 is installed a password should be defined and used for each operator This is critical to the security of the entire system Operator Level Database The Operator Level database contains information on existing O perator Levels These levels define what a given operator or group of operators can see and do within the system The Operator Level database opens as a two pane window On the left is a list of existing O perator Levels on the right is the O perator Level tree The O perator Level tree consists of control area devices along with databases and user interface elements Individual operator levels are defined by assigning rights to branches or individual items on the tree 82 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Adding an Operator Level 1 Select Operator Level from the WIN PAK 2 0 System menu Wht Adenine Haram paaka Larval Larz Operator alabana E ietu Ditra biria Devece Cea Aesi dakais ond marti 2 Click Add to open the O perator Level dialog User Overview i sae Bi ieceri Depa 3 Enter a Name for the O perator Level with up to 30 characters This is a required field 4 Enter a Description for the O perator Level with up to 60 characters This field is optional
65. compression and the lowest quality 9 Click OK The Import Image dialog closes and the photo appears on the Card Biometrics tab 10 Click OK to save the photo Card Holders 427 Importing Additional Card Holder Photos Add additional photos to a card holder record by following the procedures described in the previous section but change the Photo Index on the Card Biometrics tab to a new number If you do not change the Photo Index the photo you import replaces the existing photo Deleting a Card Holder Photo On occasion you may need to remove a photo from a card holder record 1 Open the Card Holder database from the WIN PAK 2 0 Card menu and select the card holder from whose record the photo is to be deleted 2 Click Edit When the Card Holder Record window is displayed open the Card Biometrics tab 3 In the Photo area of the Card Biometrics tab set the Index number to that of the photo to be deleted 4 Click Delete to remove the photo 5 You are prompted to confirm the deletion Click OK to remove the photo or Cancel to keep it b Q L oJ Q 0 ui Capturing Card Holer Photos Photos can be added to a card holder s information when the card holder is first added to the database or photos can be added for existing card holders 1 Open the Card Holder database from the WIN PAK 2 0 Card menu and select the desired card holder 2 Click Edit then open the Card Biometrics tab of the Card Holder
66. control system dictates the size and layout of the floor plan views Any given workstation can monitor one or more floor plans Floor Plan Control Functions Devices can be controlled from the floor plan view Right click on an ADV to open its control menu then select a command The commands available depend on the type of object selected Opening a Floor Plan View Click the O pen Floor Plan toobar button or select Floor Plan from the Operations menu Open Flos Plan Talet Noor 2 ol the local buking E mive Bon 3 of the beca beaker E Bale Gitar Techrecal suppail caris E Al socess contol equomert L es User Overview 129 When the Open Floorplan window is displayed select a floor plan and click the OK button The selected floor plan opens in a separate window next illustration identified by its title bar Tach Level Gear Pear 2 Tinea ee Teas 5 Gel mks Chace aa a Se ae rg Cire er Pe Floor Plan Floor 1 Looal Building Haim M NUDNO SN ahmii Piki PAi Tiimi aapa Dph ja ee Ligi Diara at Syster The window can be resized or repositioned to meet your needs Resize the window by clicking and dragging on the window edge until it is the desired size Reposition the window by clicking and holding in the title bar and dragging the window to the desired position 130 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Changing the Floor Plan View Several right click control options allow you to change the floor
67. coon 8 Click Next to accept the default location for the database files or click Browse and specify a differ ent location NOTE In certain applications it may be preferrable to place the database files on a different drive partition to protect them from operating system failure or to place them on a separate hard drive to isolate them from the database server Refer to the Limits and Capacities section of Chapter 9 NOTE It is recommended to install the database file on the same computer as the database server in order to benefit from the WIN PAK 2 0 backup and restore utility NOTE The next three installation screens will allow the installer to define destination of specific database files Installation Choji Deebination Local Fisse indicate whee you msi bo install sour NF 2 0 cdi linge flee Vena ora mani bo pee iha dra ihai h t tharad kaa maci Dieghnation Folder CAAWINPAKD DatabanaiUonimaga Bime ce E _ oe 9 Click Next to accept the default location for the cardholder image files or click Browse and specify a different location Fiesa indice phas pou sank iy nets pou WH PAR 20 aige niaga ia You map wart be peck Pa dran hal hart ha mod has meca Datnsion Faija a O ces 10 Click Next to accept the default location for the badge image files or click Browse and specify a different location 7 rt Y J ct O 52 WIN PAK 2 0 Use
68. copyright and trade secret laws It is licensed not sold for use on a single computer system and is licensed only on the condition that you agree to this User Non Disclosure and License Agreement Please Read This Agreement Carefully If you do not agree to the terms contained in this Agreement please return the sealed software unopened to your supplier along with any associated manuals and or other documentation If you agree to the terms contained in this Agreement proceed with the installation and registration of the software by calling 414 766 1700 between 8 00 am and 5 00 p m CST In consideration of and upon receipt of payment of a license fee by you Northern Computers Inc grants to you a non exclusive license to use this software and any associated manuals and or other documentation furnished herewith together referred to herein as SO FTWARE under the following terms and conditions Should you elect not to assume the obligations of this agreement do not break the seal on the SOFTWARE Return the SOFTWARE and any associated manuals and or other documentation to the supplier for refund or credit If you are unsuccessful in obtaining a refund or credit please contact Northern Computers Inc at 135 West Forest Hill Ave Oak Creek WI 53154 No refund or credit will be given on any SOFTWARE package on which the SOFTWARE seal has been broken You shall not provide or disclose or otherwise make available the SOF
69. de ite oil Oats De ala Let ane 291 Muster System Precautions cceccececceeceeeeeeeeee eee eeeee tee cestaeseeeeeeeeeseeeaee 293 Defining Tracking and Muster Ar aS cccescceeeceseeeeeeteeceteeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeens 296 Control Areas torent iia een ie ced a i oie data he 298 Adding Branches and Devices to the Control Area Tree secere 299 Floor Plans asero a a A aa ea ca watt Alabina EAEE 304 Floor Plan DetnitlOn ynei ceed nae E ae AAA Bia oer 305 Adding a Floor Plan megi ionii uaa iaa ihe heres atthe 306 Opening a Floor Plan Background 0 eeeeecececeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaetaeeeeteeeaes 307 Adding ADVs Links and Text Objects to a Floor Plan sosesisccsccinceni 309 Arranging Objects on the Floor Plan ssssisssrssreesrrisrerisrririeeerrirrennnnnn 315 Editng a Floor Plan Aai eena enata Paea Ea AAAA EEEa CTENAR ENR EEEa 315 Deleting an Object from a Floor Plan ssssssssisseessrrerserrrsersrrerrrersrreereeerens 315 Guard TOUTS ayisan a orane a Ea aAA E E Eia EaD anA 316 Guard Tour Database mi vsinc ceased Ak eee einen Sealy aie 316 Defining A Guard TOU oo cece cece eneetneeneeteee teens seeeteee tases sneeesaetaeeeeneeetaeeaaee 317 Check PoIntAlarMs i2 hh See hee ede ht ide ita 322 Command File Database ce ccceeeee eect te eee eens seer ee eeetteeeceetaeeeeceecenaesieenies 326 Defining Command Files 0 0 ec eeeceseeeceeeseeneeeeeeeeeeaeeneeeeeeaeeeseeeeaesestaeeeaetaee 326 Available COMMAMNAS cece ett i ee e
70. default time and date after a cold restart is J anuary 1st Monday at 12 00 a m This time stamp appears on activities in the Event view and History report Panel Time is critical to the proper operation of the muster function as the most recent event is used to determine the tracking muster status of a card holder If a card is presented to the Muster reader and the time and date stamp is earlier than the stamp from another reader location there will be no change of status to the Muster safe location In the event that the card database is lost or corrupted at the muster reader WIN PAK 2 0 recognizes all read types Not Found Time Zone Normal Trace PIN Violation and Expired as valid muster reads provided that the time is later than the previous card read as described above This function eliminates the need to reload cards or to have host grant enabled to a muster panel during a muster event Only Valid and Trace card reads count at a Tracking reader NOTE It is recommendedthat the muster panel have the host grant feature set to disabled to optimize system communication in the event the panel would go through a cold restart Du wuLULIDOId 296 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Defining Tracking and Muster Areas Tracking and muster areas are defined using a mapping tool Branches are added to the tree representing either tracking or muster areas Then the appropriate doors and readers are added to the branches 1
71. deletion process click No to stop the deletion 7 A status bar displays the progress of the deletion process including the name of the history database as it is processed Removal of the deleted database records and removal of unwanted history can be done separately or at the same time The date selection only applies to history records Database Backup and Restore Utility In the event of software or hardware problems it is always a good idea to have a recent copy of your database files The WIN PAK 2 0 Backup and Restore utility is a stand alone application that allows the user typically a database administrator to create and modify a backup and restore plan Database copies made with the Backup and Restore utility can be used to restore your database after a failure has occurred The WIN PAK 2 0 Backup and Restore utility allows for the creation of multiple scheduled backups and for the restoration of the WIN PAK 2 0 database the archive database and a temporary database which allows you to examine the restoration without affecting the current WIN PAK 2 0 databases The WIN PAK 2 0 Backup and Restore Utility is automatically installed when your WIN PAK 2 0 System is installed The utility is accessed from the WIN PAK 2 0 Program group on your Start menu or an icon on your desktop The WIN PAK 2 0 Backup and Restore Utility is made up of three components Backup Schedule and Restore Database Maintenance 537
72. designated O ut reader before the card can be read in again If the in out in pattern is broken an anti passback violation occurs and access is denied A reader is required on each side of the door for this option Programming 255 There are two forms of anti passback The first is local anti passback where only the readers attached to the control panel will be monitored The second is global anti passback where on the selected panels card reads from the odd numbered reader provide an in read and card reads from the even numbered readers provides an out read Both the in and out read is transmitted via the RS485 to other anti passback enabled panels Global anti passback configuratioin must use RS485 communication and 485 firmware version 1 04 or higher When a card is first added to a panel it is set to an unused mode This allows the first use of the card to be valid will not generate an anti passback alarm and appropriately sets the next read status to in or out The N 1000 II and N 1000 IIT support two readers Reader 1 is the In reader and reader 2 is the O ut reader The N 1000 IV supports four readers Readers 1 and 3 are considered the In readers while readers 2 and 4 are considered the O ut readers Forgiveness Anti passback can be used with or without Forgiveness With Forgiveness turned on all cards are reset at midnight so that if card users leave the building in the evening without using anti passback
73. device to another A Access Control Controlling access to a port of entry in a physical area or into a computer See E lecronic A o ss C ontrol Access Level A level of authorization defined by a reader or readers and the times those readers can be accessed Access Point A physical point of entry or exit such as a door or gate which is controlled by the system ACK Abbreviation for A cnowledge ACK NAK See 485 ACK NAK ADV An abstract device a logical representation of a physical device e g a communication server control panel door or CCTV switcher Similar in appearance to an icon an ADV is associated with an actual device in your access control system Abstract Device see ADV Activate Enable Make functional See E nergize Activation State Indicates the behavior of an activated output point Address An identification number of a specific control panel 552 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Alarm A signal that indicates a problem Alarm Input A physical input terminal on a control panel A point at which an input device is connected to a control panel Alarms View A display window that shows alarm activation and allows an operator to respond to situations reported on the system Alarm Priority Priority rankings of 1 to 99 are assigned to alarms Priority 1 is the highest and 99 is the lowest Alarm State On an input refers to the state that is opposite of anormal state Software can r
74. do so before attempting to close the window Isolating and Deleting a Badge Layout Selecting a Badge Layout and clicking D elete permanently deletes the selected badge layout from the database However if the badge layout you are attempting to delete is assigned to one or more cards you are prompted to confirm your deletion Delete Badge Layout Q Are you sure you want to delete Badge Layout Standard Card Clicking the D elete button on the D elete Badge Layout prompt removes the layout from the system and clears the link to all cards Once the link is broken the cards can not be reattached Caution should be used when deleting a badge layout as it could be attached to thousands of cards Badging 343 Creating Badges The full featured WIN PAK 2 0 badge layout utility allows you to create badge designs with shaded or graphic backgrounds logos text and barcodes and the ability to leave placeholders for card holder photos and signatures The graphical design tools employed in the Badge Definition window make setting up and laying out badge designs quite simple Badge layout begins with you naming and describing the layout and defining the size and orientation of your badge Once the basic badge design has been defined items are added to the layout and can be placed moved resized and modified in a number of ways Whether you are creating a new badge from scratch by clicking the Add button on t
75. ese lecting the Buffer check box removes all stored information and continues with the next card pre sented Multiple lookup windows can be open at the same time and each can have its own filter selections Live Monitor View NOTE The Live Monitor view displays information from a selected CCTV camera in real time Controls to adjust the Iris Zoom and Focus are located to the right of the viewing screen along with controls to pan and tilt the camera Individual frames from the video can be captured and saved for later viewing For live monitor viewing your PC must be equipped with a video capture card Connect the CCTV Switcher to the video capture card Cameras and monitors must be properly defined on the Device Map Select the CCTV Switcher monitor for Live Monitor view in Workstation Defaults System menu Workstation Defaults option Defaults tab Select the desired monitor from the Live Monitor list For viewing digital video viewing refer to the Digital Video section at the end of this chapter Opening Live Monitor View 1 Select Live Monitor from the Operations menu The Live Monitor window opens on your desktop 2 Drag the Live Monitor window to the desired location on your desktop and enlarge or reduce it as desired by dragging a corner of the window User Overview 125 3 Click the arrow to the right of the text field at the top of the window to open a drop down list of cameras Select
76. events are reported Shunt Time only comes into play when an event eg an interlock or manual shunt is applied to the input point Enter a value in the Shunt Time field to set the amount of time that the input point is deacti vated shunted when triggered This can be set in seconds minutes or hours using the radio buttons directly above the option The field defaults to 15 seconds but can be set from 0 63 seconds 0 63 minutes and 0 63 hours Debounce Time sets the amount of time in seconds that an input must be in a changed state before that change is reported In other words a debounce cycle instructs the system to ignore an alarm for a specific period of time For example an input point with a debounce time of four seconds must be in an alarm state for four cycles before it is reported as an alarm The same is true when it returns to normal condition The input point will not report as normal until it is in the normal state for the debounce period Debounce time can be set from 0 to 255 seconds In the case of input points Interlocking refers to linking the changing state of the input to either another input point an output point or a group of outputs Refer to the Enabling Interlocking for Inputs section ahead for details on interlocking All N 1000 alarm input points default to normally closed non supervised circuits used to monitor changes of state Programming 265 The inputs on an N 1000 with an
77. example if a particular guard station needs to monitor the loading dock An Alarm View can be defined that only receives messages from the loading dock doors More than one Alarm View can be defined and open at the same time Thus the same guard station could have an Alarm View monitoring the loading dock doors and another showing card reads and alarms from the computer room Linking Alarm View with a Floor Plan While Alarm View filter selections cannot be saved on the main Alarm View window you can create an Alarm View link with the filter selections you need on a floor plan definition With a floor plan definition open create an Alarm View link with the filter selections desired Refer to the Floor Plans section of the Configuration chapter for details on adding an Alarm View link to a floor plan When you open an Alarm View window from the floor plan link the filter properties you selected are applied These filter settings cannot be changed from the Alarm View window only from the floor plan definition M NUDNO JOSN 120 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Alarm View Details Select the Details check box in the Alarm View window to open a detailed view of any alarm selected from the list Included in the Alarm Details are the name of the reader input or output point the date and time of the alarm whether a digital camera is linked and the state of the reader or point The Alarm Details window also indicates if
78. example the output AD V is used on the floor plan definition to monitor the state Energized D e energized Trouble of the output point On returning to the Outputs window after creating an ADV for each output point click the N ext button to advance to the Panel Configuration Groups window Enabling Interlocking for Outputs 1 3 Highlight an output point select the Interlocking check box Select either the Input I Output O or Group G radio button to indicate the point type with which to interlock Choose the interlocking Point from drop down list Only input points output points or groups that have already been activated appear on this list If the required point is not listed go to the correct dialog and activate the point then return to this window Programming 269 4 Select the On Action for the interlocked point This is the action that the second point will take when the initial output goes on is energized On and Off Actions include No Action Energize De Energize e Pulse e Pulse Off Follow Invert Follow 5 Indicate the Off Action for the interlocked point This is the action the second point will take when the initial output goes off is de energized Default Panel Output Definitions The following list shows typical output point defaults GHuLLLUeIBOId Output N 1000 II N 1000 III N 1000 IV 1 Door 1 Door 1 Door 1 2 Door 2 Door 2 Door 2 3 Aux Aux Doo
79. expedites item deletion WIN PAK 2 0 does not permit an item e g a time zone to be deleted unless it is first removed from all areas panels access levels cards etc where it is implemented The Isolate function allows the operator to view and edit all areas where an item is implemented without having to manually access each area where the item may be implemented Selecting an item and clicking Isolate brings up the Isolate window which provides access via tabs to all areas where the selected item is implemented After the item is removed from each area clicking OK at the bottom of the window returns the operator to the main database window from which the item can now be removed User Overview 77 Clicking the Isolate button on a database window calls the Isolate window Cad dctionGens awe Operators Panis Accaet Level Farsk mumay Timezone Zanrflam MF Tech dong Emt Gate Parking Eriiance Hoth Gate Parking Eniiance Muster Pare E mistiri Fiam Saes Plincw Emt ard hian Lobby Ground floor mot ponia Ekaia Cab 2 Elevstor Cab 1 E net Court Velani Eat Coat Ojire Local Shorage on ai Sirett M NUDNO SN Vi iem Teisha caue the Tinere bo be mrad hom the selected parei Debts Dakin J Tabs across the top of the window show you where the item is used In each instance of the item s usage you can remove it or reassign it depending on where it is being used
80. have Not Yet Logged In select Search Field All and Sort by Last Log In User Overview 95 NOTE Adding Operators Click the Add button on the main O perator database window to make additions to the O perator database The Operator Record window is displayed with tabs allowing you to configure the information specifically for this operator Clicking the OK button saves the data entered and deacti vates the Operator Record window The Apply button saves the data but keeps the window active Operator Type Information Use the O perator tab of the O perator Record window to set the operator type name and description Operates Pacrraad Choststor Infrarnadicr Operator Troe Epee Dipsy lane fous Lampion arrin Cars oral E ee L 1 Use the Operator Type list to select a type Operator Assigned an operator level Admin Has global rights may view edit and delete any and every part of the system D oes not need to be assigned an operator level M NUDNO PSN 96 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 2 Enter an Operator Name This is a required field and can be up to 30 characters in length 3 If desired enter a Description for the operator up to 60 characters Setting Operator Passwords Operator passwords are set on the Password tab of the Operator Record 1 Enter the operator s New Password Passwords can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters in length and are case sensiti
81. into the CD drive An installation browser opens If the browser does not open run the Lauch exe file from the CD The first installation screen will appear Navigate through the initial installation screens and select Install WIN PAK 2 0 If an older version than Internet Explorer 5 90 4522 1800IC is installed the WIN PAK pro gram will prompt the operator to upgrade first illustration below Click Yes to upgrade If the correct version of IE is detected the first Welcome screen to WIN PAK 2 0 first illustration next page will appear Libermet Explorer out of dabe mination gt 7 RIR PAE 2 requires at eect Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 5 whechis higher than the wersion installed on thes ay Dio yray want Sebup bo install Pinot Inberesk Explorer 5 5 For yray ngaa Lre NOTE If Internet Explorer 5 5 is installed the computer will be rebooted after its installation and the WIN PAK 2 0 installation procedure will resume Installation Eaj Welcore In the WIK PAL 2 Setup pogen This Brogan Wl inch WIKLRAK 2 on jou compuler Pie eonghy peooenmerscied the yma sal al rias progam Below errer thie Sahu pii eak e aE a y hennig Chok Mest bo conimnue ydh fhe Seip miyar MANS Trove ttt eat e e Urals repan of datnibudon of ha poga E ang patan of i ag i n bitte od and cial pniti aed eal be poopecuted bo the mamun eedent percrble under kya ee cone 2 Click Next to adva
82. it is done Cold Restart Restarting a panel after the power has been completely removed then restored This might happen after a storm knocks out power to the area After a cold restart a panel s programming is missing and the panel needs to be initialized Communications Loop See L oop Configuration The way in which computers software and related equipment are interconnected to operate as a system Contact An electrical switch that can be open or closed state That state may be electrically magnetically or physically controlled Continuous Reads A software setting that enables a panel to continuously monitor a card reader and or keypad If this is not enabled all cards and keypunches are ignored until the panel completes the actions dictated by the previous card read or keypunch Control Panel A specialized computer that manages access for specific doors and related devices eg N 2000 CPU Central processing unit It is the main chip microprocessor in a computer and control panel D Data Information At the lowest level data is represented as an electrical signal and is interpreted as a code At the highest level data represents information that people can read and understand DC Direct Current Glossary 555 De energize To remove energy from an output point On a system the normal state of an output point is de energized Default A standard condition or setting D efault settings ar
83. like Alarm Normal Operator Note O perator ACK Operator Clear are tagged with the same sequence ID until the event is cleared When a report is generated with Sort on Sequence ID the ID number groups the events together in chronological order This makes it easier to view relative to other system wide events Reports 495 8 The Card Holder Filter next illustration provides the ability to customize the report to card holder specific information Each selection is anded so care should be used when selecting the options in order not to create so many restrictions that no records can be found to meet the selected criteria Select all appropriate options listed below illustra tion Date and Troe Fiter Tiarzacion Fier Card Holler Fitar Bun hore ucteve Datsberee T Fay Pisma Lat Meare Card Humbe Finch Hik Hoot Gui Go u kaj Hole Fakk First Name Enter the card holder s first name or select it from the browse button Last Name Enter the card holder s last name or select it from the browse button Card N umber Enter the card number or select it from the browse button Reader Enter the reader or entrance ADV to match or select it from the browse button For a group of readers use Tracking Area Tracking Area Select a predefined tracking area group of readers that should be used to filter the information Do not use Reader when using Tracking Area because the Reader selection su
84. lock unlock shunt un shunt return to time zone pulse or send a programmable pulse to the door relay From the user s point of view it does not matter if the door device is from an N 1000 II panel or another controller In operation on the floor plan the ADV signals the state or status of its device by blinking and changing color a sound file can also be associated with the ADV to signal a change in state Each ADV has a control menu that allows the user to execute functions available for that device Right clicking the ADV opens the control menu Drag and drop functionality is available in some cases For example a camera object can be dragged and dropped onto a monitor object to initiate a switch The ADVs color blinking and other properties can be edited They can also be re sized and rotated in the Floor Plan Definition utility Floor Plan View Floor Plans provide a user interface for controlling and monitoring the system The Floor Plan views can be tailored to the specific needs of your access control system Multiple Floor Plans can be opened and viewed simultaneously Floor plans can contain links to other floor plans for a different or more detailed view In addition the Floor Plan view can contain links to Alarm and Event views as well as a special field for text information Introduction 31 Floor plans are made up of a reusable static background and ADVs associated with hardware devices The background can
85. manner Tampering The unauthorized act of destroying modifying or removing a device Terminals Points on a circuit board where cables from various devices are attached Throughput Rate This can be the rate at which people or vehicles pass through a controlled area or the rate that information data moves through the computer and controller network Time and Attendance The means of recording employee time and attendance through a computer controlled reader Time Zone A range of times and days of the week that are assigned to clearance codes access levels These allow usage of the system within their specifications Timing A procedure that times events so the controller can determine whether the event is normal and within limits or not Tracking Areas An area defined by readers When a person is inside the tracking area the computer reports that that person is being tracked until such time as that person uses a muster reader or a different tracking area reader This feature does not require anti passback Transaction An event that occurs as a result of a card read alarm or other physical or software action or circumstances occurring at a panel or workstation in the system All transactions are recorded in the real time Transaction History log Transmit when Buffer Full Enables a panel to transmit all activity reports when the buffer nears capacity Trigger An input or condition that initiates a set response
86. ments for a card that is lost or stolen or to use if cards of different technologies are needed for different applications A large number of cards can be added to the system and then issued to card holders as the need arises Card Properties Biada Cord Humber lasus m tre a Caid Holdi Aooee Lee fana o aa o Cuskom oces Level Ed Actreation Dae Eepiahon Date 1 TAS Cards Cards are defined by the following properties e Card Number e Access Level Status Active Inactive Lost Stolen or Trace b Q L oJ Q 0 ui 404 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Cards can be assigned activation and expiration dates Card records can be searched and sorted by their properties For example cards can be searched numerically by card number or an operator can search for cards most recently expired by expiration date PINs Personal Identification Numbers can be defined for cards A card must have a valid access level in order to have an active status Cards can be added individually or as a batch sequentially numbered Once added card properties can be edited both individually or in batches Cards do not have to be associated with card holders For example you might want to have a number of cards available for visitors vendors or temporary employees You do not have to assign them to an individual card holder New cards can be added while adding card holders but new card holders cannot be add
87. more O perator definitions Use the Isolate function to determine which operators are assigned to the selected Operator Level and to reassign those users to other levels When attempting to delete an O perator Level that needs to be isolated the following prompt is displayed WIN PAK 2 Operator level Human Resources Managers is being used by at least one operator fou must change the operator level used by these operators before the operator level may be deleted M NUDNO PSN Click OK to retum to the O perator Level list and isolate the level Viewing and Reassigning Operators Assigned to an Operator Level 1 Select the O perator Level you wish to isolate from the O perator Level database window 2 Click Isolate The Isolate window is displayed next illustration containing a list of all operators as signed to the selected operator level 90 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Neolabe I 3 Highlight the operator s you wish to reassign NOTE Select multiple contiguous users by holding down the Shift key while clicking on the first and last operator to be se lected Select multiple noncontiguous users by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking on each operator 4 Use the drop down list at the bottom of the window to select the O perator Level to which you wish to reassign the selected operator s Click Reassign A confirmation screen appears 5 Click Yes to reassign operator s or No to abor
88. of the System Default menu Once Event View reaches capacity the oldest entries are replaced by newer ones The Event View window displays events that occur while it is open The window can be opened and minimized during normal operations Events can be filtered to show only events from selected areas or devices User Overview 113 Opening Event View Click the Event View toolbar button or select Events from the Operations menu The Event View window is displayed Send Terecores Siep Compl Send Tineroes Sep Slariwd Send Holidays Step Complete Send Holley Shep Sbacherd Boric Intiakzation Shep Compete M NUDNO SN Filtering Event Views To view only selected events the messages appearing in the Event View window can be filtered Once these views are closed the filter selections are cleared To save the control filter selection refer to the next section Linking Event View with a Floor Plan When a new Event View window is opened the original default settings are restored both alarms and card reads from all devices 1 In the Filter area of the Event View window select Alarm Card Read or Both depending on which messages you want to view 114 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 2 To further narrow the information coming in click the Control button The Filter Devices window is displayed Filter Devices Oy x OG Entrances and Readers O East Gate Parking Entrance Reader O East Lob
89. on ctartup Thiet Zot GMT 16 00 Caria Tore U5 4 Tanada Adding 485 P CI Multiple Dropline Panel Loops 485 Panel Loops represents a configuration of one or more N 1000 panels A loop requires only one communication port on a communication server and there can be up to 31 panels per loop With the Device Map open right click the Communication Server and select Add then select Panel Loop 485 PCI from the pick list The Loop Configuration Basic Information window is displayed Loop Configuration Basic Information BuLLLUeIBOJd Pane CHD Time Out E Sec feo H See ee oe 1 Enter a unique Name for the panel loop using up to 30 characters This is a required field 2 If desired enter a Description to further identify the panel loop This field is optional and holds up to 60 characters 222 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 ACK NAK provides a means of ensuring that data is not being lost over electrical noisy communication lines ACK NAK should be enabled for normal operations Select either or both buffer check boxes Buffer all panels on exit and Unbuffer all panels on startup to apply buffering instructions Select Buffer on Exit to automatically buffer all panels when the commu nication server is exited Select Unbuffer on Startup to automatically unbuffer all panels when the com munication server is started NOTE Logging in or out of the database server doesnt a
90. operation of these servers is more or less transparent to the operator The Command File Guard Tour Muster and Schedule functions are accessed through the WIN PAK 2 0 user interface in the same manner as other databases 8 Cc a ct J Chapter 2 Installation System Requirements WIN PAK 2 0 Installation Licensing and Registration Installation 37 System Requirements Operating System WIN PAK 2 0 is a 32 bit application which is designed to run in Windows 2000 NT 4 0 or XP Professional It is recommended that WIN PAK 2 0 run on a Windows 2000 NT platform because of the security and stability provided by these operating systems WIN PAK 2 0 can run on Windows 98 operating systems in a User Interface Only mode or in a mixed environment where some net worked computers are running on Windows 2000 NT or XP and some are running on Windows 98 as User Interface Only 7 rt Y J ct O During installation on a Windows 98 platform additional Microsoft program modules may be installed that are not included in the Windows 2000 NT XP Installation Hardware Basics Minimum Requirement Configuration This setup is sufficient for small systems with 1 to 10 readers up to 250 cards and 2 communication ports While this is a good configuration for a workstation it is not sufficient for use as a server Pentium I1 233Mhz CPU 256 megabytes of RAM 2 1 gigabyte hard disk 2 serial communicatio
91. other markings and notices present on the originals From time to time as they become available Northern Computers Inc may notify you of any enhancements or updates released by Northern Computers Inc for SOFTWARE licensed hereunder Any such updates offered would be subject to standard Northern Computers Inc terms and charges if any Only registered licensees will be offered any such updates The license of the SOFTWARE provided by this Agreement shall not be assignable or otherwise transferable by you except that if you are a legally constituted organization you may transfer the license as part of a transfer of your entire business or assets or User Non Disclosure Agreement 5 that portion of your business or assets to which the license of the SOFTWARE pertains NOTICE This SOFTWARE is licensed not sold It is licensed to licensees including end users without either express or implied warranties of any kind on an as is basis Northern Computers Inc makes no express or implied warranties to licensees including end users with regard to this SOFTWARE including merchantability fitness for any purpose or non infringement of patents copyrights or other proprietary rights of others Northern Computers Inc shall not have any liability or responsibility to licensees including end users for damages of any kind including special indirect or consequential damages arising out of or resulting from any programs servic
92. parallel port badging to be done on workstation 19 1280 x 1024 true color monitor Supported Operating Systems Microsoft Windows XP Windows 2000 Professional Server Advanced Server with Service Pack 2 Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 6a It is recommended to use multiple processors for large volume systems Installation 39 NOTE Video Capture Card Video badging requires one of the following video capture cards PBVC8 9 10 12 13 15 Only PBVC10 and higher is supported in Windows 2000 Modems and Communication Ports Modems and communication ports are those that are supported by the Windows operating systems including both internal and external modems Badging Printers Most any badge printer that is supported by the Windows operating system can be used for badge printing However for two sided PVC encoding or magnetic stripe encoding the Datacard IC III Datacard IC IV Datacard Select Datacard Express one of Ultra Electronic s or Northern Fargo PVC series printers is required 7 rt Y J ct O m Older peripherals such as printers and video capture cards may not be compatible with newer operating systems ReportPrinters For page printing any printer that is installed in the Windows operating system can be used For single line printing a dot matrix printer such as the PB PRINTER is required Panel Firmware WIN PAK 2 0 requires that the N 1000 control panels have at least vers
93. plan view to best suit your needs Zoom Right click in the floor plan view but not on an ADV and click Zoom Select a preset Zoom to option or indicate a Custom percentage The floor plan is automatically enlarged or reduced within the viewing window Show View and View Area When working with a large floor plan you can right click in the floor plan and select the Show View option A smaller window opens inside the floor plan view showing the location of the enlarged detail on the total floor plan User Overview 131 To adjust the size of the location detail area in relation to the total floor plan view select the View Area option from the right click menu The Change View Area dialog is displayed allowing you to indicate what percentage of the Floor Plan View window should accommodate the location detail Floor Plan Change View Area X View Area ox 25 of window lt n So for example if you set the View Area to 25 then 25 of the main Floor Plan View window shows the location detail as shown below M NUDNO SN Pe Flom Plan Fies 1 Local Nuthin Hsn Floor Plans and ADV Control Functions A number of system devices can be controlled from the floor plan Right click an ADV associated object in the floor plan to open its control menu from which you can select the action you want the object to take under certain circumstances 132 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide The control fu
94. recommended to choose the automatic installation option School Componente S E xj Select Citebase Inst giyip Mode Contact Northen Corpuri support ict bo aiempina minua DE icchall i jasa Aaionabcaly Highly Feconmended C inaa hanad Erpat Hoje 14 Select the database installation mode See previous NOTE Then click Next to continue 7 rt Y J ct O 54 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide The Question screen next illustration will appear querrying the operator whether to stop the database engine in order to continue the installation Ha Ej Your Desta must be doped nom eS Peep Eet tefe Click Mo bo sbort thi metalisti opi the saet rey chop ohe 15 Click Yes to continue the installation 16 After the installation is complete the Setup Com plete window will be displayed Click Finish to complete the installation process First Log In All services should be running but if not double click the WIN PAK 2 0 Services icon and start all services Double click the WIN PAK 2 0 User Interface icon The User Interface opens and the Connect to Server window is displayed Connect To Server xi User Name rag Password m Enter Admin as the default operator N ame Installation 55 NOTE When logging in on a server for the first time under adminis trator authority the Quick Start Wizard will be initiated Refer to the Quick Start Wizard secti
95. saved as a Command File In setting up an ADV Action Group Command Files can be used to set up dependencies In other words when a particular event takes place a designated command file is activated For example a Command File can be activated automatically on receiving acknowledging or clearing an alarm as defined in the Action Group Defining Command Files 1 Select Command File from the WIN PAK 2 0 Configuration menu Configuration Define Device Time Management gt IG GQuick Start Wizard Card Holder Badge g Select Language Translate Bj Command File Fi Guard Tour Floor Plan Definition The Command File database window is displayed next illustration Programming 327 Losref File 2 Click Add to open the Command File Record window next illustration Conmand File Piecord po Abatract Deica ACV Command Pennies OOOO Pu wLULeIDOId WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Enter a descriptive Name for the command file with up to 30 characters 4 Enter a Description with of up to 60 characters for the command file if desired 5 Click the Add button to open the Command window in order to further define the Command File Command File Command Video Switcher Switch Camera to Monitor East Lobby 6 Select an ADV Category for the command file Programming 329 7 Select the ADV for the command file
96. that have been placed in the WIN PAK 2 0 language directory C Program Files WinPak2 Language Files Edi List of Avalabk Lotspaages Translation 465 2 Click Add to open the Configure Language dialog Configure Language Ea Language Name Canadian French File FrenchC amp Help File peers Cancel 3 Enter the new Language Name you want to use to describe the language translation such as European French or Canadian French 4 Enter the name of the new translation text File for example FrenchCA NOTE Special characters can be copied from the Windows Charac ter Map and inserted into the text where required If the Character Map is installed on your PC it should be available on the System Tools menu which becomes accessible by opening the Program group from the Start menu and select ing Accessories uone jsueaIL 5 The default American English help file is used if the Help File box is empty Enter the name of the new Help File for the desired language The Help File feauture is used for the international versions of WINPAK 6 Click OK to return to the Edit List of Available Languages dialog box The new language text file name is now listed 7 Click OK The next step is selecting a language for translation next section 466 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Selecting a Language for Translation Click the Select Language option from the Configuration menu 2A Select Langua
97. the Custom Access Level window Activation and Expiration Dates for the Custom Access Level NOTE This feature must have the Update Custom Access Level scheduler set to work properly Refer to the Schedule section in Time Management 5a Assign an activation date for the custom access level by clicking the button typically labeled None until a date is selected to the right of the First Valid Date field First Valid Date x June x 2001 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Cancel 28 29 30 31 1 Today T E 6789 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2 3 4 5 6 Use the First Valid Date calendar to select the activation date for the custom access level NOTE Click the Today button to set the activation or expiration date to today s date 5b Repeat the process to assign the Last Valid Date for the access level SJOPIOH PueD 444 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Show Original Access Level The new customized access level can be compared with the previous original access level by checking the box labeled Show Original Access Only Changes cannot be made when the window is in this view state To make changes or to return to the custom access level deselect the check box 6 Click OK to save the Custom Access Level A blue dot on the Access Level tree denotes an entrance that has been customized for this access level Custom Access Level 3 e Access Area 5 0 Wh
98. the closest solid color your monitor can display with its current settings If your monitor is set to display 256 colors the closest match is displayed If your monitor can display more colors the Solid swatch will probably match the Color swatch exactly 366 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Selecting Custom Colors 1 With the Color window displayed click the Define Custom Colors button to expand the color palette window f EEHEHE 3 BEA BEET ll BERENT ll HEEREN ll 1EAN 77 NEHEN ll ERAT T T T Cod u eiT OF twee Badd to Cuttin Cokie Dette ero 2 If you know the Red Green Blue equivalents for a specific color enter those values in the appropriate fields OR If you know the Hue Saturation Luminosity equivalents for a specific color enter those values in the appropriate fields OR Use the color selector to choose the color you want Badging 367 3 When the desired color appears in the Color Solid field click the Add to Custom Colors button The new color is added to the Custom color palette on the left side of the window Fasie colors mi St eee LS a Amini i imi i5 ESS eee EE BEBE EERE Bi Gustorn cur l iN a a es IEE Raa Em a Dee Goria ele ee Cioliort Speed tom fit Be fice ____ Addiction Cob 4 Click OK to select the new custom color and retum to the Colors tab on the Badge O bject Properties window The selected color now appears in the Bac
99. the output defined in Outputs for D uress will pulse When configured with firmware later than 8 03 then 2 outputs can be selected Four outputs can be selected when an N 1000 IV is used Programming 263 Panel Configuration Inputs The panel input points are configured on this Inputs window All input points available on the current panel are shown in the Name list Panel Ci I l p i J r She U e f Wn f Hr r paj Shni Tira li amp Debounce Tine jo z ec a Interlocking Pi o F Fospent Alang 3 Pont 2 Rover a a Blam Action z i e Normal fechion Auch Med Cancel Hal 1 Inthe Name list select the check box for each input point you want to activate Once an input point is selected other options on the window become available WIN PAK 2 0 sets some input points as active and may assign them an interlock value These default settings vary depending on the type of panel and whether or not you have chosen the anti passback option All these settings can be edited 2 Use the Time Zone drop down list to attach a time zone to an input point For example to shunt deacti vate an input point during a particular time zone no 264 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide alarms will be reported select that time zone from the list Input point activity will be reported outside the selected time zone The Time Zone defaults to None inputs are not shunted based on time zones and
100. the subject and other lighting being used Brightness Lightens or darkens the entire tonal range of the image to be captured Contrast Expands or contracts the entire tonal range of the image to be captured Photo Settings Photo settings are applied to the video image after it is captured Brightness Lightens or darkens the entire tonal range of the captured image Compress The captured image is saved as a jpg file which uses compression technology to decrease the file size If desired use the slider to adjust the compression of the saved image The lower the number the greater the compression However images lose quality as they are compressed so avoid over compressing A setting of 100 applies the least amount of compression and provides the best image quality A setting of 30 applies the most compression but provides lower image quality Working with Colors The Colors tab of the Badge Object Properties window allows you to select colors for badge elements If no item is selected when the Properties dialog opens the color is applied to the entire badge background The foreground color is not available unless a badge object is selected The simplest background to apply to a badge is a single solid color Badging 363 Applying a Basic Background Color to a Badge 1 Right click the badge and select Properties O pen the Colors tab from the Badge O bject Properties window Badge Ekemenl Layo Badges
101. to an output or action 568 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Trouble State A condition when an alarm circuit is out of specified tolerance which may indicate tampering or other troubles with the alarm point Troubleshooting The act of figuring out a problem through deductive reasoning TTL Abbreviation for T ransistor T ransistor L ogic Turnstile A type of rotating gate that allows only one person through per valid card read U Unbuffer A panel mode in which transactions are not stored in the panel s RAM memory When a panel is unbuffered it transmits stored information to a computer then continues to transmit ongoing access transactions to that computer See Buffer Uninterruptable Power Supply UPS A device that continues to provide power even after the main power has been accidentally shut down It also protects equipment against voltage spikes that can cause damage Unshunt See Shunt UPS See U ninterruptable Power Supply Users The people who operate the system directly through the software operators User Defined Fields User customizable fields for the Card Holder D atabase W Wiegand Card A card that has specially treated wires embedded in it that when it passes through a Wiegand reader emit a discrete electrical signal Index Index 571 Symbols 485 or C 100 Loop Setting up on Modem Pool 234 485 with HUB ACK NAK Modem Pool Configura tion 238 244 485 HUB Loop Setting up o
102. to attach a time zone to the output group 4 Enter a value in the Pulse Time field to set the amount of time that the output group is energized when triggered The field defaults to 0 but can be set from 0 63 seconds 0 63 minutes or 0 63 hours 5 In the case of output groups Interlocking refers to linking the changing state of the output group to either another output group an input point or an output point Refer to Enabling Interlocking for Output Groups section ahead for details on setting up interlocking GHuLLLUeIBOId 6 Create ADVs as needed for the output groups The ADVs are used to control and monitor the output groups on the control map or floor plan definition 7 On returning to the Groups window after creating an ADV for each output group click the N ext button to advance to the Panel Configuration Readers window 272 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE Enabling Interlocking for Output Groups 1 3 Highlight an output group and click the check box to activate the Interlocking options Select either the Input I Output O or Group G radio button to indicate the point type with which to interlock Choose the interlocking Point Only input points output points or groups that have already been activated appear on this list If the required point is not listed go to the correct dialog and activate the point then return to this window 4 Select the On Action for the interloc
103. to save the signature Importing a Card Holder Signature 1 With the Card Holder database window open select the card holder whose signature is to be imported 2 Click Edit Open the Card Biometrics tab of the Card Holder Record window Card Holders 433 Look in a Userlmage x amp Tl c a 13 1 sig a 16 1 sig 11 1 sig 17 1 sig a 12 1 sig a 18 1 sig a 13 1 sig f 19 1 sig 14 1 sig a 15 1 sig File name Files of type Signature sig x Cancel P h 3 In the Signature area of the window click Import If the signatures have already been collected and are stored in a file the O pen dialog is displayed 4 Navigate to the folder containing your signature files sig or emf select the correct file and click O pen The signature appears in the Signature window 5 Click OK to save the signature SJOP JOH Pues 434 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Importing Additional Card Holder Signatures To add additional signatures to a card holder file follow the procedures described above but change the signature index number If you do not change the signature index the signature you import replaces the existing signature Deleting a Card Holder Signature From time to time you may need to delete a card holder signature altogether 1 With the Card Holder database window open select the card holder whose signature is to be deleted 2 Click Edit
104. when finished Badging 379 Creating a Ghosted Photo Use the slider bar in the Ghosting area of the Badge Photo Object Properties window to set the degree of transparency for the photo You will probably need to experiment with this in order to get the desired effect Deleting a Photo Placeholder To delete a photo placeholder right click on it and select Delete Object from the subsequent menu The photo placeholder is removed from the badge layout area Badge Objects Barcodes NOTE Barcodes can be added to a badge in a number of formats and can be used for a variety of functions Barcodes can contain information specific to the badge design or to the card holder For example the barcode can contain the card number or the user s social security number Adding a Barcode to a Badge Layout 1 Click the Place Barcode i button on the Badge Definition window toolbar 2 Click in the badge layout and drag the barcode box until it is the desired size Move the barcode box by selecting it and dragging it to the desired position Resize the barcode box by selecting it and dragging one of the sizing handles until it is the desired size 380 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Adding or Editing Barcode Data 1 Right click the barcode box and select Properties Select the Barcode Data tab of the Badge Barcode Object Properties window Badge Element Layout 2 Click Add or Edit to open the Enter D ata Item window
105. with today s powerful computer networks The system also can control and monitor CCTV equipment It can track and provide reports of all card and keycode activity a history of system events and database reports In addition the access control system can store and manage basic information on thousands of employees at multiple sites Employee photo ID imaging and badging are now an important feature of access control systems 26 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide WIN PAK 2 0 Features WIN PAK 2 0 is state of the art access control software that was specifically designed to run in Microsoft Windows X P 2000 NT operating systems taking full advantage of the speed flexibility and reliability of networked systems User workstations may use Windows 98SE WIN PAK 2 0 has features designed to handle large and complex installations The WIN PAK 2 0 environment can be set up so that it is easy to use by the people who are monitoring alarms issuing cards and carrying out other day to day functions WIN PAK 2 0 supports Tracking and Muster Reporting to indicate the location of people for security or safety reasons WIN PAK 2 0 allows Guard Tours defined by reader and alarm points that can be timed or random WIN PAK 2 0 provides CCTV control with live monitor view supporting interfaces with Burle D edicated Micros G eutebruck Javelin NCI CCTV Panasonic Pelco RapidEye and Vicon Database Management WIN PAK 2 0 allows you to define
106. x x Device Control Area x x x Database x x x x x Individual Database x x x x Floor Plans x x x Individual Floor Plans x x Reports x x x Individual Reports x x User Interface x x x x Individual User Interface x x x Options Description Change amp Operate Grant change rights to all database Grant operate rights to all controls and user interfaces Delete Grant delete rights for all database as a whole Grant change rights for all fields Maximum Grant delete rights to all databases Grant operate rights to all controls and user interfaces None Remove all rights from all items Operate Specific Grant operate rights to all items from branch or specific devices Same Leave all rights as they are View Grant view rights to all items User Overview 87 Copying an Operator Level You may on occasion find it necessary to create operator levels that are similar to each other but with a few minor differences To save time you can copy an existing operator level and make changes to the copy 1 Select highlight the operator level you want to copy in the main Operator Level database window 2 Click Copy The Operator Level dialog is displayed as shown here F pmam Level x alaj Mares E ainiin renee osa Les ERRET Ain i Honiara aca nri jika mieria id iiien kebi ci ee bale M NUDNO PSN 3 Enter anew Name for the O perator Level with up to 30 chara
107. you want a particular proportion enter it in the Aspect Ratio field and make sure to select the Lock Aspect Ratio check box NOTE When using the default badge size set the aspect ratio to 625 to fill the entire area 8 If the image is too dark or too light adjust the Photo Brightness 9 Set the degree to which you want to Compress the captured image 10 Click OK to save the image Video Settings These settings apply to the live on screen video image Brightness Lightens or darkens the entire tonal range of the image Contrast Expands or contracts the entire tonal range of the image The difference in highlights and shadows can be greatly increased or decreased Saturation Adjusts the vibrancy the level of color in the image Hue Adjusts the value of color in the image Adjusting this can correct images that seem to have incorrect color Sharpen Sharpens blurry images by increasing the contrast of adjacent pixels Grab Settings These settings are applied to the camera when an image is captured If you are not using a flash set the G rab Brightness and Contrast the same as the Video settings If a flash is used reduce both the Brightness and Contrast settings lower than the Video settings This prevents the camera from overexposing the picture 362 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide The exact settings must be determined by experimen tation as they vary depending on the type of flash distance from
108. your PC in order for it to function properly NOTE Without IE 5 5 WIN PAK 2 0 will not operate properly 44 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Sentinel The Sentinel Hardware Lock Drivers These are installed on all operating systems when the Database Server is installed CrypKey The CrypKey Licensing Drivers These are installed on all operating systems when the Database Server is installed Foreign Language Installation As a convenience the installation program installs several utility and operating system upgrades during the normal installation session Currently the WIN PAK 2 0 installation provides these Microsoft modules in English only The English versions are not compatible with other language versions of the Windows operating system and can cause problems Several operating system languages are supported by an international version of WIN PAK Consult your Northern Computer representative for information Installation 45 WIN PAK 2 0 Installation NOTE There are several types of installations available when setting up WIN PAK 2 0 Complete Installation Select Complete installation when setting up a stand alone system an access control system installed on one computer or if you are installing the D atabase Server for a networked system Database Server Only Select Database Server Only installation when installing on a networked system User Interface Only Select User Interface Only installation
109. zones using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selected 3 Click the Sort tab select a Sort Order for the report and indicate if the report should be sorted in As cending or Descending order Reports 529 Report Time Zone Tene Zone Filer Sort Athearces Time Zone Faller Time Zone P Used T Umsed Hon 4 Click the Advanced Filter Time Zone tab Indicate if the report should include time zones which are Used reports time zones currently in use within the system Unused reports time zones not in use within the system Both reports all time zones regardless of use Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report Click Close to exit the Time Zone report window and return to the main Reports database window 530 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Tracking and Mustering Area Report Select the Tracking and Mustering Area report from the Reports database window No filter or sort options are available on the Tracking and Mustering report detail window Rept Tracking and Mustenng Ares Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report Click Close to return to the main
110. 0 i Elhan 4 o 0 1200 Ep Adan Diak a 0 a ka n EP Aed Loskp Waira bor cand ead E D a z240 7H autos Lookun Coniston 4 24 EP Badge DLL s D 0 fad CH Badge Eleran Lapok AdeVE cht Biorb bari a 0 0 a5 ie ten 6 Select the next dialog to translate Continue this procedure until all the desired dialogs have been translated 470 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Editing Dialog Text In addition to translating text from English to another language you may want to customize selected dialogs in your WIN PAK 2 0 system You can use the Edit Dialog Text utility for this purpose as well Restoring Dialog Text Defaults Edited dialog text can be restored to its original default by opening the Edit Dialog Text window selecting Dialogs form the Translate option on the Configuration menu and opening the editable version of the dialog to be restored Right click anywhere in the dialog and select Restore Defaults The original labels are restored for the selected dialog V4857FC Leap Confiquiation Hub Setings Deby For Connection A H Secor Murni of Finch Alternet cE Wak Tima ka Daria D Second Dalay before Mest items D E Samd Maden iakasion orans 200OSt CS Di Pm dinon a Set Hem Site ID ond Pecewod lecture Deia Edt If you have edited text on more than one dialog you must restore each one separately Translation 471 Changing Menu Text 1 Select Menus from the Translate option on the Co
111. 0 pou must ACCEPT the speared lt Back REJECT 5 Click Accept to acknowledge that you understand and agree to the terms The Setup Type screen will appear from which the operator can select the type of setup or installation desired Installation 49 Database Sere Orki User bisnise amd Comn Server Leer irimia Cindy i Desmi Instal all PAK 2 0 clients sarn aed supped pogren biri daia et ots iht PL This is the reconenended inelalistion renei 7 rt Y J ct O 6 Select the type of installation desired then click Next to continue For the purpose of illustrating a complete installation this procedure assumes the Complete Installation option is selected The D esti nation Location screen will appear NOTE The User Interface Only option is described in the Installing User Interface Only section If it is desired to install the User Interface Only option choose User Interface Only and refer to that section fi house Debe Laa Fissa indice phas pou sark oo rasi pour Px 2 E N ou map wnt jo gpeciy Pa dia lhal Hart than mad bat gaon Datinsion Foku CAP rogesen Files 4 Pak Base 7 Click Next to accept the default location or click Browse and specify a different location 50 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Enler your Database Data File Path R a Fi Enis fhe psih pou pach the relsi boplsa pon dstshans daha Mei Cecthnagton Folder CAMSSOLT Dats Bort Beck ee
112. 04 315 Guard Tours 316 325 Programming Overview 151 157 Admin Password 157 Passwords 156 Programming Order 151 155 Quick Start Wizard 157 169 Time Management 169 184 PVC 397 Q Quick Start Wizard 157 169 Overview 157 158 Procedure 159 169 R Recommended Configuration For Installation 38 576 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Record Retrieval and Performance 99 Registration 63 Call in 64 Fax 64 Online 64 Report Printers 39 Reports Access Area Report Generating and Printing 485 Access Level Report Generating and Printing 486 487 Attendance Report Generating and Printing 488 489 Card History Report Generating and Printing 492 496 Card Holder Report Generating and Printing 496 499 Card Holder Tab Layout Report Generating and Printing 500 Card Report Generating and Printing 489 492 Command File Report Generating and Printing 501 502 Control Area Report Generating and Printing 503 Device Map Modem Pools 509 Server Device 505 Device Map Report Generating and Printing 504 510 Floor Plan Report Generating and Printing 511 512 Generating and Printing Reports 485 530 Guard Tour Report Generating and Printing 512 513 History Report Generating and Printing 513 518 Holiday Group Report Generating and Printing 519 Note Field Template Report Generating and Printing 520 Operator Actions Report Generating and Printing 522 Operator Level Report Generating and Printing 526 Operator Report
113. 10 000MB hard drive The warning thresholds for a 10G B hard drive may be nominally set as indicated below Database Warning Threshold 1600MB 80 utilization Alarm Threshold 1800MB 90 utilization Database Disk Drive Free Space Warning Threshold 4000MB 120 of recommended free space Alarm Threshold 3333MB 100 of recommended free space 1 3 of total hard drive space If it is desired to increase the amount of space for other files and programs it will be necessary to reduce the amount of space used by MSDE database To achieve this the warning thresholds of MSDE database size can be set lower The warnings would then prompt the administrator to take action on the database sooner y rt Y of n 0 S v a 0 5 D 5 al 0 546 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide To increase the amount of space for other files and programs by 1GB on the same 10GB hard drive set the warning thresholds as indicated below Database Warning Threshold 750MB 37 58 utilization Alarm Threshold 1000MB 50 utilization Database Disk Drive Free Space Warning Threshold 4000MB 120 of recommended free space Alarm Threshold 3333MB 100 of recommended free space 1 3 of total hard drive space NOTE While the warning thresholds can be set to any values the size of the MSDE database will continue to grow to its 2GB limit unless proper backup and data deletion is performed to maintain or reduce the MSDE database size
114. 2 0 Chapter 2 Installation The Installation chapter contains system requirements installation instructions and registration information Chapter 3 User Overview The User Overview chapter includes the following The User Interface section of this chapter covers the basic conventions used throughout the graphical user interface including an overview of the GUI menus and toolbar options how to work with database windows and how to log in to the system The System Settings section of this chapter explains how to set up operators and operator levels how to configure workstations and how to set certain system defaults The Daily Operations section provides details on the features and functions used on a daily basis to monitor and maintain your access control system Chapter 4 Programming The Programming chapter is a guide to programming your access control system This chapter provides an outline to use as a guide while planning your system setup Included in the Programming chapter are sections on configuring servers panels and readers as well as creating floor plans setting time zones and defining control access and tracking areas 20 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Chapter 5 Badging The Badging chapter contains the information necessary to create custom badge designs and include areas for card holder photos and signatures on those badges as well as magnetic stripe encoding barcodes and a variety of artwork
115. 3 Translating Text amp Selecting Languages WIN PAK 2 0 allows the translation of the User Interface into languages other than English The Translation uitility can also be used to customize selected dialogs in WIN PAK 2 0 To translate the User Interface you must create or import a file containing the new language WIN PAK 2 0 is designed to work with U S English operating systems International operating systems require a special version of WIN PAK Consult Northern Computers regarding international operating systems The following three steps should be followed when using the WIN PAK 2 0 translation utility for North America English systems 1 Create a language text file and add the new language to the list of available languages 2 Select the language to which you are going to trans late using the Select Language command 3 Translate the menus dialogs and other text Once this process is completed you can switch languages by using the Select Language command You can also add a language selection to an Operator definition so that when a particular operator logs in the User Interface switches to the correct language for that operator uone sued 464 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Creating a Text File for Translation 1 Select Available Languages from the Translate option on the Configuration menu The Edit List of Available Languages window is displayed below This list contains all the language files
116. 5 Click OK to save the entry and return to the main Operator Level database window Configuring Operator Levels After O perator Levels are added to the system it is necessary to configure each level for access to specific control areas Operator Level access for control area devices databases and the WIN PAK 2 0 System itself User Interface are configured on the right pane of the Operator Level window esate Level Tone Hh Conard Files Ti Corbel ties aan stew 2 1 feo ara rath Tta Hapai Fre Fai ie Usa itii blare Dpmaia Loval Lert parara Dahak iraorenge iee Cid Aari hie a 1 Select an Operator Level from the list on the left side of the window 2 In the right pane of the O perator Level window right click on the control area device database or user interface element you want to configure 3 Configure rights for an entire branch an individual device or an individual database M NUDNO SN 84 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Configuring Rights for an Entire Branch All the devices contained in one branch can be configured at once by right clicking on the main branch without opening the sub branches and selecting Configure The Configure Rights dialog is displayed zonhpae legs J i Indicate the nghts configuration you want for the Operator Level by selecting the appropriate radio button Configuring Rights for an Individual Device When sub branches of the O perator Level tree are op
117. 6 C C 100 Modem Pool 233 237 C 100 or 485 Loop Setting up on Modem Pool 234 C100 Panel Loop Adding 218 220 Call in Registration 64 Camera Controlling 125 127 Card Biometrics 413 Card Data 413 Card Holder Note Fields 406 413 Card Holder Photos 423 430 Card Holder Signatures 431 434 Card Holder Tabs Setting up 413 460 Card Holders 404 Access Levels 435 444 572 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Adding 418 460 Configuring Card Holder Elements 405 417 Overview 403 405 Setting Up Card Holders 418 434 Working with Cards 445 460 Cards 403 Previewing 459 Printing 459 Cards and Card Holders Overview 28 CCTV Options 127 CCTV Switcher Adding 225 228 Character placeholder 412 Check Point Alarms 322 325 Command File 258 Command File Database 326 335 Adding Custom Commands 331 Available Commands 330 Defining Command Files 326 329 Deleting Command Files 332 Editing Command Files 332 Command File Server 207 208 Overview 33 Command Files 136 Commununication Loops Adding a CCTV Switcher 225 228 Communication Loops 217 230 Adding 485 PCI Multiple Dropline Panel Loops 221 224 Adding an RS 232 Connection 229 230 Adding C100 Panel Loop 218 220 Communication Server 203 206 Installation 58 Overview 33 Configuring Card Holder Elements 405 417 Configuring AutoCard Lookup 416 417 Setting Up Card Holder Tabs 413 416 Working with Card Holder Note Fields 406 460 Co
118. AEP 5 default to normally closed supervised circuit to monitor changes of state N 1000 III IV inputs can also be configured for normally open circuits and 3 state supervised cir cuits Select the Supervised check box to configure the selected input point as supervised then select either the Normally Open or Normally Closed radio button 7 If the selected input point is unsupervised you can choose to Report Alarms Never or Always If the input point is supervised the Trouble option is also available which reports only Trouble Normal conditions Alarms are not reported 8 Create an ADV for each input point Click the Add button in the upper right corner of the Inputs win dow and set priorities for each state you want to monitor GHuLLLUeIBOId 9 On returning to the Inputs window after creating ADVs for the input points to be monitored click Next to advance to the Panel Configuration Outputs window Enabling Interlocking for Inputs Interlocking allows you to interlock a selected input point with another input point an output point ora group of output points When an input point is interlocked to an output point and there is a change of status in the input point the system performs the operation specified 1 Highlight an input and then select the Interlocking check box 2 Choose either the Input I Output O or Group G radio button to indicate the point type with which to interlock 266 WIN
119. B Porlarg TZ bees Onl On the left side of the window is a list of existing Access Levels The right side of the window contains the Access Area tree Below the left pane of the Access Level database are five action buttons Add Used to define new access levels Edit Used to make changes in existing access levels Copy Duplicates an access level allowing you to make changes and save it as a new access level Delete Removes the selected access level Isolate Displays the card holders assigned to the selected access level and allows you to reassign those card holders to a different access level Card Holders 437 It is easy to tell at a glance what areas are included in a given access level Select a level from the Access Level database list left pane The branches of the Access Areas are color coded for the selected level Red No access to any door in the area Yellow Access permitted to some entrances in this area Green Access permitted to all entrances in this area during the assigned time zone Click on a branch to view the entrances which are also color coded and have a time zone notation Access levels are defined by selecting entrances and assigning time zones to them When a new access level is added it has no associated access rights All the folders and entrances in the Access Areas are red and no time zones are shown To configure a new access level right click on an Access Area branch
120. BOJd 156 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Passwords NOTE CAUTION WIN PAK 2 0 passwords are set in the O perator database which is accessible via the System menu Operator access is password protected Once WIN PAK 2 0 is installed a password should be defined and used This is critical to the security of your entire system Always replace the default password with your own secure password Failure to change the manufacturer s default password greatly compromises the security of your system Keep the following in mind when setting up passwords e Passwords can be up to 20 characters length and are case sensitive e For the greatest security use a combination of both letters and numbers for your password Do not use familiar terms such as your company name your name initials or birth date A simple strategy for choosing a password that is both easy to remember but hard to decode is to pick a simple phrase preceded or followed by one or more numbers Enter the password without spaces and capitalize each word Such a password cannot be easily decoded either by a random number generator or by dictionary decoder Yet the person who knows the phrase can remember it without writing it down Programming 157 Admin Password The Admin O perator is used to set up your access control system and the system security should be protected by giving the Admin O perator a password Other operators may be de
121. Barcode Object Properties e Badge Shape O bject Properties e Badge Signature O bject Properties Details on properties are covered as each item is documented in this chapter Badge Objects Introduction Six types of objects can be placed on a badge text bitmap photo barcode shape and signature A toolbar button represents each object Al oF mf A text bitmap photo barcode shape signature Badge items are layered as they are placed This is only noticeable when one item overlaps another 350 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE The layering order is changed by using the Select Next Item E button from the toolbar As each item is selected it is brought to the front Adding Objects to the Badge Layout 1 Click the toolbar button representing the object you want to place 2 Click within the badge drawing area of the Badge Definition window and drag the box to the desired size 3 Release the mouse and a dotted box is visible representing the area where the object will be placed Each type of object has a different set of properties used for its configuration available by right clicking on the item For example a Bitmap item requires a source file a Text item requires a font definition etc Refer to the Badge Object Properties section of this chapter for details on working with specific badge objects Moving and Resizing Badge Layout Objects Standard Windows type conventions are used to move and re
122. CI s baud setting The Data Bits Parity and Stop Bits fields default based on the loop and port 224 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide IP Address If TCP IP Connection is selected as the Port the IP Address or Node name field must be filled in Encryption Password If TCP IP Encrypted Connection is selected as the Port the Encryption Password field must be filled in with the exact case sensitive password used when the LAN hardware was installed 10 Create an ADV for the communication loop Click Add in the ADV section of the window upper right comer to open the ADV window for the loop Follow the procedures outlined in Setting up AD Vs earlier in this chapter to set up the loop ADV 11 Click OK to return to the Port Settings window The Loop becomes available on the Device Map E Device Iof Xx gp Command File Server Communication Server aS C 100 loop Q Main Drop Line Programming 225 Adding aCCTV Switcher WIN PAK 2 0 supports a variety of CCTV switchers They are added to the communication server on the Device Map in the same way other communication interfaces are added You must have an available com munication port for each switcher With the Device Map open right click the Communica tion Server and select Add Select CCTV Switcher from the list The CCTV Switcher Configuration Basic Information window is displayed CCTV Switcher Configuration Basic Information
123. Color Protinning Track 1 Tuck 2 Track 3 3 From the Basic Colors palette at the top of the window click the color swatch you want to use for a background 364 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 4 Click OK The Color dialog is dismissed and the selected color is placed in the Background Color field on the Color tab 5 Click Apply or OK to apply the color to your badge Solid dark colors may not print evenly on all printers so it is recommended that you use a light colored or white background Creating Custom Colors If the preset colors on the color palette don t meet your specifications for a background object or text color you can create a custom color Define Custom Colors gt gt Click the Define Custom Colors button at the bottom of the Color window to display the custom color selector The color selector describes colors in two common color models HSL hue saturation luminosity and RGB red green blue RGB corresponds to PMS assignment A third common color model is CY MK cyan magenta yellow and black based on the use of four colors of ink to approximate a full spectrum of colors Many badge printers use the CMYK color model and therefore will give only an approximate match for the colors displayed on the screen Hue Saturation and Luminosity The HSL color model is based on how colors are viewed by the human eye Colors are described by three basic characteristics e Hue is the wa
124. Doctor s Hane I Gocter s Phone E tires Adchess i Ciy I Sise H Zp Cote i Hra Dai H Superior E Department H Fira Note Feetde inokaded in thie Tab 2 Enter a unique Tab Name 3 From the Available N ote Fields list select the note fields for this tab Multiple note fields can be se lected by holding down the CTRL and SHIFT keys simultaneously while clicking on the first and last item to be selected 4 Click Add to move the selected items to the Note Fields Included in this Tab list To remove a field from the tab select it in the N ote Fields Included in this Tab list and click Remove 5 Use the Note Field Order arrows to move note fields up or down until you have the desired con figuration 6 Click OK to save your changes and return to the main database window For each tab listed in the Card Holder Tab Layout database a corresponding tab appears on the Card Holder Record SJOPIOH PueD 416 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Editing or Deleting a Card Holder Tab To edit a tab layout simply open the Card Holder Tab Layout database window highlight the tab to be edited and click the Edit button The Card Holder Tab Layout Record is activated allowing you to make changes To delete a card holder tab highlight it in the Card Holder Tab Layout database window and click Delete A prompt is displayed Click the OK button on the prompt to delete the tab There is no undo function Deletin
125. F 4pm 12am Monday Friday excl holidays M 12am 8am M F 12am 8am Monday Friday excl holidays 9 6am 7pm x 7 days 6am 7pm 7 days per week incl holidays Click Next to continue Notes An access time zone is a range of times and days of the week An access level is formed when time zones are assigned to entrances A time zone may also be applied directly to an entrance to keep the entrance unlocked during the time zone i e entrance does not require a valid card read Any changes you make to these time zones from WIN PAK will not be reflected in this wizard lt Back Next gt Cancel 2 All time zones are selected by default Deselect any that are not required then click Next to continue 160 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide The What s Next configuration option screen appears Select one of the following configuration options Add Panels to an existing Loop a Add new Loop C Add Cards Click Next to continue 3 Select the desired configuration then click Next to continue For first time configuration select Add new loop The Confirmation of Operating System screen will appear Pf Quick Start Wizard Confirmation of Operating System Operating System Windows 2000 amp Com Server E C 100 on The Confirmation of Operating System screen reports the user s operating system 4a If the correct operating system is not reported click Cancel to discontinue Consult the manual for commun
126. For information on adding or deleting cards in batches see the Bulk Card Add and Delete section of this chapter b Q L oJ Q 0 ui 448 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Adding an Individual Card 1 Select Card from the Card menu The Card data base window is displayed Card Number 2 Click Add to open the Card Record with the Card Properties tab displayed next illustration Card Holders 449 Card Properties Use the Card Properties tab of the Card Record to set certain parameters for the card 3 Enter the Card N umber 4 A card s Status defaults to Active as soon as it is entered into the system If you want to select an activation date change the status to Inactive This will enable the Activation Date area of the window Click Change and select the day month and year you want the card activated 5 Issue indicates the number of times the card has been reissued e g if a card is lost and a replacement is issued This is not a required field and is manually updated b Q L oJ Q 0 ui 450 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 6 Use the Card Holder browse button to select the card holder to associate with the card This is not a required field Card assignment can also be done in the card holder database Select an Access Level for the card If your system requires a PIN personal identification number enter it in the PIN field NOTE A PIN can be added to the card later System PIN requir
127. Help 2 Indicate the Horizontal and Vertical Position of the text within the text box 3 Select the Orientation or angle for the text to appear on the badge O ptions include 0 Text is upright 90 Text is rotated 90 clockwise 180 Text is upside down 270 Text is rotated 90 counterclockwise 4 To change the location or size of the text box enter the information in the Top Left Height and Width fields 5 Click Apply to view the changes or OK to apply the changes and exit Badging 377 Deleting a Text Block To delete a text box right click the text box and select Delete Object from the subsequent menu The text box is removed from the badge Badge Objects Photo Placeholders A photo placeholder is used in a badge design where you want a card holder photo to appear When the badge is assigned to a card and card holder the appropriate photo from the card holder database is applied to the badge WIN PAK 2 0 allows up to 99 photos for each card holder These can be different pictures of the employee or pictures of the employee s automobile or equipment assigned to the card holder such as a laptop computer A photo index number is used to indicate which card holder photo should appear on the badge Photo placeholders can be formatted in a number of ways The photo can be aligned horizontally and vertically within the box and stretched or shrunk to fill the space it can also be rotated at set in
128. Holder Tab Layout options are shown on the Card Holder Record window Use these tabs and note fields to enter specific information about the card holder being added NOTE Operator rights must be assigned to edit or even view each defined note field Card Holder Photos Photos can be included in the Card Holder database information Up to 99 photos can be recorded for each card holder These photos can include different views of the same person for example front and side views a photo of the person s car or equipment issued to them such as a laptop computer If a photo is included in a card holder s record it appears on the Card Biometrics tab of the card holder record Each photo has a Photo Index number By default photo 1 is displayed To view other photos change the Photo Index number on the Card Biometrics tab Photos can be added to card holder information either by capturing video images or by importing digital files created in other programs scanned images or photos taken with a digital camera The Photo Index setting determines whether a captured or imported image overwrites an existing image or is added to the Card Holder Record as an additional image b Q L oJ Q 0 ui When a photo is included in a card holder s information it is inserted in the badge layout associated with any cards assigned to the card holder Again the Photo Index number on the badge layout determines which photo is displayed o
129. Infrared Sensor PIR A small motion sensor commonly used above doors in an EAC installation A dual technology PIR combines passive infrared and microwave or passive infrared and ultrasound PC personal computer Piggybacking See Tailgating PIR A passive infrared sensor which is usually installed above a door and senses motion in an EAC installation A dual technology PIR combines passive infrared and microwave or passive infrared and ultrasound Poll Response Alarm Refers to an alarm that occurs when panels do not respond when polled by the software Three polling attempts are made If there is no panel response during these attempts the alarm is reported This has a default priority of 1 very high Poll Asking for information In a computerized system one computer asks another for information Port Expander A special device that allows you to have more than two serial ports on a personal computer Port A place where you can connect a communications cable or device into a computer 564 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Power Drop The change in the available electrical voltage or current supplied to a device This is a function of the size and length of the supply wires Power Fail Reroute An option that reroutes the Power Fail alarm from Input 8 to Input 19 on N 1000 II panels only when using the AEP 5 optional supervised input Power Supply The source of power that changes AC to filtered DC Priority See
130. Inputs window Programming 261 Advanced Options Description Multiple Interlock Protection MIP Available with all N 1000 series panels Requires that all input points tied to a single output return to a normal state before the output is de energized when interlocked with energize de energize action Without MIP just one input returning to the normal state de energizes the output PFR Power Fail Reroute Only available with the N 1000 II using AEP 5 Allows Input 8 Primary Power to be rerouted to Input 19 Primary Power System Alarm freeing up Input 8 on the AEP 5 to be used as a standard supervised input point OD Option Duress Only available with the N 1000 1 with 8 03 and N 1000 III IV with 8 07 firmware and higher When configured for PIN operation if a PIN is used with a value that is one number different from the valid PIN then the output defined in Outputs for D uress will pulse When configured with firmware later than 8 03 then 2 outputs can be selected Four outputs can be selected when an N 1000 IV is used OL 16 bit card number plus site code Available with all N 1000 series panels Creates Wiegand card numbers by concantenating the site code with the card numbers The result is transmitted as a 12 digit number Do Not add site codes to the panel with this option GHuLLLUeIBOId The OJ and OL options are mutually exclusive They cannot be used at the same time OJ 20 bit c
131. Interface and then connect with the database server which is already running All of the interaction between the end users and the access control system takes place through the User Interface The User Interface can be installed on the same PC as the D atabase Server and the Communication Server or it can reside on another machine on the network With the purchase of appropriate licenses numerous copies of the User Interface can be running and logged into the Database Server at the same time Abstract Devices An abstract device ADV is a logical representation of a physical device e g a communication server control panel door or CCTV switcher Similar in appearance to an icon an ADV is associated with an actual device in your access control system ADVs provide an interface for monitoring the status and controlling the actions of a physical device from the Control Map Floor Plan or Alarm View Enhanced ADVs are placed on a Floor Plan Background 8 Cc a ct J 30 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide WIN PAK 2 0 is designed to combine many hardware devices with different functions and features into a seamless access control system The abstract device plays an important role in this design The ADV provides a user interface for controlling different hardware without concerning the end user with the details of the hardware configuration For example when placed on a floor plan the ADV door object allows the user to
132. J Enables the J card format on a panel This accommodates the 35 bit card number where the first 20 bits are read as the card number and the balance as the site code Format L Enables the L card format option on a panel This allows the card number to be linked with the site code creating a linked card number 558 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Free Egress Allows exit without requiring the presentation of a credential This is usually accomplished by using an egress button motion sensor that trips amomentary shunt of the door alarm input thus allowing exit without an alarm G Global Shunt A period of time when all the points assigned to an event type are shunted regardless of time zones entered on individual points records Ground Connection A point where a cable is bonded to the grounding system Ground Fault A grounding problem that needs to be corrected for proper system operation Grounding System A unified bonded system designed to drain excess electrical energy from a circuit in order to protect life and property and reduce the potential of signal interference Group A group of output points that are activated by an input point or reader This usually refers to a configuration used to program elevator cab door access control H Hard Buffer Soft Buffer A hard buffer command overrides any number of soft buffer unbuffer commands If a panel receives multiple unbuffer commands it will remain buffered
133. K 2 0 for the first time ensure to perform the following actions or ensure the are previously performed Install Windows XP Windows 2000 SP2 Windows NT 4 0 SP6a or Windows 98SE for User Interface only e Disable all energy management from both the BIOS and Operating System as this can adversely affect the installation and operation of WIN PAK 2 0 e Install a video capture card or digital camera on the PC that will serve as the badging workstation e Install printer drivers Internet Explorer IE 5 5 is required for WIN PAK 2 0 to work properly If an older version than IE 5 50 4522 1800IC already installed WIN PAK 2 0 will install IE 5 5 Installation 41 NOTE Some software applications may not function properly on different versions of IE e Before beginning installation make a note of the CD Key inside the cover of the WIN PAK 2 0 Quick Reference Guide You will need this number during installation and when contacting Northern Comput ers regarding the software e Read the release notes on the WIN PAK 2 0 CD Additional installation information plus last minute updates may be contained therein TCP IP protocol must be installed for the MSDE to work properly A network card doesn t have to be installed Use Microsoft Loopback adaptor or Dialup adapter depending on the OS used e For NT based systems after any hardware software changes TCP IP run install SP6a to ensure the operating sys
134. List 2 Select the desired card from the database list and click Edit The Card Record window opens display ing the Card Properties tab Operations SJOP OH Pues 458 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Click the Badge tab of the Card Record window 4 Use the Front Side list to select the name of the badge design to be assigned to the front of the card Use the Back Side list to select the name of the badge design to be assigned to the back of the card if desired A printer that can printed two sided is required Refer to the Configuring the Badge Printer section for chapter 5 Back Jide Pieuce rehat te My Company Ine D007 South Street Anytown Anystate 12345 se Anna Foster Bii Sha ors KE ES Ee NOTE Card holder biometrics are not displayed until the card is issued to a card holder who has photos and or signatures in the Card Holder database 6 When you finish making badge layout selections for the card click OK to save your selections Click Cancel to return to the Card database window without saving the selections The Print Status box indicates if this badge has been printed Card Holders 459 Previewing and Printing Cards NOTE Once a badge has been associated with a card it can be printed either to a PVC card or to paper In order to print a card your printer must be installed in a Windows environment For further information on printer in
135. M in the Search For field The search will return every operator whose name begins with any letter from M through Z Greater Than searches are sorted in ascending order M NUDNO ISN Less Than searches work in the same manner as G reater Than searches except in the reverse order For example to search for every operator whose name begins with any letter in the range A L enter L in the Search For field The search returns every operator whose name begins with any letter between L and A Less Than searches are sorted in descending order Sort By Select one of the Sort By options to determine how the list of operators should be organized when the search is complete WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Searching by Last Log in To search for operators by a Last Log in date or range 1 Select Last Log in as the Search Field Sach and Sov Seach Fiad act Log In Cites On Sench Fos ai Sot Bp Lei Leg In kd 2 Select Before After or On as the Criteria 3 Click the Search for button The Select D ate calen dar window is displayed pe e oe Su Wo Tu We Th Fr Sa fi 28 25 30 Fi le 34a 5 amp FT 10 11 12 13 14 15 1h i7 18 19 20 1 22 23 24 25 28 27 20 29 30 E jds ip 4 Select the date you want to use for this search and click OK 5 On returning to the O perator window click Update List The O perators matching the criteria are dis played in the list NOTE To identify operators who
136. Medium Fast Network speed Controls speed at which pan tilt command is sent to the camera Three speed options are available Dial up connection Slow LAN Fast LAN Set Preset Allows operator to set up to eight preset controls for a PTZ camera Goto Preset Allows operator to select from eight previously defined preset PTZ camera controls Close This option allows the operator to close an individual camera display without closing the camera display window M NUDNO JOSN The right click menu options for retrieved video are limited to Show Title Show Controls and Close Chapter 4 Programming Programming Overview Quick Start Wizard Time Management Device Map Defining Access Tracking amp Control Areas Floor Plans Guard Tours Command File Database Programming 151 Programming Overview A great deal of planning is advised when setting up any access control system even one that is rather simple Use the following outline as a guide while planning your system and gathering the necessary information before you begin configuring your system Databases in WIN PAK 2 0 store organize and retrieve information for your access control system They are interrelated and while programming sequences can vary there are certain dependencies In other words some data cannot be entered until other information is already in place The following Programming O rder summarizes the information that needs to be entere
137. NNEEN EAEN EEEE EAEE EN EEEE AE 151 Programming Ordaki sca in ened neal a a a a eiaa 151 PaSSWOMS veces tt Pe titan lade tier a oh hee ale Aaea 156 AGMIN PASSWOMd T EEE A ET 157 QUIGKES AEWA A e et aa evel a E A eee ees 157 OVEIWIGW 5552 raa ataa enaa aA Ee a TE a e EEE Tari rA e a TANE 157 PKOCCC UPC tions nat erin caine tine ea alien Aa Taa E ah eae 159 Time Managements inf eg iatea nioa E A aE oti EE ae a Tin ween uanoointans 169 WIN PAK 2 0 Time ZONES ssssssessssssestrsrssssrististnntnstatnttentistitantnrantntannsnnnnn nenen nnna 169 Time Zone Database e cece ee eee eee ttt EtEAtENEEANEAEENEENEENENAEENEEEEEEEE EENEN EEE nE 170 Adding TIME ZONES at uaiie i a ae T AAE la leas 172 Editing TIME ZONES sieves ie tases veces heer oaesd eens aus alae AI PAAA AIENEA NEA 173 Isolating and Deleting Time ZONES cece cee eteee eter tetteettee tee tetaee 173 Isolating Time ZONES e eee ee eeteeee cence trees seeeecaeeaaeeessaeeeaeeaaeeaeeteeseaetaeeas 174 Viewing Removing and Reassigning Time ZONES eeecceeseeseeeeeeteeteetteeees 174 SCHECUIEK irna tute eit Rabu hu tiac eerie A E a aa a ao Tapaa iAd 176 SchedulinganiE Vent ssc ty0h a i Ghia ae a a a E 176 Dial Remote ARCA pcnis Gerd nests eae ion a a a a a aiis 178 R n Gommand Files 20i sc sat agate ee ote ainale tein eat 178 Holiday Groups sinana er anaa ea aAA aa OERA CUATE EEA EAA AAAA EEEE aise 179 Defining Holiday GroupS ssesssssssssssssrssrssestrsrntrntintnstnt
138. Number of columns to print option to set a basic print parameter for the report Click the Sort tab The Card Report can be sorted in order by the up to three categories 6 Use the Sort Order drop down lists to select the categories determining how you want the cards sorted The categories chosen can be sorted in Ascending and Descending order Ascending order will sort the cards alphabetically or numerically and D escending order will sort the cards in reverse alphabetical or numeric order Reports 491 CadFier Son Advanced Ced Holder Fite Bun hein Aicha Dustbin 7 Carel Haik Both Both l itre Printed C Unaiieched E Mot Panted Epon File Fin i Badge Dac Enim Pages Both Bath Assigned Aaaigned Dies A C Uineegred reneged a Badgs Front i Both an C Uneeagned Fe Gunton Acer Level 7 Click the Advanced Card H older Filter tab The Card report can be also be filtered by a number of Card Holder categories Buckge Pini Slats Print Prarie re The Card Report can be filtered according to Whether a Card Holder is Attached to the card Unattached or Both e Whether a PIN number is Assigned to the card Unassigned or Both Whether a Badge Front and or Badge Back is Assigned to the card Unassigned or Both e Whether the Badge Print Status of the card is Printed Not Printed or Both 8 Select the Custom Access Level check box to include all cards which ha
139. O Auto Popup Alarm View Window Allows the Alarm View to open or restore view if minimized when a new alarm is received and displayed in the Alarm View The Digital Video Popup window will open if an event has a digital video camera associated to it Beep Until Alarm Acknowledged This setting ensures that an alarm will beep until it is acknowledged User Overview 107 NOTE The beep is emitted from the PC s speaker and is not a sound file Therefore it works independently from the computer s multimedia audio settings and independently from WIN PAK 2 0 workstation sound settings Allow Alarm to be Silenced for 60 seconds Used in conjunction with the Beep until option this setting allows the operator to silence a beeping alarm for sixty seconds without actually acknowledging the alarm Do Not Close Window Until all Alarms are Acknowledged Requires the operator to acknowledge all alarms before closing the Alarm View window Reissue Uncleared Alarms Selected alarms that are acknowledged but not cleared will be reissued Example An alarm that is first received appears in the top pane of the Alarm Monitor view When the alarm is acknowledged it will be sent to the lower pane of the Alarm Monitor view and is left uncleared If that uncleared alarm goes to the Normal condition it remains in the lower pane If the alarm returns to the Alarm state it will be reissued that is it will jump to the top pane
140. OId 6 In the Find What field enter the first few letters of the device you want to select and click the Find button A list of readers or input point that match the criteria is displayed If the Find What field is left blank clicking the Find button returns a list of all inputs or readers on the device map 7 Select the input point or reader to be added to the guard tour and click OK NOTE To remove a check point from the list select it and click the X button to delete the check point 320 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 8 Repeat this procedure until all of the required check points have been added to the tour 9 If the check point is a reader rather than an input point you have the choice of using a valid card read only or allowing either valid or invalid cards to activate a check point In this case an invalid card can activate a check point without unlocking the door In the Valid Only column enter the type of card read required for the check point Y for valid cards only N for any card valid or invalid will work NOTE Multiple Guard Tours can be run at the same time If you plan to run tours concurrently do not use the same unsequenced check points in both tours as doing so will make it difficult to tell which guard is validating the point Use the Visible check box and Update button on the Unsequenced Check Point window to work with ADVs assigned to the check point devices Refer to the Che
141. Open the Card Biometrics tab of the Card Holder Record window 3 In the Signature area of the window click Delete to remove the signature 4 You are prompted to confirm the deletion Click OK to remove the signature or Cancel to retain the signature Card Holders 435 Access Levels Access levels determine where and when a user s card is valid in the system An access level is made up of a list of readers with time zones Together these elements define time periods during which the listed readers will grant access at various entrances The ability to assign cards to a group of entrances eliminates the need to program the card for every reader When a card is activated it is assigned an access level Changing the access level assigned to a card automatically changes when and where the card holder has access Access Level Database The Access Level database contains information on existing access levels which define the entrances a card holder can use and when they have access to those entrances Open the Access Level database from the Card menu Card System Reports Sy Card Gi Card Holder SJ P OH pIe Access Level AB Bulk Card Add JE Buk Card Delete The two pane Access Level database window is displayed next illustration WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide J Aros Ares E ig Eri Coat Must FR Et Coan Mew Tock H Lect O ties J Loca Stonaces ore Wet Sinead TZ Aai Dn
142. P Dok Et C Append Le Aimee 4 Select a Destination and file name for the backup If a tape drive is not installed on the computer you can not select Tape If a tape drive is on the com puter then the option to format the tape is also given Backup Restore Schedule Application Backup ntenes4en WIN PAK 2 0 9 Fashay ds E Tepe T Dok T a i aap z ragaie ETT 25 Srani r r ile Dhail Database Maintenance 539 5 Click Continue to bring up the Scheduling window WIN PAK 2 0 me Fim h 6 Select the Schedule Type Run Once will prompt for the time and date y rt 9 of n 0 S v ni 0 5 D 5 al 0 540 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Schedule to occur later will bring up Daily Weekly and Montly options chedule aie oF ea sie WIN PAK 2 0 a Fitesh Daily allows the back up to be run every so many days as defined from 1 999 day s at the specified time Weekly allows the back up to be run on a specified day of the week at a specified time Monthly allows the backup to be run on the selected the day of the month 1 31 or at regular monthly intervals Schedule Schedules can be modified by selecting Modify Schedule from the main Backup and Restore Window To open a list of currently scheduled backups highlight a backup in the main schedule list and click on modify This will bring up the Schedule screens shown above Modify the sc
143. Properties Open the Positioning tab of the Badge O bject Properties window Badge Ubject Properties Badge Coles Positioning Teck 1 Track 2 Track a Hotirontal Position YevicalPoston Dieniaton Ceres Hidde p I a TE O cen e ee f e 2 Use the down arrow to the right of the Horizontal Position field to select either Left Center or Right 3 Indicate the Vertical Position of the image by selecting Top Middle or Bottom 4 Set the degree of rotation in the Orientation field Badging 357 Options on the Positioning Tab Horizontal Places the graphic object in the top center or bottom of the defined area Vertical Places the graphic object to the right or left side or in the middle of the defined area Orientation Rotates the selected object by 90 egree increments 0 Places the object upright 90 Rotates the object 90 clockwise 180 Places the object upside down 270 Rotates the object 90 counterclockwise Top Position from the top of the badge in millimeters normally 0 for PVC printers Left Position from the left edge of the badge in millimeters normally 0 for PVC printers Height Height of the badge in millimeters Width Width of the badge in millimeters WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Video Backgrounds Another way to create a background graphic is to capture a video image Your video equipment including a supported video capture card or comp
144. Record NOTE If you are adding a new card holder you must first enter the card holder s name 428 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Click Capture in the Photo area of the window The Capture Image window opens showing the live view from your video camera 4 Click Settings to expand the window and access the video settings Capui image FlashPanl 30 Mikeo P e Contact aj a 35 ss _ a Shaper ajj Jo I Lekapi jah Apac Fister Bighnast aj H E Contact aj E Fhain Bighnszr aj z a 0 EETA Compesce a 5 Adjust the Video settings explained below until the picture is satisfactory 6 If you are not using a flash set the Grab settings to the same values as the Video settings Reduce the Grab Brightness and Contrast if you are using a flash The exact settings will vary de pending on the type of flash and other lighting used and can only be determined through trial and error 7 Click Freeze to capture the image Once the picture is frozen or captured you can make a number of adjustments Card Holders 429 Freeze Live This button switches between static and live view image When the desired image is on screen click Freeze to keep it on screen Click Live to switch back to the live camera view Adjust the slides at the right of the background image to en hance the quality 8 Use the cropping frame to crop the image and adjust its proportions If you w
145. Reports database window Chapter 9 Database Maintenance Overview Removing Deleted Database Records Deleting History from Database Database Backup and Restore Utility Database Limits and Capacities Database Maintenance 533 Overview Database maintenance provides tools for monitoring the database and for removing unused information from the database While deleted records are no longer available within the system they have not actually been removed from the hard disk The Remove Deleted Records utility is used to permanently remove them thus reducing the size of your database Removing Deleted Database Records 1 Select the Database Maintenance option from the WIN PAK 2 0 File menu The Database Maintenance dialog opens on your desktop 2 Select the Remove Deleted Records check box y rt g of n 0 S v a 0 5 D 5 al 0 534 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Click the Change button and select a date for the Until Date field Select Ural Date Hench 200 bel Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa E E 7a 9 WMH 12 13 14 15 16 17 1h 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 J71 1 m345 amp Tf 4 Click Today to select the current date or select a date from the calendar Deleted records up to today but not including today will be deleted 5 Click Start A prompt reminds you to make a backup copy of the databases before deleting records Deleting Records x Make sure that you made
146. Select Tracking Areas from the Define option on the Configuration menu The Tracking Area window is displayed Tracking Area OF x ET racking and Mustering Areas O65 East Coast Muster G East Coast OfficeWarehouse Exit Area card reads not shown SA muster branch F Show Available Devices 2 Right click Tracking and Mustering Areas and select Add Branch The Tracking and Mustering Area Configuration dialog opens Tracking and blustering Area Configuration EG Name Local Office Cancel I Mustering Enter the Name of the first area you want to define 4 By default the area is a tracking area To designate it as a muster area select the Muster check box 5 Click OK The new branch appears in the Tracking Area window Programming 297 NOTE 6 Right click the new branch and select Add En trances Tiating Aiea 3 Oo rakip and HiHi erea z4 Eii Cassi Musha s Eat Cost Ofira mehane IHE Eri Aresocand reac mot eari m EA riir bre 7 When the Add Devices window is displayed select from the list of available entrances Ardd Devies r E Derice Type Entrance i Chen E Eset Lobby Lek Enhance Fiesder The rade koged out E Eai Lobby Aigh Entiarece Anadir That ngazi bocabed out BB es Lobby Entanoe Resad ajs E E Continue until you have added all of the branches and entrances required Entrances selected for a tracking
147. Selecting this option calls the Add Devices window and allows you to highlight any branch on the Control Area Tree and add devices to it Programming 303 Removing a Branch or Device from the Control Area Tree To remove a branch or device from the Control Area Tree just right click on it and select Remove from the menu The branch or device is removed from the Control Tree and the device is now available via the Add Devices window for placement on another branch in the Control Area Tree Devices can be moved from one branch to another by selecting and dragging the device to a different branch One branch and its devices can be moved in this manner also If the Quick Start Wizard was used a branch named Quick Start Site was created Use the above procedure to logically layout the control map Du L wuesib0Oid 304 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Floor Plans a The Floor Plan database contains information on all the floor plans that have been entered into the system Floor plans can be added changed or deleted from the Floor Plan database The Floor Plan database is accessed via the Floor Plan Definition option on the WIN PAK 2 0 Configuration menu or by clicking the Floor Plan toolbar button Coniyasen Wika He T Define z rae T Tirs Hram Gij Quick Sten Wired T Cad Holder 3 T Badge LI WE Select Language Dranaite iij Command Fie Pj Gued Tou The Floor Plan database lists e
148. TWARE or any portion thereof in any form to any third party You shall be obligated to retain in confidence the SOFTWARE except for any published WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide user manual s you may have received from Northem Computers Inc and except for SOFTWARE information which is publicly known or lawfully received from a third party or known by you prior to the date you received the SOFTWARE You shall not have the right to print copy or reproduce in whole in part or in any form whatsoever the SOFTWARE except that two copies of the media may be made in machine readable form for use by you for backup and or archiving purposes on a single computer system You may not transfer the SOFTWARE electronically from one computer to another or over a network You agree not to decompile disassemble or otherwise reverse engineer the SOFTWARE You may not modify the programs in any way without the prior written consent of Northern Computers Inc The manuals and other documentation may not be copied for any purpose The SOFTWARE may be removed from one computer system and transferred to a backup system but shall not under any circumstances be used concurrently on more than one computer system unless otherwise licensed to do so You agree to maintain full and complete records of the number and location of any such copies of the SOFTWARE which have been generated and to reproduce on any such copies any and all copyright notices and
149. Time and Update Custom Access Level If Dial Remote Area is selected a number of other options become available The Run Command File option allows you to run any of the command files that you defined See Command File Database Refer to the User Interface section of chapter 3 of this manual for details on working with database window ele ments Scheduling an Event Open the Schedule window by selecting Schedule from the Time Management option on the Configuration menu The main Schedule window is displayed listing events that have already been scheduled and defined Programming 177 r Schedule BEE Y Stadi Mame Type Freguericy Hei Daa Aired Tire al fad Custom Card Ancess Level Updsts dons Level i Honds Jub 02 2007 6 43 00 Se ed Eat Coas Mesa York Lice Dial Remote Ares 4 Hondap du 2 200 11 000 Pe ed Heatly Cad Vedale Acisi bd Dieta Cait Haih Horndip Juk 02 2001 6440044 fi Local Sijs on sl creel Dial Ferme Aes Weak Saturday duy OF 2001 1210 00a D Daia ire Seach and Sot Digestion Seanch Field a Seach Foe Saal By Srhadde Hams Du LwuesiB0i1d 1 Click Add The Schedule Record window is dis played Schedule Aecord Schedule Edades Hare Pacing Lot Est hate Update Hest Scheduled Liste b Tine i Typa Chal Reno Sree T pieni ms Hisu Minus i P ap Nica Cornmand Fie Dia Aare Aran Renae Ane Peking Gots Et I Buller Fe Seed Chats ad
150. User Guide In the following diagram A B C and D are Tracking Areas If each area is distinct and not nested explained later the area is defined by the readers that allow access to the area e Readers 1 4 and 9 allow access to Tracking Area A e Readers 3 and 6 allow access to Tracking Area B e Reader 5 allows access to Tracking Area C e Reader 8 allows access to Tracking Area D The first time a person presents a card at one of these readers the read event is recorded and may be observed in the Muster view Each time that card is presented at one of the readers in that same area the previous record for the card is replaced by the new record When a person moves to a different area his card reads are removed from the former area and now appear in the new area The screen displays the most recent records of card reads from individual areas or from all areas at one time The operator can select which areas to view by selecting the appropriate branch on the Tracking Area tree If the top level is selected card reads from all areas are displayed Reports can also be generated from the Tracking Areas Programming 291 When a card is presented at a muster reader it is removed from the tracking area and is listed in the muster area A report of these card reads can be printed Muster Areas Like tracking areas muster areas are also logical areas not defined by the hardwiring of the system Muster are
151. User Guide Select D oor to enable door functions D eselect it for reader only operation Select the check box to the left of the reader number s to verify the D oor setting Create an ADV for each reader Select the reader and click the Add button in the ADV area of the win dow If the Door option is selected additional actions are available e g door normal door ajar etc If the PIN option was selected on the Configuration Options window you can select Enable PIN thus setting the reader so that it requires a PIN N 1000 IV allows only two PIN readers to be used where keypad 1 as wired on the panel will be connected to the lowest reader number selected for PIN use and keypad 2 will be connected with the highest reader number selected for PIN use The lower portion of the Reader window illustrates certain door and input point relationships Refer to the Interpreting D oor Interlocks section ahead for explanation Click the Next button to advance to the Panel Configuration Finish window Programming 275 Interpreting Door Interlocks With the Door check box selected the following door interlock input and output relationships for this reader are shown In the example shown ahead a valid card read or request for free Egress will pulse the Direct Point unlocking the door When the Direct Point is pulsed the Status Input Shunt D evice door alarm status switch is shunted and will not report any
152. Video Capture Card 39 System Settings 81 108 Operator Database 91 98 Operator Level Database 81 Operators and Operator Levels 81 System Defaults 105 108 Workstation Defaults 98 104 System Setup Networked Systems 41 Standalone Systems 40 T Testing Translations 476 Thousands separator 411 Time Management 169 184 Holiday Groups 179 184 Scheduler 176 178 WIN PAK 2 0 Time Zones 169 175 Adding 172 173 Editing 173 Isolating and Deleting 173 Time Zone Database 170 172 Viewing Removing and Reassigning 174 175 Time separator 412 Toolbar Buttons User Interface 69 70 Tracking Server Configuration 213 Tracking and Muster 140 147 Tracking and Muster Server 213 216 Tracking and Mustering Areas Defining 289 297 Muster System Precautions 293 295 Tracking Areas 289 Translating Dialogs Menus and Other Text 467 476 Translating Text amp Selecting Languages 463 Translation Creating a Text File for Translation 464 465 Importing a Language File 476 Selecting a Language for Translation 466 Testing Translations 476 Translating Dialogs Menus and Other Text 467 476 Translating Text amp Selecting Languages 463 Tree Structures 79 TTS 368 U U option 262 Uninstalling WIN PAK 2 0 60 Upgrades 42 User Interface 69 80 Database Windows 73 78 Detail Database Record Windows 78 Installation 55 59 Logging In 80 Menus 71 72 Overview 29 Right Click Menus 73 Toolbar Buttons 69 70
153. When configuring the Control Areas you ll notice that devices can only be added to branches on the Control Area Tree If the branch to which you need to add a device doesn t exist it must be added Gu L Luesboid Adding Branches 1 Adda Branch by right clicking on the control area or the sub branch where the Branch is being added and select Add Branch from the menu ee ee Cored Area EHE Whole Company E Durs Alum ai Loos Storage on Vt St gt Dues a East CoasiOlice ES Duen a Eset Coast Ollice E Duen a Loca Shovage on 1a Sinead E m Loca Olfice mE Locs Storage on E Muste Resda 1 Rename a Muster Resda Remove tid Device T Shon Available Devices The Configure Branch dialog is displayed next illustration 300 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Configure Barh 2 Enter the Branch Name and click the OK button The Branch is now available on the Control Area Tree Adding Devices to Braches Once you have branches defined individual devices can be added to the Control Area Tree 1 Right click on the branch to which the device is being added and select Add Device C amiral Area EE Cored Ama EHE Whole Company E Duss Alem st Loca Storage on Isi St EE Danese at Ean Cosel Ollis gt Duer ot Cast Comet Oficis E gt Dues at Local Storage on 1st Street PHI Eset Cost Office i iG East Const Parvela Con fe E Gast Cone Warehouse M EHD Local Office EE Acces Control Parek i Aam Sounder
154. Wiegand formats The panel address is followed by a format slot number fsn Typically Format 1 is used for Wiegand swipe Motorola and other generic cards and can be inversed for Wiegand insert card reader applications Format 2 is used for Northern Computer magnetic stripe swipe and Cotag proximity cards Format 3 is used for HID cards These defaults can be edited and other Wiegand card formats can be entered in the remaining slots Following is a list of Wiegand card formats valid with the N 1000 CR 1 Wiegand Card Swipe F pn fsn 26 S1 D 1 B1 B2 B3 B4 NR 1 Magstripe Swipe F pn fsn 32 S D B1 B2 B3 B4 PR 2 Hughes IDI Proximity F pn fmn 34 S1 D 1 Bl B2 B3 B4 CI 1 Wiegand Card Insert F pn fs 26 I 1 D_1 B1 B2 B3 B4 PR 1 280 Cotag Proximity F pn fsn 32 S D B1 B2 B3 B4 HG 1 Hand Geometry F pn fsn 32 S D B1 B2 B3 B4 Programming 251 5 Conductor Keypad F pn fsn 32 S D B1 B2 B3 B4 Dorado Magstripe Cards F pn fn 34 S1 D B1 B2 B3 B4 Sielox Wiegand Cards F pn fn 34 S1 D 1 B1 B2 B3 B4 Sielox Proximity Cards F pn fsn 32 S D B1 B2 B3 B4 NCS 25 Bit Cards F pn fn 25 S1 D 1 B1 B4 B2 B3 NCS 29 Bit Cards F pn fn 29 S1 D 1 B1 B4 B2 B3 Kidde Cards F pn fsn 31 S 1 B B2 B3 B4 Continental 36 Bit Cards F pn fsn 36 S3 D 2 Bl B2 B3 B4 Continental 37 Bit Cards F pn fsn 37 S3 D 2 B1 B2 B3 B4 Casi Russco Format F pn fsn 40 D 1 S 1 B1 B2 B3 B4 Requires 8 05 fi
155. a Tima Zona muti be rengeed pria bo deketing i Click OK to return to the Time Zone database list and isolate the Time Zone Viewing Removing and Reassigning Time Zones 1 Select the Time Zone you wish to isolate from the database list 2 Click Isolate The Isolate window is displayed containing a list of all instances where the selected Time Zone is being used Programming 175 Cee ActionGece BDs Opeiaicis Pansi Atbtit Levila Tach rma Eag Gaia Pasting Eninarce Haih Dat Pikire Eritrea Bhata Fare Esi and Han Lobby Daund Boor sope control Ead Chit Wira iut East Cois Diliee Lica Stoeger TH Sheet Teka all aura hes Tints be ba permed hon the marei panah Dei l Deke i 3 Check each tab for Time Zone usage and assign a new Time Zone or delete the Time Zone from a device where necessary 4 Click OK to return to the main Time Zone database window 5 Click Delete to remove the selected Time Zone Bu LLwuesiBb01d 176 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Scheduler NOTE The Schedule Server performs events on a predetermined time table these events are managed via the Schedule database Schedule events can be one time events hourly daily weekly once every two weeks or monthly There is also a Never option to define an event without knowing when it will need to be sent Event types include Activate and Deactivate Cards Dial Remote Area Run Command File Send D ate and
156. adio button is selected Range reports on a designated range of floor plans using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selected 3 Use the Metafile Name field to include floor plans using a specific background file 4 Use the ADV Type and ADV fields to further define the report if desired 5 On the Sort tab indicate the Sort Order for the report e g by name in ascending or descending order WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 6 Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report 7 Click Close to exit the Floor Plan report window and return to the main Reports database window Guard Tour Report 1 Select the Guard Tour report from the Reports database window The Guard Tour report window opens with the Filter Guard Tour tab displayed Riepot Guard Tour x Guard Toa Fite Soa Fan from dechive Distabasa I Guard Tours to Print Erit Preview From Ca Sequersced Gused Tou Ta Estim Pages Check Pant Types bo inchude gt C Inpa zeala O Herda T Both Does 2 Use the Guard Tours to Print area of the window to select one of the following to define the report All reports on all guard tours One reports on an individual guard tour using the From field activated when the One radio button is selected Range repor
157. al lation to install the Communication Server Click N ext When prompted select the path and file name for your executable program files or accept the default settings 7 rt Y J ct O During installation you may be asked if you want to overwrite existing dll files Keep your existing dlls When asked Do you want to keep this file click Yes When the install has been completed successfully the message WIN PAK 2 0 Setup Complete ap pears Select Yes I want to restart my Computer Now and click Finish The install program will automatically restart your computer A number of Windows components may be installed The software may reboot your computer after each of these components is installed This is normal When installa tion is complete you will be prompted to reboot your computer again Reboot the computer at this time 60 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Uninstalling WIN PAK 2 0 NOTE To uninstall WIN PAK 2 0 verify that all WIN PAK 2 0 servers have been stopped then use the Windows Add Remove Programs tool This tool is found by going to Start Settings Control Panel Add Remove Programs Select the Install Uninstall tab and scroll to the WIN PAK 2 0 entry and click on that item Click the Add Remove button to uninstall the software On Windows XP systems Click on Start gt Control Panel gt Add Remove Programs then select WIN PAK 2 0 and click Change Remove When the
158. alarm condition for the programmed shunt time F bow GES 1 Fres Eyen Inipit in Puke Ho ichin Disa Pan Status npu 4 Shunt Deica Du wuLULIDOId Foglia IH p Aanhin With the Free Egress Input shunts Status Input Shunt Device check box selected the following reader relationships are displayed Typical application is a door strike and a motion or PIR touchless egress device This prevents the door from unlocking when a person may be just walking by the door egress sensor E Dw PF Fiss Egress ingu dania Siau Input Sani Darwen Jisu ingui f Shunt Devica ll Gaunt Times 18 sec Folre Mo fuchinn 276 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Direct Point The Direct Point indicates the output that will be directly controlled by the reader or Free Egress Input Click the Direct Point button to open the Configure Direct Point dialog ry Fo Tie Direct Port Da1 Sect hint Hr Pasties 10 0 secon cres 1 Indicate if the point being configured is an input I point output O point or output G group 2 Select the input output or group to be used as the Direct Point 3 Set the Pulse Time for the point 4 Click OK to return to the Readers window Free Egress Input Free Egress Input is used to indicate which input will be used for the Free Egress device and to configure a door s free egress point Click the Free Egress Input button on the Readers window The Confi
159. amming 229 A 2927 Commectseen Configuration Basic Information BD Name AS 222 com pot 0 1200 baa i w l ee E Peat Setting Le Pot COM 8 7 Bin pe Second 132300 x Dare Data Bats 8 bed r l Panty Hons I Siop Biz i PAdditt of Mode narrak Enappion FParmejid Adding an RS 232 Connection An RS 232 connection is defined by adding it to the Device Map The communication server must have a port or TCP IP address available for each communica tion interface in your system With the D evice Map open right click the Communica tion Server to which you are connecting and select Add Select RS 232 Connection from the pick list The RS 232 Connection Configuration Basic Informa tion window is displayed RS 232 Connection Configuration Basic Information BuLLLUeIBOJd _ toot e 1 Enter a unique Name for the RS 232 Connection using up to 30 characters This is a required field 230 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 2 Enter a Description of the RS 232 Connection if desired This field holds up to 60characters 3 Select the Port to which the RS 232 Connection is to be made 4 Enter the Bits per Second communication rate for the Port The default is 9600 5 The Data Bits Parity and Stop Bits fields for Port The default D ata Bits is 8 Parity is None and Stop Bits is 1 IP Address If TCP IP Connection is selected as the Port the IP Address or Node name field must b
160. amming 313 5 Select the ADV you want associated with the object and click OK to return to the Control Properties window e The Rotation Angle field defaults to zero Change this setting only if you want the ADV rotated in the Floor Plan design window e Use the Show Name and Show Tooltip check boxes to toggle these options on and off Show Name displays the ADV name inside the ADV This can be diffult to read if the ADV name is long or the ADV is small To make it easier to read select Show Tool Tip The ADV name will appear on the screen when the mouse rests on the ADV Status Configuration 6 Click the Status Configuration tab and make any desired changes in the color or blink settings Gu LLLuesiBb0O1d Panel 4 100 Properties Change a color by clicking the color swatch to open the Color window Select a basic color or create a custom color and click OK For more information on working with Colors refer to the Colors section of chapter 5 By default devices blink when in a alarm state indicated by the checked box To change this setting select or deselect the appropriate boxes 314 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide The new status configuration can be saved and applied as the default for other ADVs of this type by selecting the Save as D efault check box 7 Click OK to save the property settings 8 On returning to the Floorplan Toolbox click Save or Save amp Exit Link Properties If the object be
161. ant a particular proportion enter it in the Aspect Ratio field and select Lock Aspect Ratio 9 If the image is too dark or too light adjust the Photo Brightness 10 Set the degree to which you want to Compress the captured image 11 Click OK to save the image Capturing Additional Card Holder Photos To add additional photos to a card holder file follow the procedure outlined above but change the Index on the Card Biometrics tab to a new number If you do not change the photo index the new photo you capture replaces the existing photo with that photo index number b Q L oJ Q 0 ui Video Settings The settings in this section apply to the live on screen video image Brightness Lightens or darkens the entire tonal range of the image Contrast Expands or contracts the entire tonal range of the image The difference in highlights and shadows can be greatly increased or decreased by adjusting the contrast Saturation Adjusts the vibrancy the level of color in the image 430 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Hue Adjusts the value of color in the image Adjusting this can correct images that seem to have an incorrect color Sharpen Sharpens blurry images by increasing the contrast of adjacent pixels Grab Settings These settings are applied to the camera when an image is captured If you are not using a flash set the G rab Brightness and Contrast to the same as the Video settings If a flash is used reduc
162. ap Normally the Command File Server is located on the same machine as the D atabase Server Configuring the Command File Server 1 From the Configuration menu select Device gt Device Map The D evice window will open 2inlx Spe Deis Find 3 Cormand Fie Server 3 i BuLLLUeIBOJd 2 In the Device window above right click on the Devices folder and select Add gt Command File Server The Command File Server Configuration window will be displayed Command File Seve Conlipa itia ee ne J e j e i 3 Enter a unique Name for the Command File Server using up to 30 characters 208 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide If desired enter a Description of the Command File Server using up to 60 characters Enter the Machine N ame where the server is located This is usually the same machine as the Database Server It is generally not necessary to change the Protocol End Point However there are multiple servers Communication Guard Tour Scheduler Tracking and Muster and each must have a unique protocol end point which can be any number from 1024 through 9999 Select a number that is not used by another device on the network and enter it into this field The default should work fine Change this only if duplicate protocol points exist Create an ADV for the Command File Server by clicking the Add button in the ADV area of the window upper right corner When you have completed the ADV click
163. ard number plus site code O nly available with 8 03 firmware or higher Sets the format for 20 bit card numbers The first 12 bits are interpreted as the site code and the last 8 as the card number The card number is sent to the head end software as a 12 digit number 262 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide OH 25 bit card number plus site code Available for use with firmware later than 8 03 Allows special card format applications U option Available with all N 1000 series panels Allows the user to change the number of cards the panel supports Selecting more cards reduces the number of buffers available to store events when the panel is not online with the computer or heavy traffic prevents immediate transmission of all events Initialization Command The Initialization Command field displays the command string sent to the panel at initialization based on the Advanced Options selected Note that as an option is selected or deselected a corresponding string in the Initialization Command field is added or removed Number of Cards U Option The Number of Cards option allows you to enter the number of cards for the panel if the U advanced option is selected Outputs for Duress Outputs for Duress Duress Option Only available with the N 1000 II with 8 03 and N 1000 III IV with 8 07 firmware and higher When configured for PIN operation if a PIN is used with a value that is one number different from the valid PIN then
164. area Spann 12 in 1 oe 26 inm C iin Binal C iiin Benn Win Pier F Smap bo Did Fe Efe ind coes_ Grids are evenly spaced points on the badge layout area that assist in sizing and aligning items The grid can be used as a visual aid in placing items or you can have items snap to the grid for more precise object alignment Use the Grid Settings dialog to select the spacing of your grid Select Snap to Grid if you want items to snap to the grid when they are moved With Snap to Grid selected when an item is moved close to a grid mark it is pulled to it as if to a magnet Select Show Grid if you want the grid marks visible in the layout area Blockouts Blockouts provide a non printing area for badges The blockout keeps a defined area of the badge free of printing which is useful in preventing printing over a magnetic stripe or hole punch area in the card Unlike other badge objects the blockout has no properties Within the item layering order the blockout always remains on top 348 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE While blockout is generally effective in preventing overprint ing of the magstripe area some card printers will print resin black over the blockout area Therefore avoid placing any black type over the magstripe area Badge Element Layout AdE di Bekoul lem E Setting a Blockout 1 Use the Badge Definition right click menu to select Blockout The Blockout Items Definitions dialog
165. area can be moved to other tracking areas but are NOT available for a muster area Entrances selected for a muster area can not be moved to any other muster area or a tracking area Du uLULIDOId WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Control Areas Control Areas are used to define the O perator Levels and to filter alarms and other information being sent to various views Control Areas are also used to defined the Control Map The tree structure of the Control Map shows system devices as well as the relationships of the communication server loops panels input and output points and groups to one another In addition the Control Map provides another method of controlling system devices Control areas should be created to provide a logical means of controling the system An example may be grouping entrances under several branches and separating access control hardware from video equipment etc Begin Control Area definition by selecting Control Areas from the Define option on the WIN PAK 2 0 Configuration menu Copfguration Winde Help EE komen A Gece BE Teaching Aat Tine Haracenent gt i ESTEE BW GuckGunwieed 7 Cad Mother E z Badge F T Dareia da Command Fie A Gused Tour E Foo Plan Detain Programming 299 The Control Area window is displayed EF Control Area OF x G Control Area T Show Available Devices Adding Branches and Devices to the Control Area Tree
166. as contain readers that are only used by card holders if there is a call for muster e g in the event of a disaster Several different muster areas can be created The Muster View displays card read events A report can be run on cards presented in an individual muster area or at all muster areas In normal conditions no transactions are recorded at muster readers They are only used if there is a muster call usually in an emergency Du LLLuesiBb01d Nesting Areas The concept of nesting is not unique to the tracking system but does take on considerable significance when planning for disaster management and can change the way tracking reports are generated When an area is nested in another area its readers are also part of that area The general principle of nesting is that readers used to enter an area or move about within the area should be listed under the tracking area in the Tracking Areas database For example if a hospital building is designated as tracking area H the laboratory within the hospital can be a tracking area labeled L which is nested within H The two readers in the lab would define tracking area L but would also be part of the H tracking area Therefore an employee who has entered the lab is shown as being present in the hospital as well as being present in the lab 292 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Were the laboratory area not nested an employee entering the lab would be shown as present i
167. at a tracking reader in another area it is removed from the first area and added to the most recent area 142 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide DD Tdi ad Huising Erem H Ea Cgi hieer A Bg Lari Cosi Dice hans m Ei Ama cand ona ret hoe E D Loew Otte A DJ Geared Mics pE bea iaag or 1t Set 4 Han Lotty a Paki lo 0 waste rr af Huta Paaie ent Gate 4 Select the Muster Reader to show all the cards which have been presented at the muster readers As cards are presented at muster readers they are removed from the tracking areas Both valid and invalid cards are displayed at the muster reader p fire sts _ Refreshing the Muster View Select the Refresh List Periodically check box to update the list every few seconds If you wish to freeze the list temporarily deselect this box Deleting Events from the Muster List Events can be deleted from the Muster list Select an event and click the Delete button Delete a range of events by holding down the SHIFT key while clicking on the first and last event in the range to be deleted When all the desired events are selected click the Delete button User Overview m 43 Printing a Muster Report Click the Print button on the bottom of the Muster View window to produce a Muster Report A filter dialog is displayed below allowing you to filter and sort the results Report Tracking and Muster View X Tracking or Muster Area Filter B
168. at the bottom of the window After setting the parameters for the report click the Print Preview button to view the report on your desktop Click Print to send the report to your printer Reports 481 Report Window Conventions While the sorting and filtering options found on Report detail windows vary depending upon the individual report selected certain conventions are applied to all reports For example many report windows have a set of radio buttons used to filter the report m Card Number From Alt as C One To C Range a 2 When these filter options are presented they are used in the same manner across all reports e Select the All radio button to report on all records that can be included in the report e Select the One radio button to report on an indi vidual record When the One button is selected the From field is activated allowing a selection to be made e Select the Range radio button to report on a desig nated range of records When the Range button is selected both the From and To fields are activated allowing a reporting range to be set 482 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE Estimating Report Size The size of a report depends on the type of report and the amount of filtering done to it The number of pages required for printing also depends on your printer Before printing a report it may be helpful to know how many pages it will require When you click the Estim
169. atabase The list of tours can be searched and sorted and reports can be generated Details of a selected tour can be viewed by selecting the Detail View check box Tours are added and edited in the Guard Tour database Programming 317 Defining A Guard Tour 1 Select the Guard Tour option from the WIN PAK 2 0 Configuration menu Cogtiguation Window He Tl Define T Deia T Time Hanagemeni Bey Quick Stat wind CedHokder T Badge Translate E Plow Plan Deteition The Guard Tour database window is displayed Sort By Tour Harra 2 Click Add to open the G uard Tour Record next illustration Du LLLuesBb01d 318 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Enter a descriptive N ame for the G uard Tour This field holds up to 40 characters 4 Click either the Sequenced Check Point or Unsequenced Check Point tab One guard tour can have both types of check points Programming 319 Unsequenced Check Points 5 In the Select area of the window click Inputs to select inputs points or click Readers to select readers The Select dialog opens Goad Tow Hermi Mares Sequmned Check Frei Ussecuenced Check Fre 1 st Lode Patang Eniseree ampa H 2 Ead Cead buking Ea freder H F Eai Ceh Dies Enttaree Fank H a Esi Copel 0 fine Ei Feeder H IC aot Coa aae Crepes i H Eat Crad himana Huria H T Eia Cini Wian Heath Sede H E Eai Gente Pakiy Erie Finak H Du wuLULID
170. ate Pages button on the report s detail window WIN PAK 2 0 scans the report and returns a page count to you WIN PAK 2 IN The estimated number of pages is 11 Exporting Reports An export function next illustration allows the report to be exported in a simple delimited format The delimiter provides a signal that the information for a particular field is complete and signals that the next string of information is regarded as a new field The delimiter can be specified as Tab Semicolon Comma Space or Other user definable Tab is the default delimiter Care should be used when specifying a delimiter other than Tab as characters such as a Comma or Space could be used in the data field giving a misleading field separator The Operator Actions Report has an export function indepen dent from the other reports Refer to the Operator Actions Report section for exporting an Operator Actions report Reports 483 Export File x Delimiter Tab C Semicolon C Comma C Space C Other File Directory to save File to fe T Default File Name txt V Include Report Name in File Name V Include Date and Time in File Name File Name Access Area 4 24 01 3 59 53 PM tet Su DOSE AE Cancel The File section allows you to specify or navigate to the Directory to save File to and allows additions to the Default File Name Selecting Include Report Name in File Name and or Included D ate a
171. ate operator update delete or add action to a particular database Card reports on all card events Guard reports G uard Tour events Alarm and Card Transactions reports all card and alarm events per the transaction type Clears reports the card alarm events that were cleared by the operator Acknowledgements reports the alarm events that were acknowledged by the operator Operator Messages reports the operator message that was entered for the alarm event 516 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 6 Transactions can be filtered to selected ADVs by clicking on the Filter ADVs button next illustra tion Navigate through the Control Map structure right clicking on the branch es or device s to select or invert select ADVs Click OK to return to the Transaction Filter window NOTE The Sort on Sequence ID will display the report grouping it by the event identifier Sequence ID This can be helpful in grouping an event s history within multiple events Reports 517 7 The Card Holder Filter provides the ability to cus tomize the report to card holder specific information Each selection is anded so care should be used when selecting the options so as not to create so many restrictions that no records can be found that meet the selected criteria Select all appropriate options described below Date ard The Filter Tianiacton Pe Cad Holder Fiter avn Fines hun bain Abert Detar 7 Fist Hama Liti H a
172. atible TWAIN device must be installed Installing Badge DLLs A specific dynamic link library dll file is required for the video capture card TWAIN device image acquisition device and signature pad used with the WIN PAK 2 0 System The DLLs for currently supported hardware are included in the WIN PAK 2 0 directory and can be installed from within WIN PAK 2 0 1 Select Badge DLL s from the Badge option on the Configuration menu Defne k J Drie T Tre hrspnet Bi Quiet Stet wind PH Card Hokder j d E A al j a Dodos Layos Liity 2 Irradio By Command Fis FR Gud Tow By Flom Flr Denton Badging 359 2 When the Badge DLL s dialog opens click the browse button next to the hardware device you have installed Badge DLL s Ed Video Capture Card DLL C Program Files WINPAK2 T wain dll Signature Pad DLL C Program Files WINPAK2 PenWare cll OK Cancel The Open window is displayed allowing you to navigate through the WIN PAK 2 0 directory 3 Select the appropriate D LL file and click Open or double click on the file The DLL name is entered in the hardware device field in the Badge DLL s win dow NOTE If no DLL appears verify that the Windows Explorer folder Options View is set to show all files 4 Click OK to save your selections and close the Badge DLL s window 360 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE Capturing a Video Background 1
173. ation Port Q C100 on amp Camera S Communication Loop Modem to Q Nasach Loop Name Panel Address Windows 2000 COM1 Current Loop m the Panel Address Loop 1 1 E 8 From the Panel Address list select the address for the panel to be configured Then click Next to continue The Panel Type screen will appear next illustration Programming F Quick Start Wizard Panel Type Operating System Communication Port Communication Loop Modem toll Loop Name Q N 485 AC s Panel Address Panel Type Windows 2000 COM1 Current Loop Loop 1 1 N 1000 z 9 From the Panel Type list select the panel model for the given address Then click Next to continue The Panel Name screen will appear ff Quick Start Wizard Panel Name Operating System Communication Port Q C100 on amp Camera SA Communication Loop ae Maen Loop Name Panel Address Panel Type Panel Name Windows 2000 COM1 Current Loop Loop 1 1 N 1000 Loop 1 Panel 1 10 If desired type a different name than the default name Then click Next to continue The Reader Names screen will appear next illustration d Lm 2 9 3 3 ce 164 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide P Quick Start Wizard Reader Names Operating System Windows 2000 Communication Port COM 1 Q C100 on a amp Cameras Communication Loop Current Loop oe Mosen Loop Name Loop 1 Panel Address 1 Panel Type
174. ature can also be inserted on the card if the badge layout provides a signature placeholder Signatures can be added to the card holder information either by capturing them with an electronic writing pad or by importing digital files created in other programs for example by scanning the card holder s signature and storing it as an Enhanced Metafile emf or signature sig Each signature has a Signature Index number By default signature 1 is displayed To view other signatures change the Signature Index number on the Card Biometrics tab Capturing Card Holder Signatures Signatures can be added to a card holder s information when the card holder is initially added to the database or can be added later 1 Open the Card Holder database window from the WIN PAK 2 0 Card menu and select the desired card holder 2 Click Edit Open the Card Biometrics tab of the Card Holder Record If a new card holder is being added you must first enter the card holder s name b Q L oJ Q 0 ui 432 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 In the Signature area of the window click Capture The Enter Signature window opens showing the input from your digital writing ae Enter Signature 4 Have the card holder sign their name on the writing pad 5 Select thin bold or thick for the width of the signa ture line 6 Click OK to close the capture window and display the signature on the Card Biometrics tab 7 Click OK
175. ay that can send information between them Operating Humidity The relative humidity range in which a device can operate Operating Temperature The temperature range in which a device can operate Operator A person who operates the system directly through the software a user O perator privileges are determined by operator level or individually Operator Level The granting or denying of a privilege to control view or edit an aspect of the access system to a system user or operator Output Control Group A configuration of output points that are grouped in such a way that all can be activated when the status of a single input point changes This is commonly used in elevator applications Output This can refer to a location on a controller at which an output device such as a lock is connected or a point on the controller which software controls to produce a transaction Override Reverses a condition When a locked door is overridden it is unlocked and the reader shows a valid access Glossary 563 P Panel An access control panel Typically an N 1000 II or N 1000 III IV Panel Primary Power Alarm An alarm reported when a control panel loses primary power Panel Reset Alarm An alarm triggered when a control panel is reset Parallel Port A plug on a computer that is normally hooked up to a printer Parameter Specific information often a number that controls the behavior of the system Passive
176. be the floor plan of the building or area where the hardware is located It can also be a loop wiring diagram a simple grid or a picture of the area where the hardware is located Background files must be supplied as Windows metafiles wmf The ADVs can be associated with any hardware device including communication interfaces panels alarm points entrances and CCTV equipment The ADVs signal events by changing color and blinking Right clicking an ADV opens a control menu for the device Data Trees WIN PAK 2 0 uses a graphical tree to organize and display some of its database information The tree allows information to be organized into logical or geographical groups Each tree is created as you program your access control system therefore it is tailored to meet the needs of your access control system Except for the device tree the tree defines the hierarchy of resources not the resources themselves For example an Access Level is defined as a list of readers But rather than being displayed in a standard list the readers are mapped on a data tree The highest level branch can be defined as an entire office complex Branching off from the office complex is the President s suite the Accounting Department the Production Area and the Distribution Center The appropriate entrances are then added to each branch The entrances that are included in a given access level are shown in green A quick look at the tree gives a clear pic
177. box by selecting it and dragging one of the sizing handles until it is the desired size Badging 391 Formatting a Signature Placeholder 1 Right click inside the signature box and select Properties Select the Signature tab of the Badge Signature Object Properties window Badge Element Layout x Signature Colors Positioning Signature Index 4 Cancel 2 Set the Signature Index if necessary The Signature Index indicates which card holder signature appears on the badge The default is Signature 1 3 Click OK to save the settings and return to the Badge Definition window Changing the Background Color ofa Signature Placeholder The background color for Signature placeholders defaults to gray 1 To change the background color right click inside the signature placeholder and select Properties Select the Colors tab of the Badge Signature Object Properties window 2 Click the Background Color browse button to open the Color window WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Select a color swatch for the signature placeholder background color or create and select a custom color 4 Click OK to retum to the Badge Signature O bject Properties window 5 Click OK to save the color settings and return to the Badge Definition window NOTE The thickness of the signature line is set when the signature is captured in the card holder s biometrics tab Positioning a Signature Placeholder Signatures are auto
178. by Left Entrance Reader O E East Lobby Left Exit Reader g o East Lobby Right Entrance Reader O E East Lobby Right Exit Reader E Executive Floor Entrance Reader O E Executive Floor Exit Reader O E Executive Floor HR Entrance Reader hal 3 Expand the tree by clicking the plus signs 4 Select the branch or individual devices you want to monitor To view events from a particular branch right click on it and choose Select to include all devices in this area NOTE To view events from a particular device right click on it and choose Invert Selection Status Now only messages from the selected devices are sent to the Event View You can choose as many or as few devices as you wish Linking Event View with a Floor Plan While Event View filter selections cannot be saved on the main Event View window you can create an Event View link with the filter selections you need on a floor plan definition With a floor plan definition open create an Event View link with the filter selections you want Refer to the Floor Plans section of the chapter 4 for details on adding an Event View link to a floor plan User Overview 115 When you open an Event View window from the floor plan link the filter properties you selected are applied These filter settings cannot be changed from the Event View window only from the floor plan definition Alarm View E Alarm View provides a monitoring t
179. caeeeseeeteeeteesaseneseieseaeeeaes 215 Contents 11 COMMUNICATION LOOPS insine aaa ete teeter eee eeeee teeta a aia ii 217 Adding C100 Panel LOOP punimi naa a i ele i Ei 218 Adding 485 PCI Multiple Dropline Panel LOOPS sser 221 Adding a CCTV Switcher s icicu sages Weel eddie Od aii 225 Adding an RS 232 Connection ccceccceccceeeee eee eeetieeeeeceeaeeieeeeeeetaee 229 Editing PaneliLoops iiteuats eh hie ne ache Ge a Bh a ae en 231 Modem P00ISic cin ek wilh eid dana O ne ees Arend 231 C 100 amp 485 with HUB non ACK NAK Modem Pools cecceseeeesteeeeees 233 485 with HUB ACK NAK Modem Pool Configuration 00 238 Panels neiere see Mena eter cae a honda A A ade ait ee det AE Dia ons 245 Panel Configuration Wizard 0 e eects eect ete eie ene eeteeaetneeeeniesieetenaee 245 Adding Panels apain Teata theta a nade tee el eh ade 246 Interlocking Inputand OUtpUEPOINES oo cece etee terete te tee etter tee eaee 279 initializing Panels signin Sain eee tana en aa ee AA 280 Defining Access Tracking amp Control Are aS oo eceeteeeeee eter ete tene tee eetteeieeteeeaee 285 ACCESS ATERS anga ira E A a EKE EAD E 285 Defining Access Areas sussssessisstssistiettttts tintant nnt AAA ANEANEASEEAEEAEEN EANNAN EEEE EEEn 285 Adding Entrances to an Access Area sessseieeerereiiesrririerriernin nrn 287 Tracking and Mustering AreaS sssssissrsisirisristittiististittittsttntistnt tetinin tiennent 289 Nesting Area S fie trite are i
180. card number being used in a system Glossary 557 Fail Safe Lock A lock that is in the unlatched or unlocked state when the unit is not energized Fail Secure Lock Also known as N on Fail Safe A lock that is in the latched or locked state when the unit is not energized Firmware The computer chip PROM or EPROM that runs a control panel Firmware chips are identified by a version number Floor Plan A view made up of ADVs placed on a floor plan background showing the layout of an access control system used to monitor and control devices in the system Floor Plan Background A floor plan graph or other digital graphic saved as a Windows Metafile wmf that can be used to create a floor plan view Follow In an interlock a second point component B takes on the same state as the triggering point component A See Invert Follow Forgiveness This feature adjusts the use of anti passback to accommodate people who did not properly exit the anti passback area When forgiveness is enabled a person who did not use the proper exit reader will be allowed to use the enter reader the following day without an anti passback violation occurring This may not provide the desired effect in a third shift situation Example A card holder who enters a controlled area but does not leave until the next day would cause the system to go into alarm the next day because the card was not used to check in before checking out Format
181. cated below Bont CHHFHHT T CHP DT CHP EMA CAHP imi i In the example above C39HrP24D hTt represents Code 39 with Human Readable text at a Point size of 24 with Density set to High and font type which is True Type To create the best quality barcode the font style must be set to normal or regular and the size must match the font point size for the example above 24 with color black Deleting a Barcode To delete a barcode right click the barcode placeholder and select Delete Object from the subsequent menu The barcode is removed from the badge Badging 387 Badge Objects Shapes NOTE The Badge Layout Utility allows you to place shapes rectangles rounded rectangles ellipses and lines on your badge You can change the border or line width the border and background colors or make them transparent to frame photos or text blocks Adding Shapes to a Badge Layout 1 Click the Place Shape M button on the Badge Definition window toolbar 2 Click in the badge layout area and drag the shape box until it is the desired size The default shape is a rectangle Once the shape box has been placed and sized the type of shape can be changed Move the shape box by selecting it and dragging it to the desired position Resize the shape box by select ing it and dragging one of the sizing handles until it is the desired size 3 Right click the shape box and select Properties Open the Shape tab on t
182. ce name from the ADV list 3 Select Custom Command from the Command list 4 Type the command in the Custom Command field in the Parameters area of the window 5 Click OK NOTE Refer to the Abstract Devices and Floor Plans sections of this chapter to learn more about working with command files 332 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Editing Command Files Command Files are quite easy to edit 1 Select the Command File you want to edit from the main Command File database window 2 Click Edit to open the Command File Record Change the Command File Name or Description by typing over the existing entries with new entries Delete a command by selecting it in the list and clicking the Delete button Use the Move Command arrows to rearrange the order in which the commands are sent The com mands at the top of the list are sent first 3 When you have completed editing this Command File click OK Deleting Command Files 1 Select the Command File to be deleted from the Command File window 2 Click the Delete button NOTE If the Command File is not in use it is removed from the database If the Command File is referenced by an ADV Action Group or a panel you receive a message indicating that it is in use Use the Isolate function to remove the Command File from all Action Groups and panels where it is in use Programming 333 Digital Video Configuration 1 From the Configuration menu select Device gt D
183. cece eee eeeeteeeeteeaee 371 Badge Objects Text and Text BOXES eeeecceceeeeeeteeee ects eeteeeteetieetieseeeeceeaetaee 372 Creating a Text BOX ON a Badge 00 eee eeecececeeeeeettetteeteeettee irienner 372 Adding and Editing Text 0 ccc ccc ee ete eens eete cere tesiestieteetcenaenaee 372 Changing Fonts and SiZ S sriisisi iiias iaiia aiiai 374 Changing Text Color iis oct eiia tae setasaeetaareernis nik iietiaescamoned nbeha Mates 374 Changing Text Background COOP cece ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeteecieeeeetettaetieeeenaes 375 Positioning Text in a Text BOX cece eter eeeee tee eeetiesteeteeceetaetaee 376 Deleting a Text Block notani mae aai aie hinted tote andes 377 Badge Objects Photo Placeholders cece ene eesti eteteeeteeaetieee 377 Adding a Photo Placeholder to a Badge Layout 377 Formatting a Photo Placeholder 0 ccc cee eee eeieeee etter eeeaeteee 378 Creating a Ghosted Photo 0 ecceeceeeeeeeesecseene eter eeeeeeeeeaetaeseeetieetaeeeaes 379 Deleting a Photo Placeholder 00 ce eect eee steeteeeee niente 379 Badge Objects Barcode 0 e cece ne eee tenet ects niece etieetieeteeteenee 379 Adding a Barcode to a Badge Layout eect eeetteettetteeeeetaetaee 379 Adding or Editing Barcode Data eeeeeseseseeereerenesrensetirenrenrseeeeentens 380 Contents 13 Barcode Properties Definitions 0 e eects teeter eee teeter eneetetaee 381 Formatting a Barcode ac ine ined Walch di adie A E eh 382 BiarCOde OPlonss a
184. ciated reader s configuration Both windows can be resized by positioning the mouse pointer over the window borders When the pointer changes to double arrows click and drag the mouse to resize the window If the lookup screen is minimized and a card read is received the AutoCard Lookup window automatically pops up 122 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide If a picture is on file the lookup window displays the card holder picture including the card holder name card number time date reader name and the status of the card read If the Note Fields check box is selected certain note field information is also displayed Note fields are selected in the Configure AutoCard Lookup utility in the Configuration menu The lookup feature is filtered both by priority of card read event and by selecting readers on the control map Using the Control Area filter you can choose to monitor as many or as few devices as you wish The filter can be very useful for example if a particular guard station is monitoring the computer room An AutoCard Lookup view can be defined which receives events only from the computer room readers The Buffer check box on the AutoCard Lookup window freezes the current card on the lookup screen while saving any subsequent card reads in memory D eselecting the Buffer check box removes all stored information and continues with the next card presented Activating AutoC ard Lookup 1 Select AutoCard Lookup from the Operatio
185. ck Point Alarms section of this chapter for details On a specific tour the checkpoints or readers can not be shared on both the sequenced and unsequenced tab They may be defined multiple times on one tour type but not both on the same tour When you have finished adding all the Unsequenced Check Points click the Apply button to save the information and continue working in the Guard Tour Record Click OK to save the information and exit the Guard Tour Record Programming 321 Sequenced Check Points Sequenced check points should be assigned a time allowing the guard to get from one point to the next Tolerances for early and late arrival can also be assigned 1 Click the Sequenced Check Point tab Follow the procedures outlined for adding Unsequenced Check Points to add Sequenced Check Points to the list Guat Teun Recoid Name Sequenced Check Por Unisquanced Check Poni S idee mv m Ja m amp Selected Check Paria ajej al 2 Duti Glare at Local Shores oni 1 Kula oon hoo ii 3 Ques at Bent Cossi Otto WA OT nooo moo 5 4 Esa Cosa fice Targa ma OO mon moo Ce 5 Guaidtow check paint Eri Wis Oo noo moo E Guid sou check pant wie W oam man moo 7 Loca Skaageon li Shest Tanpe KA Oo ooo moo E Hoth Gaie Paiingenkance Tong KA OOO noo ooo oe ce a e 2 Click the Time column and enter the time in the format hh mm This is the amount of time allowed between check points 3 Click t
186. cluding adding editing copying deleting and isolating Time Zones These functions are described on the following pages 172 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE The Print Report button opens the report filter dialog from which a Time Zone Report can be generated exported viewed or printed Refer to the User Interface section of chapter 3 of this manual for details on working with database window ele ments Adding Time Zones 1 Click the Add button on the Time Zone database window The detail window becomes active allow ing you to define a new Time Zone 2 Enter a Time Zone name and brief Description 3 Using your mouse drag the time line to encompass the hours making up the Time Zone The Snap Time option allows you to set the time to snap to increments of 60 30 15 or 0 minutes Selecting 0 minutes allows the time to be set to the minute Programming 173 NOTE A Mouse Time box is located below the Military Time check box The time displayed is either the range that the mouse is on or the time that the mouse is pointing to when not on a time line An alternate method of defining Start Time and End Time or deleting a time line can be displayed by selecting a time line and right clicking the mouse Time set in this manner must be in Military time format 4 Once arange of time is entered for Monday it can copied to the other weekdays by clicking the Copy Monday to Weekdays button Otherwi
187. cted to control panels Server The host computer This is the computer which maintains the system or system functions Shunt The automated or manual means through software to ignore an input or an input alarm Shunt Points The act of suppressing the ability of input points from reporting an alarm Shunt Time The length of time a door open alarm is suppressed shunted after a valid card access or free exit request This time should be just enough to allow a card user to open a door or gate pass through and then close it Signal Strength Indicates the size or quality of an electrical signal The signal strength decreases as the length of its path in the medium increases The media type generally cable and length are selected so that a signal can travel from the transmitter to the receiver and still be interpreted If the signal is transmitted via a radio signal the choice of antenna type and location will affect the signal strength Specifications Rules and measures governing what a device does and how it can be used Split Time Zones An option that allows you to apply different time zones to readers on a single panel 566 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Stand alone System A single independently working computer or EAC controller that is not networked with other computers State A device s current mode A change of state means that the mode of a device has changed Status The current state or condition of a sys
188. cters NOTE The default name of the copy is the same as the original with the prefix Copy of The default description is the same as the original 4 If desired enter a new Description for the O perator Level up to 60 characters in length 5 Click OK to save the new O perator Level and return to the main O perator Level database window 88 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Editing Operator Levels Editing O perator Levels is as simple as configuring them To edit the name or description of an O perator Level select it from the O perator Level database list and click the Edit button The Operator Level dialog used for the name and description is displayed Enter the new name and or description and click OK when finished To edit the access level of an Operator Level select it from the O perator Level database window and make changes to either a main or sub branch of the O perator Level Tree in the right pane Refer to Adding an Operator Level for details Isolating and Deleting an Operator Level Deleting an O perator Level not in use is just a matter of selecting it from the O perator Level database list and clicking the D elete button A deletion prompt is displayed WIN PAK 2 A Delete operator level Guard Service Click Yes to remove the O perator Level from the system User Overview 89 Isolating an Operator Level An Operator Level cannot be deleted if it is used by one or
189. d dragging one of the sizing handles until it is the desired size You can use one of the comer sizing handles to change the height and width of the box at the same time 3 Right click in the graphic box and select Properties from the subsequent menu The Badge Bitmap Object Properties window is displayed Badge Element Layout X Bitmap Colors Positioning J Stretch Width I Stretch Height I Keep Aspect Ratio Import Cancel Apply Help 4 Click the Bitmap Image field down arrow and select an image from the list 5 Select the Stretch Width and Stretch H eight check boxes to make the image cover the entire badge To fill as much of the graphic box as possible without distorting the image select Keep Aspect Ratio 394 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 6 Click Apply to view the changes or click OK to apply the image to your badge and exit the Badge Object Properties dialog NOTE Images can be added to the Bitmap Image list by importing existing graphic files or by capturing live images using your computer equipped with a video camera and capture board Importing Graphics for the Badge Layout 1 Right click inside the graphics box and select Prop erties O pen the Badge tab of the Badge Bitmap Object Properties window Click the Import button The familiar O pen dialog is displayed allowing you to navigate to the folder containing the graphic file to be imported Select the file maki
190. d in the system and provides a recommended order for entering that information Of course the order can be adjusted to fit your particular needs The tasks and items summarized here are detailed in the following sections BuLLLUeIBOJd Programming Order Your setup order will vary depending on the type and complexity of your access control system All systems require planning before configuration can begin Review this chapter carefully then assemble all the necessary information before you begin To begin setup you must have information about the basic hardware and especially the communications servers adapters network addresses and modems What follows is a broad overview of the programming order for a simple access control system 1 Password Protect the Admin Operator The Admin O perator is used to set up the system and the security of the system should be protected by giving the Admin O perator a password 152 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide WARNING See Passwords section further ahead in this chapter for instructions on password protecting your Admin password Failure to change the manufacturer s default password greatly compromises the security of your system It is also recommended to delete change the Admin Operator name 2 Define Time Zones and Holiday Groups Time Zones are named defined time periods used to determine when actions will happen Actions like card access can be allowed or res
191. d into three applications D atabase Server Communications Server and User Interface These applications can run on the same computer or on multiple computers allowing great flexibility in configuring a networked system WIN PAK 2 0 is a three tier client server application based on Microsoft tools and standards It is ODBC O pen D atabase Connectivity compliant thus providing areliable flexible and robust system WIN PAK 2 0 is designed to meet the needs and viewpoint of the installer as well as the end user The Device Map displays the access control system from the viewpoint of equipment and connections The Access Map and Control Map along with the Floor Plan view allow the user to define and use the system from the viewpoint of the facility 18 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Contact Us Corporate Headquarters Address Northern Computers Inc 135 West Forest Hill Ave Oak Creek WI 53154 USA Telephone 414 766 1700 Fax 414 766 1798 Internet www nciaccessworld com Office hours Monday Friday 8 00 am 5 00 p m CST Technical Support For end user technical support contact your Northern Computers dealer Many technical documents are available from our website at wwwanciaccessworld com Welcome 19 About This Guide The WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide has been organized into the following chapters Chapter 1 Introduction The introduction explains key software concepts and many of the features of WIN PAK
192. d or the loop s data bandwidth can be increased if the test interval is lengthened The test signal is a relatively short signal and using the default value of 60 seconds is an optimum setting If the test signal is not received within the defined time interval a Loop Trouble alarm is gener ated WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Panel CMD Retry Count defaults to 3 seconds Sets the number of times a command will be resent if the panel does not respond to the command Panel CMD Time Out defaults to 5 seconds Sets the amount of time allowed for sending a command before timing out 7 Click Next to advance to the Loop Configuration Port Settings window Loop Configuration Port Settings 8 Select the Port to which the loop is connected NOTE Select the TCP IP port only for N 485 PCI with ACK NAK enabled It is not recommended to use TCP IP for other devices that do not use an ACK NAK protocol 9 Enter the Bits per Second communication rate for the loop The default for a C 100 is 1200 which allows maximum cable runs in the C 100 loop Baud rates up to 4800 can be used on shorter communica tion loops The Data Bits Parity and Stop Bits fields default based on the loop and port Programming 221 IPE Loop GConligeraton Aase Iriomaien E Hanes Paral Coed ule Hsin Drop Lins 10 Poll Intervel Descriptor Pane CMD Asty Cound AGAMA gt fw Buiter a peb con exit T Unbulfer all paral
193. dem pool Modems can be used to communicate with e C 100 loops 485 with a HUB non ACK NAK loops e 485 with a HUB ACK NAK loops 232 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide B Video Switcher RS 232 Connection Guard Tour Server z For each type of panel configuration the options available are the same as for local panel loops For an explanation of the options refer to the proceeding sections Modem pools like other communication connections are first installed on the operating system Windows 2000 NT and then defined by adding them to the Device Map You must have a communication server with an available communication port for each modem you are adding Once the pool is defined the panel loops are added to the modem pool rather than directly to the communication server as is the case with local loops Modem pools are added from the D evice Map With the Device Map open right click the Communication Server to which the modem pool is to be added Select a modem pool option from the pick list olx E Command File Server n EMD eoc Panel Loop 485 PC1 Configure CCTV Switcher Q Isolate Modem Pool C 100 and 485 with HUB non ACK NAK Delete Modem Pool 485 with HUB ACK NAK Programming 233 C 100 amp 485 with HUB non ACK NAK Modem Pools Select Modem Pool C 100 and 485 with HUB non ACK NAK from the Add menu pick list available by right clicking the Communication Server to which the mo
194. dem pool is being added The Modem Pool Configuration window is displayed Baien Fod Centrar n ACK FAAR Blane Intoarastion alr Haare mee rer Prd Hm ALEMA Ea Desorption FEO and 4S ron ack nak rodam pod w Dise ne BuLLLUeIBOJd 1 Enter a unique Name for the Modem Pool using up to 30 characters This is a required field 2 If desired enter a Description of the Modem Pool using up to 60 alphanumeric characters 3 Click Add in the Modems in Pool area of the window to open the Modem Configuration dialog Pai art Gavi io Picak D eek repotrvs ima 234 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 4 Enter the Name of the modem being added to the Modem Pool The name Modem defaults into the field 5 Enter the modem s Local Phone N umber the modem connected to communication server s port Include the area code and dialing prefix if they are required to dial in from the remote site 6 Use the Port on Server list to select the port to which the modem is connected 7 Click OK Repeat this procedure for each modem in the pool 8 Create an ADV for the Modem Pool Click Add in the ADV area of the configuration window 9 On returning to the Modem Pool Configuration window after setting up the ADV click Next then click Finish on the final configuration window Setting Up a C 100 or 485 Loop on a Modem Pool E Device Iof x Add New C 100 Loop Add New 485 Loop Q Parking Q Parkin
195. der 411 Defining Access Tracking amp Control Areas 285 308 Access Areas 285 289 Control Areas 298 303 Tracking and Mustering Areas 289 297 Detail Database Record Windows 78 Detail View 78 Device Maintenance 186 Device Map 185 217 Abstract Device Database 192 193 Abstract Devices 187 Action Groups 194 197 ADV Action Groups 197 202 Communication Loops 217 230 Device Maintenance 186 Editing Panel Loops 231 Modem Pools 231 244 Panels 245 284 Physical Devices and Abstract Devices 185 Servers 203 216 Setting Up ADVs 189 191 Using the Device Map 186 Device Map Report Generating a Server Device Report 505 Reporting on CCTV Switcher Devices 508 Reporting on Communication Loops 506 Reporting on Modem Pools 509 Reporting on Panel Loops 506 Reporting on RapidEye Devices 510 Digit placeholder 411 Digital Camera Controls 146 Digital Video camera controls 146 configuring 215 operation 144 Drop down list 412 Duress 262 E Editing Panel Loops 231 Encode Mag Stripe 399 Event View 112 115 Exporting Reports 482 F Fax Registration 64 First Log In 54 Floor Plan Background 29 Initializing Panels 282 Floor Plan View 128 133 ADV Control Functions 131 Overview 30 Floor Plans 304 315 Adding 306 335 Adding ADVs Links and Text Objects to a Floor Pla 309 335 Arranging Objects 315 Definition 305 Deleting Objects 315 Editing 315 Opening Background 307 Foreign Language Insta
196. djust Zoom Iris or Focus click the corresponding control button then in the subsequent adjustment window click on the indented circle between the arrows and drag the circle to adjust Recorded View Controls LoL MUTE UUU amp 8 PIRNI wnlR ao s35 8355053 5 g Ea Sgezesz2938 e g TR M aw m Aw 2 When Pause is activated it s button will be graphically grayed out Slide the Rate control to adjust the video play back speed Slide the Adjust control to adjust the time of the recorded video up to an hour before or after the current time being viewed User Overview 147 Right Click Menu Options v Show Title v Show Controls Auto Focus Auto Iris Pan Tilt speed Network speed Set Preset Goto Preset es ee Close Right clicking on the live video display will open a menu of additional control options Show Title Checked by default the title bar is shown above the live display with the ADV name and status icon If unchecked the title bar is removed Show Controls Checked by default the camera controls are available below the live display If unchecked the controls are removed Auto Focus Camera automatically focuses on subject provided camera is auto focus camera Auto Iris Camera automatically adjust for brightness provided camera has automatic iris control Pan Tilt speed Controls speed at which the camera pans and tilts Three speed options are available Slow
197. dow 2 Click the Background Color browse button to open the Color window Select a color swatch for the barcode background or create and select a custom color NOTE Do not select black for the background color as the barcode will be printed in black making it unreadable 3 Click OK to return to the Colors tab The new barcode color is displayed in the Background Color field 4 Click Apply to view the color on the badge 5 Click OK to save the changes and return to the Badge Definition window Positioning a Barcode Barcodes are automatically positioned within the barcode box Select the Positioning tab on the Badge Barcode O bject Properties window to adjust the position of the box relative to the top and left side of the badge by entering a value in millimeters in the Top and Left fields respectively Refer to the Positioning Badge Elements section of this chapter for details NOTE Test the bar code in the bar code reader for proper position ing and operation before creating a large run 386 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Certain barcode readers using high density code 39 may require the barcode to be created using a text box and one of the several true type barcode fonts that were added when WIN PAK 2 0 was installed This application also allows the barcode to be rotated as any other text box Refer to Creating a Text Box on a Badge and Adding and Editing Text Once created edit the font as indi
198. dow displays the name time and date of WIN PAK 2 0 System software activity This includes a record of successful and unsuccessful server connections logins and server disconnections If there is a problem communicating with a server the information in the System Event view can help locate the source of the problem 112 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Viewing System Events Select System Events from the WIN PAK 2 0 Operations menu The System Event window is displayed Tikei aed miisi CTE Command Fie Server Corera Fike Seer fr Wed PIES PM Busd Tir Gused Tou Sewer frij r e Paka Pa Scheduler Serer Schedule Serve 124 Connection Darpa Pago Pe Conmunadon Server Communication gerer ttl Conadi Surpas T1951 PM Aichin Ditis rigas PM achite Ditas Tita PH Daisies Sere Logger Succenahal Ta Pe hisia Seren Connection baos Tiz J PM Cieni Servicer Sha aasi NOTE If desired the System Event window can remain open and minimized during normal operations System Events should not be confused with the Events view also accessed from the Operations menu which displays access control activity including card reads alarms and operator activity such as the acknowledging and clearing of alarms Event View Fal Event View displays a real time record of access system events including card reads alarms logins and logouts The Event View window has an event capacity as defined in the alarm handling section
199. e ments can be removed from selected card numbers by not entering in the PIN NOTE 9 Use the Custom Access Level option to set a custom usually limited access level for the card Refer to the Defining Access Levels section of this chapter for details 10 Action groups can be used to set specific actions to 11 occur when a card is read in different states for example when its status is Lost Stolen or Trace rather than Active Refer to Action Groups section of the Device Map section of chapter 4 for more information Use the Activation Date and Expiration Date options to set an activation or expiration date for the card For example if you want the card to be valid for a limited time click Change in the Expiration Date area of the window and select the desired expiration date from the calendar The Activate and Deactivate Cards schedule must be set to implement the changes Refer to the Scheduler section of the Time Management section of chapter 4 Card Holders 451 Badge 12 Associate a badge layout with the card by opening the Badge tab of the Card Record If you are not using photo ID badges skip the following steps Cod Properties Badge Fond Side Back Side feedecces epee Fissare rehat te My Company Ins 5007 South Street Anytown Anystabe 12345 an ANNA Foster She Aiea inter r ae Baal ere e NOTE Card holder biometrics are not di
200. e defined it If the image is a different shape than the space it will be distorted If you also select Keep Aspect Ratio the graphic will be as large as possible without distortion For example if you place a square photo placeholder in the badge design then place a tall rectangular photo in the placeholder with the Keep Aspect Ratio option selected the photo will be as tall as the placeholder but will leave a margin on the sides through which the placeholder background color will show To keep the margin from showing through select the placeholder then open the Colors tab and select Transparent Background Options on the Badge Tab Include Background Image Select a graphic file from this list to use as a background Stretch Width Stretches the graphic to fill the defined horizontal space Stretch H eight Stretches the graphic to fill the defined vertical space Keep Aspect Ratio Maintains the image proportions Tile Image Repeats the image to fill the defined space Import Click this button to select graphic images to be imported into the WIN PAK 2 0 database and added to the list for background images Capture Use this button to open the Capture Graphic window for capturing video images 354 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Applying a Bitmap Image to a Badge Background Applying an image to a badge is essentially the same as applying wallpaper to your PC desktop 1 Right click on the badge in the Badge D efin
201. e Up and Move D own buttons To remove a data item from the list select it and click the Delete button When you have completed the data item list click OK to save your changes Formatting a Barcode 1 Right click inside the barcode box on the badge layout and select Properties Select the Barcode tab of the Badge Barcode Object Properties window Hadge Clement Layout 2 Select the desired options See Barcode O ptions section 3 Click Apply to view changes or click OK to save any changes and return to the Badge Definition window Badging 383 Barcode Options Text Text to be displayed above the barcode Style Style setting for the barcode characters Choices include 2of 5 e 2 of 5 interleaved 3o0f9 e Codabar e Code 11 e Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 e Code 128 A Code128B Code 128 C e Code B EAN 8 EAN 13 EAN 128 ITF e MSI Telepen UPCA UPCE Ratios Determines the width ratio of thick bars to thin bars For example a ratio of 2 00 means that thick bars are twice the width of thin bars Spacer Adds space before and after the barcode when show data is enabled Bearer Thickness Thickness in points of the bearer bars Font Adj Adjusts the font size in relation to the bar code Show Text Displays the barcode data as text beneath the encoded information W Bearer Displays the width bearer bars top and bottom borders 384 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide H Bearer
202. e appears Select Yes I want to restart my computer now and then click Finish The install program will automatically restart your computer Connecting Networked WIN PAK 2 0 Modules The WIN PAK 2 0 System Manager allows the WIN PAK 2 0 modules to locate one another by tracking their machine names and RPC Endpoints After a Full install has been performed on the WIN PAK file server confirm that the servers and user interface are properly operating on this system Complete a User Interface installation on a second workstation Enter the necessary information in the System Manager so that the new User Interface can communicate with the Database Server From the WIN PAK Server 1 After installation of WIN PAK 2 0 on the server machine run the System Manager 2 Select the Database Server tab 3 Write down the RPC endpoint This is the same as a TCP IP port address It should be 5555 Do not change this number unless you have another service using TCP IP port address 5555 4 Select the Database Archive Server tab 5 Write down the RPC endpoint This is the same thing as a TCP IP port address It should be 5556 Do not change this number unless you have another service using TCP IP port address 5556 6 Close the System Manager Installation 57 NOTE 7 Get the computer name Click the Windows Start button point to Settings and then click Control Panel D ouble click the N etwork icon and then click the Identifica
203. e both the Brightness and Contrast settings to be lower than the Video settings This prevents the camera from overexposing the picture The exact settings must be determined by experimentation as they vary depending on the type of flash used distance from the subject and other lighting employed Brightness Lightens or darkens the entire tonal range of the image being captured Contrast Expands or contracts the entire tonal range of the image being captured Photo Settings These settings are applied to the video image after it is captured Brightness Lightens or darkens the entire tone range of the captured image Compression The captured image is saved as a jpg file which uses compression technology to decrease the size of the file If desired use the slider to adjust the compression of the saved image The lower the number the greater the compression Keep in mind that images lose quality as they are compressed so avoid over compressing A setting of 100 applies the least amount of compression and provides the best image quality A setting of 30 applies the most compression but produces a lower quality image Card Holders 431 Card Holder Signatures NOTE Card holder signatures can be included in the card holder database information Up to 99 signatures can be recorded for each card holder If a signature is included in a card holder s record it appears on the Card Biometrics tab The card holder s sign
204. e filled in Encryption Password If TCP IP Encrypted Connection is selected as the Port the Encryption Password field must be filled in with the exact case sensitive password used when the LAN hardware was installed 8 Set up an ADV for the RS 232 Port Click the Add button in the ADV area of the window upper right corner 9 On returning to the Basic Information window after setting up the ADV click Next Click Finish on the subsequent window to complete the connection setup Programming 231 Editing Panel Loops To edit a panel loop right click on the loop from the Device Map and select Configure from the task menu The Loop Configuration window is displayed below NOTE This illustration shows the Loop Configuration window for a 485 PCI loop Lang Condi at ean i 32 Basic lndomation Fori Settings bD Haa Paral Daia Man Drop Lire VO Fol inisial Ed Denoipbon E m bec pnk Panel C0 Aap Count m ACKJMAR E Deena fs 5 T Buiu afl parle on et l Urta sips on atop Tra Zone GHuLLLUeIBOJd GM TOG 00 Ceis Tire US amp Corned ae ee L Use the tabs at the top of the window to access any configuration information you wish to change Modem Pools Modem connections can be used to communicate with panel loops at remote sites by first defining the modem pool which can have one or more modems and then defining communication loops to place in the mo
205. e g Name Indicate whether the category should be sorted in Ascending or Descending order Report Command File fe 2 4 Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report 5 Click Close to exit the Command File report window and return to the main Reports database Reports 503 Control Area Report Select the Control Area report from the Reports database window No filter or sort options are available on the Control Area report window Filter Run from Archive Database La Print Preview Print Export File Estim Pages Clear All Close Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report Click Close to exit the Control Area report window and return to the main Reports database 504 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Device Map Report Select the Device Map report from the Reports database window The report window opens with the Filter Device tab displayed Click the down arrow to the right of the Device field and select a device on which to filter the report A corresponding tab with additional filter options is added to the window See the following sections Use the Print ADV Name check box if you want
206. e of electronic access control credential in which one credential read causes a lock to unlock and a second read locks the lock The lock changes state only after a credential is read LED Light Emitting Diode a small lamp Local Relay The communication occurring between an input device and an output on a control panel Log In Signing in to the system When system operators change shift the new operator logs in Log Out Signing out of the system When system operators change shift the operator leaving the shift logs out Loop A communications network wherein the communications cable begins and ends at the same point with control panels linked at increments along the loop Low Voltage When a battery is too low the N 1000 III and IV panels can be configured to report a low voltage alarm Glossary 561 M Memory In a control panel this refers to the amount of information that can be handled or stored provided by RAM Random Access Memory chips Message Information displayed on the Alarm D etail screen in response to the activity state changes of an input MIP See Multiple Interlock Protedion Modem A device that translates digital signals to analog signals and the reverse allowing a computer to send information over a standard phone line Multi drop Line A cabling configuration used for 485 communication networks wherein control panels are connected to a length of cable by t taps Multiple Inte
207. e servers Communication Command File Scheduler Track ing and Muster and each must have a unique protocol end point which can be any number from 1024 through 9999 Select a number that is not used by another device on the network and enter it into this field The default should work fine Change this only if duplicate protocol points exist 7 Create an ADV for the Guard Tour Server by clicking the Add button in the ADV area of the window upper right corner 8 When you have completed the ADV click OK to return to the Guard Tour Server Configuration window 9 Click Next Then click Finish to add the server to your D evice Map When a server is added to the Device Map you must logout and then login again before the changes take effect Programming 213 Tracking and Muster Server In order to use the Tracking and Muster functions a Tracking and Muster Server must be configured on the Device Map Normally it is located on the same machine as the Database Server Configuring a Tracking and Muster Server 1 From the Configuration menu select Device gt Device Map The Device window will open 2iolx GHuLLLUeIBOId 2 In the Device window above right click on the Devices folder and select Add gt Tracking amp Muster Server The Tracking amp Mustering Server Configuration window will be displayed Tidching od Mictlecing Server Conliquiation Track ing ard Muster Protacol er
208. e those provided by software prior to customization by the user Default Time Zone A standard time zone that is always in effect unless overridden by another process or feature Dial Up Also dial in dial out A system of control panels connected to a communications line loop or multi drop that is not directly connected to a computer To communicate with the panels the computer must use a modem at its end to connect with a modem on the communications line The act of establishing a connection is called dialing as in dialing a telephone number Disable To render a function or feature unavailable Distributed Processing The ability of control panels connected to a single communications loop or multi drop line to function independently from one another yet communicate to and receive information from a central computer Distributed System A computer network wherein each device a PC or control panel can work independently of one another yet at the same time communicate with one another Documentation Any written record of activities and processes Door Contact This is a position locator that senses when a door is fully closed or open Duplex Printing Printing on two sides of a single material such as two sides of an access card Duress Alarm A special alarm from a keypad reader which indicates that the card holder is being forced to provide entry to a secured area 556 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Dures
209. each year In the course of defining Holiday Groups you can indicate if a holiday occurs on the same date every year Holiday Groups and Panels Once a holiday group has been defined it is associated with a panel to allow for a change in access on holidays If you have Time Zones in a panel that have holidays defined you must have a Holiday G roup assigned to that panel For example doors that are normally open between 8 a m and 5 p m Monday through Friday excluding holidays could be locked during those same hours on holidays defined as January 1 July 4 and December 25 BuLLLUeIBOJd More than one Holiday Group can be defined with different groups being associated with different panels For example in a retail business some departments may close on holidays while others remain open In such a case define different Holiday G roups for each department and associate them with the appropriate panels Holiday Groups and Time Zones If a holiday time block is included in a Time Zone assigned to a card a person using that card is allowed access on a holiday If there is no holiday time block in the assigned Time Zone the person cannot gain access 180 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Defining Holiday Groups 1 Open the Holiday Group window by selecting Holiday Group from the Time Management option on the Configuration menu The main Holiday G roup window is displayed listing groups that have already been defined Holiday G
210. earch the list of Time Zones and view details or you can add edit or delete the Time Zones in the database Time Zones are maintained via the Time Management option on the Configuration menu Coniguaion Wied Help I Deke Device Time Zone Database Open the Time Zone Database by selecting Time Zone from the Time Management option on the Configuration menu Programming 171 The main Time Zone Database window is displayed and existing Time Zones are listed This list can be searched and sorted by name and or description R Time Zone lel x PY Name Description 12am 8am M F 12am 8am Monday Friday excl hol 4pm 12am M F 4pm 12am Monday Friday excl holi amp Bam pm x days Bam 7pm 7 days per week incl holid ay 8am 5pm M F 8am 5pm Monday Friday excl holid Always On This Timezone is always on all T Detail View r Search and Sort Operations Search Field oF All a Criteria Edit zl Copy Search For Delete Sort By Isolate Name 7 Print Report Du Lwuesiboid Select the Detail View check box to open a detailed view only record of the selected Time Zone Search and Sort fields on the Time Zone Database window allow you to search the database based on the Time Zone name and or description Use the action buttons on the right side of the database window to perform maintenance functions on the database in
211. ecognize an input when that input goes into alarm unless some other condition such as a shunt applies Alarm Type An alarm determined by its unique priority global shunt status forced note auto clear and RTN separate alarm characteristics and the message displayed when an alarm is reported Alphanumeric A combination of numeric alphabetical and in some cases symbols found on a keyboard or display Annunciation A device that indicates a condition This condition can be announced by a message on a computer monitor a flashing sign a bell or similar device and by a combination of these things Antipassback An access control feature that reduces the likelihood that two or more people can use the same access credential to gain admission to a controlled area This is done by requiring that the credential be presented upon entrance to an area and again when leaving the area If the same credential is used for two entrances without an exit in between an alarm is triggered and access is denied Arm Points Enable specific input points to report alarms when they occur Arm To enable Audit The act of checking something to make sure it is correct Example Checking wiring connections Glossary 553 AUX Port Alarm An alarm triggered when the panel senses a communication failure from the auxiliary port B Badge A card that provides information about the person who is using it usually a photo ID Badging T
212. ect to the archive server Reports 485 Generating and Printing Reports Reports are generated by first selecting the desired report from the Reports database A report specific detail window displays the filters and sort options available for the report After selecting the options you want you can preview the report or print it Access Area Report Select the Access Area report from the Reports database window No filter or sort options are available on the Report Access Area detail window Acces Anes a ae gaii ap Dias All E w Click the Print Preview button to view the Access Area Report prior to printing it Click Print to send the report to your printer Click Close to return to the main Reports database window WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Access Level Report 1 Select the Access Level report from the Reports database window Report Access Level E E 2 On the Report tab of the Report Access Level detail window select one of the following from the Access Level area of the window to define the report All reports on every access level One reports on an individual access level using the From field activated when the One radio button is selected Range reports on a designated range of access levels using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selected 3 On the Sort tab next illustration use the Sort Order list to select a category that d
213. ed from the Card database Card Holders Card holders are the people to whom cards are issued All card holder information is contained in the Card Holder database The minimum card holder information is first and last name However card holder records can also include a variety of optional information entered into user defined note fields up to 40 If a card holder has been assigned to a card that information is included in the card holder record as well Card holder information can be searched and sorted by first or last name card number or any of the 40 user configured notes fields When card holders are entered into the database they can be issued an existing card or entered without a card and issued one later or the Card D atabase can be accessed in order to issue a new card Card Holders 405 Card holder photos and signatures are also stored in the Card Holder database and can be viewed from the card holder record Card holder photos and signatures can be viewed captured or imported from the Card Biometrics tab of the card holder record Configuring Card Holder Elements WIN PAK 2 0 uses the term card holder to indicate an individual to whom a card or multiple cards is issued Information in the Card Holder database is entered in a series of up to 40 note fields which can be organized on any number of tabs These note fields make up the card holder record and can include anything from organ izational inf
214. ed in the Floor Plan Definition utility Each ADV is associated with an Action Group which defines the priority of a given event related to the device as well as any actions that should take place in response to an event When an Action Group is edited all ADVs associated with it are changed globally 188 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Abstract Device Definitions Abstract Devices ADVs are created through the Device Map Each device configuration window has an ADV section in the upper right corner Panel Coniyu abun Clicking Add to create or Edit to modify will open the Abstract Device record configuration window next illustration The Show box allows the ADV to be viewed The general format for all ADVs is the same However the available Actions vary depending on the type of device with which the ADV is associated Programming 189 Setting Up AD II XI im y to 3 Q Caran Cand was deniad aiy because i has dead beer used gong mma wath out popari goray Pae n ed e 1 Define the ADV Name The default name is based on the type of device being configured For example if a Communication Server is being added the server name is placed in this field The Name field holds up to 40 characters Alphanumeric and special characters as well as spaces can be used and can be changed 190 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide While not required it is recommended that a Description be e
215. ed pm E Hast of Hiis io Pire ora Harup et h ne J e j e i 214 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Enter a unique Name for the Tracking and Muster ing Server u sing up to 30 characters If desired enter a Description of the Tracking and Muster Server using up to 60 characters Enter the Machine N ame where the server is located This is usually the same machine as the Database Server It is generally not necessary to change the Protocol End Point However there are multiple servers Communication Command File Scheduler and each must have a unique protocol end point which can be any number from 1024 through 9999 Select a number that is not used by another device on the network and enter it into this field The default should work fine Change this only if duplicate protocol points exist Use the Hours of History to Prime on startup field to select how many hours of tracking history are processed and displayed when the Muster View is opened select from 0 to 99 hours The default setting is 8 hours Create an ADV for the server by clicking the Add button in the ADV area upper right corner When you have completed the ADV click OK to return to the Tracking and Muster Server Configu ration window 10 Click Next Then click Finish to add the server to your Device Map Programming 215 RapidEye Digital Video In order to use RapidEye digital video a RapidEye device must be configured on the Device Map
216. ee ete Re ee he eaten eth tts 42 Automatically Installed Microsoft Components ceeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeetetteeeteetaes 42 Foreign Language Installation 0 0 cece seeeteee eesti eeeeeeeteecieeceteneeees 44 WIN PAK 2 0 Installation 0 0 cece eect etree eee tie ete ecnee cee teeteseeeeeeseeceetaes 45 Installation Procedure nus iniaa dolce taut a a netic aetna dias 46 FIPS CLOG livizeist plead tt aatatrcoataeuaceis a dant dela onda TE Oa Gea ea 54 Installing User Interface ONLY oo ceecceceee cece eeeciesee senate sneesestietteetesneeeeeeaeeas 55 Connecting Networked WIN PAK 2 0 Modules cceccceeeeeeeeeteeteeeetneeteetaee 56 COMMUNICATION Server hasiye peaa aia ia ee E a a aa 58 Uninstalling WIN PAK 2 0 sssssssssissississrisistissrntissinsintrnttatratintantntinttat Ennan anene neeaae 60 Service Manager fics hiner aa i A a ele ano ae reat a 61 System MANAG SE aeei aa aeai aAA EAN AA EEA NANANA AENEA AA AAAA AISEA VEA EAE aaraa IRUN 62 LICENSING AN Registration isteti nera a a a a AA 63 Registering SoftWare 0 eect ee eee e erties testes cneetnee tee teeeaeeeeeneeeas 63 License PileSvciice tne Lint ini ae ie etAse tar al naa oe as 65 Norton Speed Disk Utility 0 ce etter eee etieeceeceeaesaeee 65 III User OV IVIEW sesiis in E Eai aE Ei E a EESE a 67 Operator Guide Overview 00 eee eit ee tenet tree steer neces cena teenie EEEE EEE 69 UserlntertacE strnina Manthey a ates Oe ae te a te A 69 The WIN PAK 2 0 WIN OW 0 eeeececece
217. eeeceteeseseieeseecenaees 448 Editing a Gard wivcne iain dali A ee Gan ee 452 Deleting a Card u 2 ccc eee ac eG Miele hanes Me ibd adele A aA 452 Bulk Card Add and Delete 0 cece eeeee ese eneeene seer seeeeeeeeesaeenaeseeeteeeeeeetaeeaae 453 Adding Cards in Bulk 0 eeeeeceeeeeee cee eie tiie eene ener certs te siesneenneeeceeaenaees 453 Bulk Card Deletes iriiria teense Ah A A die Malate 455 Associating Badges and Cards eceecccceceeiee eee ei ecieeneece tee eieeeieecenaetee 456 Assigning a Badge to a Card 00 eee eee cect cet eeee eee ete te ete teeeteeeteetaetee 457 Previewing and Printing Cards ce ecceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeeeseeetsesteseeeenesiaeees 459 Previewing a Badges tcsanmndee ahaa cai ae el aetna aie 459 PriNUNG d Gard actin Aol corte an race inde nena Mean Roeland A 460 Contents 15 Vi Translat Naini iapa aE E eave rea tae RE meek 461 Translating Text amp Selecting Languages sssssssseeseisrsrierssrinrrniernrrnrinrininennrnns 463 Creating a Text File for Translation esssesssiererieierrrieeeiri erenneren 464 Selecting a Language for Translation sssesssssessrisrsersrrsrisrsrisrinrieirinninnierinrenrns 466 Translating Dialogs Menus and Other Text eect sete cietieeteeeeieeaeee 467 Editing Dialog Text viaiacn inland nia ie Ai hal aiid ee 470 Restoring Dialog Text Defaults eee ceeeeeee ete eeeeeeeeeeee ce te tenes tetaeeeee 470 Changing Menu Texte rarisimo a E Marwati ed desert takes 471
218. eeee cee eneeeneecieeceeaeseeseeseeeaes 427 Capturing Additional Card Holder Photos seeren 429 VIG CO S CLINGS maiean acre week EA eee beat te eed 429 Grab SEWN S oraa vedo teri ulth e a an an e a e Ta 430 Photo Settings sernir iertnan iinta anager ale eaa A A S aA 430 Card Holder Signatures ssssssssssrsssssissrerensrntntintnnttnsistnntinnnttntintnntinsnntnntenn nnna 431 Capturing Card Holder Signatures ssssssssrsrierserssrrnrrseiersriirierienennrnnnen 431 Importing a Card Holder Signature ssssssssissrsssrisrsrrsrrsersnnrrsrinrnrinernennns 432 Importing Additional Card Holder Signatures c cece eee 434 Deleting a Card Holder Signature ssssssssisissrsrssrisrsrreriserstntrrsrnernrrnnrnennns 434 ACCESS bevel Sia yros nat ive Gait het hash ah a A 435 Access Level Database e ieee eine eei tere tierce teste snneeneeeceetenaee 435 Adding an ACCeSS Leyel penmi nininini a ea d aaia 437 Configuring an Access Level 0 eeeeeeceeseeeeceeeeteeeteteeetettaeteeecaesieesetaeeneetaes 439 Custom ACCESS Levels arieni nii rna a a a aa 441 Show Original Access Level sssssssiisisisisttittsti tt ttk iti EEE EnE ENE EEE EEEE Enine 444 Working with Cards insi ini enne iii nent die nettle E a Ae DAE EAA a AE AATA 445 Card Activation and Expiration with Scheduler sessssssesecrererrrrre 447 Adding Editing and Deleting Cards 0 0 cceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeetaees 447 Adding an Individual Card cceccceccccecceeeeeeeecceeieetiesn
219. efault is 5 seconds Enter the amount of time allowed between dialing attempts in the Delay before N ext Attempt field Any number between 1 and 999 can be entered in this field The default is 60 seconds Enter the remote Modem Initialization String The default is ATE QOV1I amp KG amp C1 amp D S 1 amp W The remote hub requires the following modem settings Refer to your modem documentation for further information e Auto answer enabled e All flow control disabled e Modem speed greater than or equal to the hub baud rate e Verbose commands enabled String saved as default powerup setting Enter the Dial Prefix In most cases the Dial Prefix is ATDT which is set as the default GSuLLLUesIBOId 18 Select a Call In Option either On Invalid Transac tion which includes when remote panel s transaction buffer is nearly full and alarm events or N ever 19 Click the Set N ew Site ID and Password button 244 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 20 Enter a New Password The password can be comprised of up to 16 characters 21 Reenter the password in the Confirm Password field 22 Enter the Site ID using the following format A unique 4 digit number S unique 4 digit number For example A0002 S0003 is area 2 site 3 23 Click OK to return to the HUB Settings window 24 Click Next to advance to the Finish window then click Finish The new Remote Panel Loop is now displayed on the modem po
220. el CMI Aai Couri J ATANAN E F Panel CHO Tame Ot me E Ae E fe Unbutai al parak on ctartup Tirek Zr GMT 05 00 Ceres Tira 5 amp Carada Fieerecle Phara Hirisi Bizier ce coo 2 Enter a unique Name for the communication loop using up to 30 characters This is a required field Programming 241 3 Use the Description field to further identify the panel loop optional using up to 60 characters 4 The ACK NAK check box is selected and grayed out since this modem pool only accepts ACK NAK panels 5 Select either or both buffer check boxes Buffer all panels on exit and Unbuffer all panels on startup to apply buffering instructions Select Buffer on Exit to automatically buffer all panels when the communication server is exited Select Unbuffer on Startup to automatically unbuffer all panels when the communication server is started NOTE Scheduled dialup buffering options are set in the Schedule database NOTE Logging in or out of the database server doesnt affect the communincation server The communication server runs until it is shut down either manually or by shutting down the operating system GSuLLLUesBOId 6 Indicate the Time Zone in which the loop is lo cated 7 St the Panel Defaults I O Poll Interval defaults to 60 seconds Sets the frequency for the signal sent to the panel to verify communication and check the panel s input and output states Panel CMD R
221. en an individual device can be selected for configuration Simply right click on the device and select Configure An abbreviated version of the Configure Rights dialog is displayed Configure Rights e E EE User Overview 85 NOTE Configuring Rights for Databases If you right click an individual database in the O perator level tree that has sub branches and select Configure yet another Configure Rights dialog is presented Congue Aight Database f ame Leave all nights as they one C Hona Ranra all nights from all helds vier Gart Wager ighis ko al eds C Change Grant Dhage nghts bo ai beds Delete Grart Chtete nights bor thet Database ac a whale grant Changa nghi forall hakk o ema An individual branch provides an abbreviated version of the Configure Rights to database Configure Rights to Database X Cancel C Delete Each device database and user interface element in the control tree is color coded based on the right assigned to it Red no rights Yellow view rights Green operate rights view and edit White delete rights M NUDNO PSN 86 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Configuring Rights Summary Chart Branch Database Device Change Delete Max None Operate Sam View Operate Specific e Operator Level Tree x x x x Command File x x x Individual Command File x x Control Area x x
222. enu Define Device Time Management Quick Start Wizard Card Holder Badge Select Language Access Areas Tracking Areas Control Areas Device Map Abstract Device ADV Action Group Time Zone Schedule Holiday Group Configure AutoCard Lookup Note Field Template Card Holder Tab Layout Configure Badge Printer Badge Layout Utility Badge DLL s Translate Available Languages Dialogs Menus Other Text Command File Guard Tour Floor Plan Definition Window Menu Arrange Icons Help Menu Help Topics Northern Computers Inc On the Web Contacts License About WIN PAK 2 0 Registration User Overview 73 Right Click Menus You can right click many items in the WIN PAK 2 0 User Interface to display a set of options specific to those items For example right clicking on a panel icon in the Device Map window opens a menu which allows the operator to change the panel configuration or to isolate or delete it from the Device Map Database Windows Most of the WIN PAK 2 0 databases are accessed through a main database window as shown below M NUDNO SN The WIN PAK 2 0 databases include Card e Card Holder Time Zone e Operator e Operator Levels e Floor Plan e Abstract Device Guard Tour Badge Layouts e Schedule e Command File e Action Groups 74 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Database Record Lists Below the title bar in database windows is a list of database records Use
223. equent menu This removes the shape from your badge layout 390 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Badge Objects Signature Placeholders NOTE Signature placeholders are used in badge design where you want the card holder s signature to appear When the badge is assigned to a card and card holder the appropriate signature from the card holder database is applied to the badge A signature pad Northern Computers PB SIG CAP or PBSIG CAPLCD can be connected to the computer to capture signatures The signatures are saved in vector format They can be placed on the cards and proportion ally stretched to fill the area allotted for them The signature background can also be made transparent to be placed on top of any other object on the badge WIN PAK 2 0 allows up to 99 signatures for each card holder A Signature Index number is used to indicate which card holder signature should appear on the card Signature placeholders can be formatted in a number of ways the signature can be aligned horizontally and vertically within the box and stretched or reduced to fill the space It can also be rotated at set intervals Adding a Signature Placeholder to a Badge Layout 1 Click the Place Signature button on the Badge Definition window toolbar 2 Click in the badge layout area and drag the signature box to the desired size and shape Move the signature box by selecting it and dragging it to the desired position Resize the signature
224. er is entered the masked edit control rejects the character and generates an error message The user cannot proceed to the next field until the error is corrected NOTE While the software can distinguish between numeric and alphabetic characters for validation it cannot check for valid content such as the correct month or time of day Setting Up Card Holder Tabs The Card Holder Tab Layout option allows you to use different tabs to organize note fields for the Card Holder database display These tabs appear when a card holder record is opened There are three permanent tabs Name Cards and Card Biometrics The Card Holder Tab Layout database is opened by selecting Card Holder Tab Layout from the Card Holder option on the Configuration menu Copfiguestion wincow He F Defne Ty Device 5 Tima Hansgmeni SJ P OH Pues 414 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Within the Card Holder Tab Layout database window tabs are listed by number indicating where they appear followed by the tab name and the note fields that appear on the tab ca Card Holder Tab Layout LY Tab Name Adding a Card Holder Tab 1 Click the Add button on the Card Holder Tab Layout window The Card Holder Tab Layout Record window is activated Card Holders 415 Caid Halili Tab Lapsi Aenm p x Tab Hare Grande Moe Fiski i lone Phone fal S greboard Other Phone T Sigpabicsard Otha Marra W his Coie E
225. er minute up to 10 seconds Cards Sends card information to the panel When sending cards it is recommended that you re initialize the panel by choosing Select All This ensures that old card information is removed when the new card information is added GSuLLLUeIBOJd When cards with an Active or Trace status are added edited or deleted from the card or card holder database this information is automatically sent to the panels All other card information changes must be sent using this command Additionally new updated information on the following features functions and panel elements can be sent to the panel e Command File e Holidays e Time Zones e Inputs Outputs G roups 284 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Initializing Status As the panel initializes a status window indicates what information is being sent If an error occurs the status window indicates which command caused the error lniisizing Wiest Lobby Steps Indicates what information is being sent Message Count The progress of messages being sent Status Whether the initialization is proceeding is successful or has failed Cmd Status Indicates if a command has timed out Error Message Indicates if any errors occurred while transmitting information to the panel Multiple panels can be initialized at the same time Closing the Initializing window once the process has begun is allowed The Monitor view allows another way to moni
226. era Lact Log lr 4 Indicate if the report should be sorted in Ascending or Descending order Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report Click Close to exit the O perator report window and return to the main Reports database window 522 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Operator Actions Report 1 Select the O perator Actions report from the Reports database window The O perator Actions report opens with the D ate and Time filter tab displayed F Operaio Acie Higi Operator rotors Operators Devicer Sottider Tnt Faise due 1 ae izotona ree Le F naam E 2 Indicate a D ate Range for the report using the From and To fields and browse arrows Set the precise time for the report using the appropriate time adjustment arrows Use the Time Range area of the window to set a specific time frame for the report The default time will begin with the From D ate and Time Range parameters and be continuous to the To Date and Time Range parameters If Only list O perator Actions between these hours each day is checked on the time range each day will be reported omitting information outside the time range Use the Operator Actions tab next illustration to select the operator action events to be included in the report Reports 523
227. es or materials made available hereunder or the use or modification thereof NOTICE Northen Computers Inc makes no claim or warranty with respect to the fitness of any product or SOFTWARE for a specific application and assumes no responsibility for installation This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied No representative or agent of Northem Computers Inc may make any other claims to the fitness of any product for any application So long as the SOFTWARE licensed hereunder remains a part of Northern systems Northern intends to issue periodic enhancements and updates which will include corrections of programming errors discovered or brought to Northern s attention However Northern shall not be obligated to issue such enhancements or updates on any particular schedule NOTICE The SOFTWARE contained herein is licensed as a service only for no particular application It is not to be considered or construed as a good for product definition within the meaning of the uniform commercial code and applicable state law Northern Computers Inc makes no commitment to continue producing this or any other compatible SO FTWARE nor makes any commitment as to marketing the SOFTWARE in any given territory WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTICE This license Agreement is for Northern Computers Inc SOFTWARE and or documentation only The SOFTWARE requires that the user obtain either from Northern Computers Inc or a
228. eshold 3600 5 MB 90 18 C Alarm Threshold 3000 MB 75 15 Cancel NOTE The general recommendation is that the OS operating system should have 1 3 free space of the hard drive it is installed on WIN PAK database upgrades and general database operations should have 2 5 times the database size of hard drive freespace To program the Database Limits and Capacities click on File and select Database Limits Capacities The O perator must have administrator permissions Database Maintenance 545 The Database section provides current database size information listed as Current Size and displays the percentage of the database that is used The MSDE database engine allows for a maximum size of 2GB excluding floor plans photo and badging images The Warning and Alarm thresholds defined in MB megabytes in additon to percentages are displayed The Database Disk D rive Free Space section reports Current Free Space of the hard drive where the database is located In installations where the database is located on a separate drive it is recommend that at least 2 5 times the maximum size of the database be left as free space If the database is installed on the same drive as the OS then 1 3 free space of the hard drive should be used This allows enough room for backups and archive actions to occur Single Hard Drive Setup Considerations You want to utilize the MSDE to its maximum capacity on a single 10GB
229. eteeteeeeee eect tees eee taeseeeteeetaestaesneeeceeeaeenaeeceetaaes 69 Toolbar BUNS ieee ated ele tae tale an ie ade ee ad al EO Os 69 MGIUS E E O E A O AT OE O O T TET 71 RIONECIICK MENUS iinne ited tet nia n a dee ele a a 73 Database WiINdOWS 00 cece treet tattntAANAASANEANENSEEEANANEEAEN SES EAEN AEAEE EnEn E na 73 Database Record Lists innii nenio ainan ae eA hee ae es 74 Viewing Detail Database RecordS 0 eeeeeceeeeee eee eeee testes tie eeteeceetetaenieenaes 74 Searching and Sorting Database Lists cece eeceeeeeeee ete tete eter eteteeeteeeaee 75 Database Operations oo eee eet treet ecte eee etter testes eaeeneeneeeas 76 Detail Database Record WiINdOWS ceeeceeeteete tee e eee eetee tees seeteeeteetaetnaeneeees 78 TOSS TU CHUTES is oi a an A EN Aa PAAA AAAA PAE ANON AAEE TANET ENA AENEAN 79 Logging Into WINePAK 2 0 saniainen te aa ae p a 80 Systemi S etig Seesmos na ia iii d chante E a Aa ETE a AE Agent a AE 81 Operator Levels and Operators 0 eeeeceeeeeeeeeee eee eee eeeeeceeeae tie ecneecetaeseeeneeeeaee 81 Operator Level Database 0 eeccecceseeee een tee sense teens teeeeaeteseeenetaeeieenieetenaees 81 Adding an Operator Level 0 c ec cccececccete cee eeeee eee eneenieseeeeceeceeeaeseecieeeneeeaes 82 Configuring Operator LeVelS oo ceceeeee eee eceeeeeee ene etieeeeetaeseeetestaeseeeeaee 83 Copying an Operator Level oo eecceeceeeeeneesseeeneseeseeeeeaeesaeesaeseaeseeneeaeetae 87 Editing Operator Le
230. etermines how to sort the access levels Names for example Reports Report Access Level x ea Sort l Run from Archive Database m Sort Order Print Preview Name bi Print Ascending Export File C Descending Estim Pages Clear All Close aa 4 Indicate if the category should be sorted in Ascend ing or Descending order 5 Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report 6 Click Close to return to the main Reports database window NOTE There may be access levels listed in the report that do not show up in the access level database and are identified by number only These numbered access levels are the custom levels for cards that are modified from their base access level 488 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Attendance Report 1 Select the Attendance report from the Reports database window 1 AMendance 2 Select a Tracking Area if desired 3 Select one of the following from the Card Holders area of the window to define the report All reports on all card holders during the dates specified in the date range One reports on an individual cardholder during the defined date range using the Card Number and Name fields displayed when the One radio button is selected Group reports on a designated
231. etry Count defaults to 3 seconds Sets the number of times a command will be resent if the panel does not respond to the command Panel CMD Time Out defaults to 5 seconds Sets the amount of time allowed for sending a command before timing out 8 Enter the Remote Phone Number for the loop 9 Select the Modem in the pool that WIN PAK 2 0 will use to call the remote location 242 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 10 Set up the default ADV for the panel by clicking the Add button in the ADV area of the window 11 After setting up the ADV click N ext on the Con figuration window to advance to the 485 PCI Loop Configuration HUB Settings window below Leave the default settings or make any desired changes The options are explained below 12 Enter a value in the Delay for Connection field if a pause is required between dialing the prefix and dialing the phone number 13 Indicate the Number of Redial Attempts to be made if there is no connection to PC s modem based on the selected Call In Option The default is 3 but any number between 0 and 50 can be entered in this field Programming 243 14 Enter the Wait Time for Disconnect after the last 1 1 1 5 6 N transmission usually a buffer command that is setup in the Dial Remote area scheduler is sent from WINPAK The wait time allows the remote loop to be properly buffered before disconnecting This number can be between 1 and 999 seconds The d
232. evice Map The Device window will open joiz 2 In the Device window above right click on the Devices folder and select Add gt Rapid Eye The Rapid Eye DVSS Configuration window will open below Rapdtye DYS Configuration a xj Du wuLULIDOId 3 Type in the Name User and Password parameters The D escription parameter is optional 334 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 2 3 I JS amp 7 2 Mo A 3 Ho AD 14 NOTE NOTE Ho AD Ha A e No Ae Ho AD 1B Ma ACI Ho AD J10 Ra ADW J11 Hh Ary 12 No ALY The Name must be the same as the name of the RapidEye Site being connected to The User and Password must be the same as defined in the RapideEye Multi software 4 Click Next to bring up the RapidE ye Camera Con figuration window below 5 For each camera defined in the RapidEye system enable a camera ADV then click Add The sequential order of the ADVs correspond directly to the sequential order of the RapidEye cameras Selecting the Pan and Tilt option will define a camera as a PTZ pan tilt zoom camera Not selecting the Pan and Tilt option defines the camera as a stationary camera If desired type in a Camera Title Otherwise the default camera title will be a combination of the name of the previously defined DVSS ADV and the number of the current ADV 6 After defining cameras click Finish The D evice window will display the newl
233. ext to continue The user is given the option of adding cards for the newly defined loop or add them later Programming 167 NOTE For the purpose of introducing the Quick Start Wizard in a concise manner this procedure assumes the operator chooses to add cards After choosing to add cards and clicking Next the second Add Cards screen will appear Pf Quick Start Wizard Add Cards First card number in the range Last card number in the range H C 100 on A Camera Sq Activation Date 5 21 2002 Ei F Eg Modem to H Q N 485 AC d Lm 2 9 3 3 ce lt Back Next gt Cancel 15 Enter the appropriate numbers in the corresponding Start and End number windows that define the card number range to be added Then click Next to continue The Creating Panels and Cards screen will appear next illustration 168 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide P Quick Start Wizard Creating Panels The system has been configured Press Next to save the configuration and create the panels and cards 16 System configuration is completed Click Next to save the configuration and create the panel s and cards After creating panel s and cards the Summary screen will appear ff quick Start Wizard Be xj Summary The Panel Quick Start Wizard created the following items 1 Loop s 1 Panel s Cards numbered 1 to 10 to be activated on 5 21 2002 Loop Name Loop 1 Loo
234. f all actions available for a particular type of device open the Action Group database from the Device option on the WIN PAK 2 0 Configuration menu Within each Action Group you can view the specific actions assigned to the group by selecting the Detail View check box When the detail view of the Action Group is displayed each Action assigned to the group is shown Highlight an Action to see its related specifics including a Priority if one is assigned Command Files Sound File Digital Video Camera Message and Time Zone GSuLLLUeIBOId Though not all inclusive the following lists give you an idea of the types of actions defined for different ADVs used in the WIN PAK 2 0 System 485 ACK NAK and 485 Non ACK NAK Loop Action Groups Action Message Description Loop OK The N 485 is working properly Loop Remote The host computer was not able to connect via dialup Dial up Failed to the control panel Loop Remote The host computer was able to connect via dialup Dial up OK to the control panel Loop Trouble The N 485 is NOT working properly 198 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide C 100 Loop Action Group Action Message Description Loop OK The C 100 is working properly Loop Remote The host computer was unable to connect via dial up Dial up Failed to the control panel Loop Remote The host computer was able to connect via dial up Dial up OK to the control panel Loop Trouble The C 100 is NOT working properly
235. f only one field was changed The Out of Date and ID column indicates the number of fields that do not match exactly to an upgrade of WIN PAK 2 0 uone sued 468 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 2 Select a dialog from the Dialog Caption list and click the Edit button An editable version of the dialog opens EI Leap Contayunatin 3 Click on the text you want to change The text is automatically highlighted and the size of the field is displayed Type in the new text The following illustration shows the word Seconds being used to replace the Sec Translation 469 4 On completing the text change for a field press the ENTER keyboard key to close the text field and save the edited text After changing the three Sec fields the Dialog now appears as indicated below AHAL Loep Lintaqatenn Mbah hethirege Dely Fo Conradin E Secon Huber of Pecks dengn 2 Wet Tina fos Ducomnaci 0 H Semt Delay befres hlaut aragi Jeor Modenintdiraion omrand SOSsS S STSM oe Calin Option H Set Mere Sin ID ard Panaad 5 When you have finished making all the necessary changes to the dialog click the Close button X in the upper right comer of the editable dialog or click on the Dialog and select Close Edi Dials Tex o z r gt DH dibabad Dera Heca 2 0 o zx V BAren Level 3 o a 2x U PAHen Gisin w oO a INE ct FP add Decet 4 0 2377 EP dod Hula Board 4 pei m EH ddd Operator hioa 4 D
236. f the report window 526 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Operator Level Report 1 Select the Operator Level report from the Reports database window The O perator Level report window opens with the report tab displayed Report Operator Level Operator Level Fite Sot Bun from fective Database I Operator Level Erne as Frm T Gud Senice om Dre To Epot Fie Fad E cui Danana DewAl 2 Further define the O perator Level report by select ing one of the following options All reports on all operator levels One reports on an individual operator level using the From field activated when the One radio button is selected Range reports on a designated range of operator levels using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selected 3 Click the Sort tab and select a Sort Order for the report indicating if the report should be sorted in ascending or descending order 4 Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report 5 Click Close to exit the O perator Level report win dow and return to the main Reports database win dow Reports 527 Schedule Report 1 Select the Schedule report from the Reports data base window The Report Schedule report window opens with the Filter Schedule tab displayed Repo
237. ffect the communincation server The communication server runs until it is shut down either manually or by shutting down the operating system 5 Indicate the Time Zone in which the loop is lo cated Set the Panel Defaults I O Poll Interval defaults to 60 seconds Sets the frequency for the signal sent to the panel to verify communication and to check the panel s input and output states Panel CMD Retry Count defaults to 3 seconds Sets the number of times a command will be resent if the panel does not respond to the command Panel CMD Time Out defaults to 5 seconds Sets the amount of time allowed for sending a command before timing out Click Next to advance to the Loop Configuration Port Settings window next illustration Programming 223 Loop Configuration Port Settings IP Loop Cenliqueaton Pot Settings Past ETE Bis per Sirod iama j Data Bi E Panty Mons Sing Bits fi IPAddbecs o Hode rame Encippon Pucca iel al i Back Hest gt Cancel Help Du wuLULIDOId 8 Select the Port to which the loop is connected NOTE Select the TCP IP port only for N 485 PCI with ACK NAK enabled It is not recommended to use TCP IP for other devices that do not use an ACK NAK protocol 9 Enter the Bits per Second communication rate for the loop For optimum performance the 485 PCI should be set for 19200 19 2 K This baud rate must match the 485 P
238. fined to meet the needs of monitoring and maintaining the system at a later date as needed Log out and log in again using the new Admin password to verify that your new password has been entered properly Then proceed with your setup Quick Start Wizard Overview After logging in to WIN PAK 2 0 for the first time on the communication server the Quick Start Wizard window will appear The communication server is on a standalone computer where a complete installation has been performed or in a networked system it is generally located on the WIN PAK database server Since the wizard requires access to several WIN PAK databases it is only available to operators with administrator permissions The wizard can be set to not appear at each log in The administrator can also launch the wizard from the configuration menu The function of the Quick Start Wizard is to provide a simple method using general system defaults along with user defined fields to create a basic functional system BuLLLUeIBOJd Information is provided at each step to guide the administrator through the process Cards panels and readers can be added using the wizard The cards are given a default permission to be valid at all times and for all readers in the system Changes to the cards can be made at the operator s convenience 158 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide When you are done using the wizard click on Finish and initialize the panels that were just added
239. g E RS 232 cor Configure F Video Switc Isolate Guard Tour Ser Delete 1 Once the Modem Pool has been defined right click it and select either Add New C 100 Loop or Add N ew 485 Loop to open the Loop Configuration Basic Information window next illustration Programming 235 Loop Configuration Basic Information C 100 Loon Configuration Batic Informestion Ea Mave Para Daute Pemra Gsis East 170 Poll interval Descriptor feo See i E rigaice iia res Eai Panel CMD Aai Court i Loop Vericaton Inara Secl E ED Panel CHD Tea Out mee F Dute al parek on eat se FF el para on fa Tite cree IGT 6 00 Cerial Tire LIS amp Carada Fieeresie Phora Humba Madem Ee Modem 2 2 Enter a unique Name for the panel loop required BuLLLUeIBOJd using up to 30 characters Use the Description field to further identify the panel loop optional using up to 60 characters Set the Loop Verification Interval This sets how often a test signal is sent through the communication loop verifying the loop s integrity The loop s data bandwidth will be reduced if the test interval is shortened or the loop s data bandwidth can be increased if the test interval is lenghtened The test signal is a relatively short signal and using the default value of 60 seconds is an optimum setting If the test signal is not received within the defined time interval a Loop Trouble a
240. g Command Files 1 Click the Run Command File toolbar button or select Command File from the Operations menu The Run a Command File dialog is displayed Run Command File Ea pa Cab 1 Executive a i Cancel 2 Use the drop down list to select the Command File to run 3 Click Run to start the Command File User Overview 137 Guard Tour A Guard Tour is a defined series of check points a guard must activate within a given amount of time Usually the check points are readers where the guard presents a card but they can also be input points attached to other devices such as an egress button The check points can be sequenced i e they must be activated in the specified order or unsequenced activated in any order Guard tours are defined in the Guard Tour database The tour definition sets the amount of time the guard has to get from one check point to the next Alarms can be defined and priorities set for early arrival late arrival or missed check points These alarms are defined in the Guard Tour database and can be edited there or in the Action Group database A Guard Tour Server must be defined on the Device Map M NUDNO SN Starting a Guard Tour To start a guard tour the Guard Tour Server must be running 1 Select Guard Tour from the WIN PAK 2 0 O pera tions menu The Guard Tour window is displayed 2 Click the Start button to open a list of Available Guard Tours Gused Tour Avedable Toure U
241. g a tab does not delete the card holder data Data note fields can be reassigned to a different or new tab if desired Configuring AutoCard Lookup AutoCard Lookup responds to a card read by providing an on screen view identifying the Card Holder If there is a photo in the database it is also displayed By selecting the Notes Field option you can include additional information in this view Use the Configure AutoCard Lookup utility to select which note fields are displayed Card Holders 417 Select Configure AutoCard Lookup from the Card Holder option on the Configuration menu The AutoCard Lookup Configuration window is displayed next illustration Autocard Lookup Configuration Show Note Fields Car Lic Plate 1 Car Lic Plate 2 Car Make 1 Car Make 2 Car Model 1 Car Model 2 City Dentist s Name Dentist s Phone Department Doctor s Name Doctor s Phone Eye color Hair Color Cancel Use the Show N ote Fields check boxes to indicate the note fields you want included in the AutoCard Lookup Click OK to save your AutoCard Lookup selections 4 4 4 iS K I IK CCS SJOP JOH Pues 418 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Setting Up Card Holders Card Holder records containing information on all card holders in the system are stored in the Card Holder database Open the Card
242. g and Resizing Badge Layout Objects eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeetnettee 350 Badge Object Properties oo eeecceeeee eect eee enee ene sene eters tee teeseseeseeeeeeetetaee 351 Badge dab wtncae te aati tte ae al eee a hosel tea 351 Applying a Bitmap Image to a Badge Background esensina 354 Importing Graphics for BackgroundS ceeeeeceeeeeeee cette ce eee etter ce taeteetee cette 355 Positioning Badge Elements 0 cece eee eetecee eee teens ecneeceeiesieesnessesaeees 356 Video Background Siss irii toceelinedst heat aria dra a e daa lowed Guess 358 Installing Badge DLLS sssssssssessssssissssrissrsrrnsnstietatensistnntnntnstnttnninnntnntenennnnnns 358 Capturing a Video Background oo ceececceeeteetteetteeteeeeeetneetieeteeeeeeieeeeeeaes 360 Working with Colors is 30i5 caithy dds etl a a E A maui 362 Applying a Basic Background Color to a Badge sssessrcercnccinsirii 363 Creating Custom COIOMS oo eee eect ee ete tne ttit Attak EAEAN eter caste EEREN EEEE 364 Hue Saturation and LUMINOSItY 0 0 eee cece eee eee reeset cee eteetaettaeteeeeeetaeees 364 REG Green Blue vis pis ns secccay wets enaa a sledge nd cata TAAA 365 Color Solid eriein ed Been Read it eae ean lees 365 Selecting Custom Colors oo ceececeesseeseceeeeeeeecaeeeeseeeeeaeeaeeeseeeetaesiaeeieeeaeeeaae 366 Magnetic Stripe Encoding 0 ect etter teenie tects etree teenie eeiee cee eetaee 368 Adding or Editing Magnetic Stripe Data eneee 369 Magnetic Stripe Encoding Options
243. g the Path to Language Files Once a language file is placed in this directory it is available for selection and use in the WIN PAK 2 0 System Chapter 8 Reports Overview Generating and Printing Reports Reports 479 Overview WIN PAK 2 0 allows you to generate a variety of reports that can be viewed on screen or printed Reports available within the WIN PAK 2 0 System include e Access Areas e Access Levels e Attendance e Card e Card History e Card Holder e C H Tab Layout Command File e Control Area e Device Map e Floor Plan e Guard Tour e History e Holiday Group e Note Field Template e Operator e Operator Actions Operator Level e Schedule Time Zone e Tracking and Mustering Area Report Reports are generated by selecting Reports from the Reports menu or by clicking the Reports toolbar button Reports Beports Configu The Reports database window is displayed next illustration listing all reports available 480 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Reports WA Access Level Access Level Report og Attendance _ Attendance Report oa Card Card Report lt 4 Card History Card History Report J Detal view Add Edig LGBy Double click on a report to open its detail window which allows you to set a variety of filtering and sorting parameters for the report You can also open a report detail window by highlighting it in the database list and clicking the Report Options button
244. ge Select a Language and click OK Now you can begin translation of the software dialogs menus and other text Translation 467 Translating Dialogs Menus and Other Text 1 Select Dialogs from the Translate option on the Configuration menu The Edit Dialog Text window is displayed Abstract Devia Mezga i i e TA Ee 0 tiii E iope Lere 4 Prale Ep Auction Group 2275 Fpl ai Deria i tl s7 EP ddd Milt Bosad i Fr Fl ddd Operates Hate i iE EP Aln 4 ian EP slann Deiak z 0 r FP baiard Lookun Wwisiing bo cand rod E 0 0 Zul FA dutocard Lookup Configueboe 4 0 D zan FP Beke DLL s T 0 0 mag FP Bankga E kermani Layout Aki ol Blockou here z D 0 5 j 5a The Total Dialogs box indicates the total number of Dialog boxes that can be translated The Translated box indicates the total number of fields in the Dialog that have been translated The Out of D ate box indicates the number of dialogs that do not match exactly to an upgrade of WIN PAK 2 0 This number will decrease after each dialog has been edited Each Out of Date dialog will be displayed by a light red highlight By clicking on the column heading the columns can display information in ascending alphabetical order The Dialog Caption column indicates the caption name to be edited and the Total indicates the number of fields that can be translated D one indicates that the Caption has been edited even i
245. gnated PC This can be the same machine as the Database Server or another computer in the system A Communication Server is defined by adding it to the Device Map and creating an ADV BuLLLUeIBOJd When a server is added to the Device Map you must log out and log in again before the change takes effect Configuring a Communication Server 1 From the Configuration menu select Device gt Device Map The Device window will open 2i01x Ceara Conan Seve Find F3 Command Fie Server Guard Tour Sarcer Tracking amp Muse arsar Rapi ya 2 In the Device window above right click on the Devices folder and select Add gt Communication Server The Com Server Configuration Basic Information window will be displayed next illustration 204 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Com Server Configuration Basic Information 1 Enter a unique Name for the Communication Server using up to 30 alphanumeric characters 2 Enter a Description of the Communication Server that helps you further identify it using up to 60 characters 3 The Machine Name can be found in the Windows Control Panel by activating the Network application and looking at the Identification tab Programming 205 WARNING 4 It is generally not necessary to change the Proto col End Point However there are multiple servers Command File Guard Tour Scheduler Tracking and Muster and each must have a unique protocol end point
246. group of card holders during the date range using the Access Level field and Note Field displayed when the G roup radio button is selected Additionally a text field is available to further define the note field contents Reports 489 4 Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report 5 Click Close to return to the main Reports database window Card Report 1 Select the Card report from the Reports database window The Report Card window opens with the Card Filter tab is displayed CadFie See Aranen CandHobde Fier Alun bor Archies Datahara Cand Humber Pied Preven Fiom _ Zaal To Export Fike Erin Piaget lees a o ml lel Expansion Coste Plager oo S 1 Fii jeas polam T Pini all cimni 2 Select one of the following to filter the report by Card Number All reports on all cards One reports on an individual card using the From field activated when the One radio button is se lected Range reports on a numerical range of cards using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selected 490 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Use any or all of the following options to further filter the report e Access Level e Card Holder e Activation Date Range e Card Status e Expiration D ate Range Door Use the
247. gure Free Egress dialog is displayed Configae Free Egres Programming 277 Only input points can be associated with a Free Egress Input point therefore the input I point radio button is automatically selected and the other two options are grayed out on this dialog 1 Select an Egress Input point that you want to utilize as the Free Egress Input Only active input points that are not used for other interlocks appear in this list 2 Enter the Shunt Time for the Egress Point This is the amount of time the input point is shunted deactivated when triggered 3 Enter the Debounce Time for the Egress Point This is the amount of time that an input must be in alarm condition or return to normal before it is recognized as an alarm or normal For example an input with a debounce time of five must be in alarm condition for five seconds before it is reported as an alarm The same is true when returning to normal condition 4 Click OK to return to the Readers window BuLLLUeIBOJd Status Input Shunt Device Status Input Shunt D evice indicates the status of the door Click the Status Input Shunt Device button on the Readers window to open the Configure Status Input Shunt Device dialog Configure Status Input Shunt Device Cy 0 65 Status Input 7 Shunt Device In 1 z Sec C Min Hr Shunt Time fis 4 Debounce Time jo Sec Set Defaults Cancel 278 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 4
248. h Entrance ADV for configuration of four different types of doors left handed right handed double or garage Each door type displays an open or closed animation Both Door and Door II use the same ADV type and provide Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Unlock Lock Shunt Unshunt Pulse Timed Pulse and Restore To Time Zone control Panel N 1000 Used with all N 1000 control panels The ADV Provides Panel Initialize Cancel Initialization Buffer Unbuffer Acknowledge All Alarms and Clear All Alarms control Loop C100 Used with C 100 ADV Provides Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Buffer All Panels Unbuffer All Panels Set Retry Count and Set Command Timeout control For remote C 100 loops additional ADV control includes Connect Remote and Disconnect Remote Loop PCI Used with N 485 PCI ADV Provides Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Buffer All Panels Unbuffer All Panels Sety Retry Count and Set Command Timeout control For remote N 485 HUB loops additional ADV control includes Connect Remote and Disconnect Remote Modem Pool Used with Modem Pool ADV Provides Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Hang up Modem and Reset Modem control Communication Server Used with the communication server ADV Provides Acknowledge All Alarms and Clear All Alarms control Output Used with relay output ADV Provides Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms and Clear All Alarms control Programmi
249. h a security gate and a proximity card might be used for entry into and within the building A spouse or child may need his or her own card for access to a building as well Flexible Views and Control Features Floor plan views are user configured They provide both monitoring and control capability for panels doors alarms inputs and outputs and other system devices Multiple floor plans can be viewed simultaneously while links can open other floor plans at the click of a mouse The pan tilt zoom and switching of CCTV cameras can also be controlled from the floor plan view The Control Map provides another user configured means of controlling devices The user defines the Control Map by adding devices to a branching tree structure D evices can be controlled from the Control Map view Other on screen views include live CCTV monitoring and Auto Card Lookup which automatically displays a picture and information about a card holder when their card is presented at a designated reader Introduction 29 Communications WIN PAK 2 0 supports a wide variety of communication options to allow the greatest flexibility in setting up an access control system It supports up to 64 serial communications ports or TCP IP connections in a Microsoft Windows X P 2000 NT operating systems environment Remote locations can be supported by dial in and dial out configurations Software Concepts User Interface Operators log in to the User
250. he column and enter the tolerance for early arrival hh mm 322 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 4 Click the column and enter the tolerance for late arrival in hours minutes 5 To change the order of the check points use the up arrow or down arrows to move the selected point in the list Use the Visible check box and Update button on the Unsequenced Check Point window to work with ADVs assigned to the check point devices Refer to the Check Point Alarms section below for details When you have finished adding all the Unsequenced Check Points click the Apply button to save the information and continue working in the Guard Tour Record Click OK to save the information and exit the Guard Tour Record Check Point Alarms Sequenced check points on a guard tour generate alarms for four states Early Arrival Late Arrival Missed and Out of Sequence Unsequenced check points generate alarms for one state only Checked The priorities and dependent actions for these alarms are set in an action group which can be supplied to multiple check points If the action group is changed the settings for all Guard Tour Check Points associated with it are changed as well Action groups can be edited from the Guard Tour database by selecting a guard tour and clicking the Edit button then clicking the Update button on the Sequenced or Unsequenced Check Point window Action groups can also be accessed through the Action Group da
251. he character ABA accepts only numeric characters 0 9 and various punctuation characters ASCII 48 63 TTS accepts numeric characters 0 9 and various punctuation characters ASCII 32 95 Badging 369 As an example the maximum number of characters that can be printed using the Datacard IC III printer are listed in the following table Track Type of Character Max Char bits per inch Track 1 alphanumeric 76 characters 210 bits in Track 2 numeric only 37 characters 75 bits in Track 3 numeric only 104 characters 210 bits in These specifications differ from the ISO 7811 2 Standard because of printer limitations Adding or Editing Magnetic Stripe Data 1 From the Badge O bject Properties window select the tab for Track 1 Track 2 or Track 3 then choose the format from the drop down list in the upper right corner _ ah Ed Deise Move lip Move Doen WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 2 Select Add or Edit to define items to be added to the track via the Enter Data Item window Dadge Element Layout Enter Data Iben 3 Select Fields or type in data for the Expression See the following explanation for magnetic stripe encod ing options 4 Click OK to save your entries and return to the Track tab 5 When several data items have been entered on the Track tab they can be reordered using the Move Up and Move Down buttons To remove a data item from the list select it and click the Delete b
252. he Access Level database window right click on the Local Office branch and select Configure The Configure Area Access window opens oy Ler a a Seed Sica gpa A aii Vikdal Bri ail doii ios ires FH Eat Cora Muster Ee l i Ho E Lica E Local lice bsr ipm al daa Gereral office hran L i w Conpery E Mater He miina F i Esi Cost Hee iot E Hea virk Master Wekdal iras and doce Ho El ie ete Coirp ante Tp el hag iresi lfc haii Congue Alcea Accs D Lege Berger lov sll entrances in thi aves at iticunenth E Remove doce fom ad entrances in this are Set icra jo all entrances in thir Tiare Dareh SJOP OH Pues span e 7 deya ews Fp F clays per eased incl hokje 2 To allow access to all doors in the area select Set Access for all entrances in this area 440 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Use the Time Zone list to indicate the time zone for the access level NOTE Time zones that are common to all readers in the branch are shown A time zone that is unique to a specific reader can only be defined by the individual reader not as the whole group 4 Click OK 5 In the Access Area pane right side expand the branch and right click the individual entrance on the branch to customize its settings HH Ei Coat Meer rok i Local Office TZ Bam prn a 7 digs Gaii Torn Te BB Ear Lobby Lak Enhance Reader TZ Gara BB Eat Lobby Let Eri Pescer 12 Esr fpr BB Eii Lobty Fogh Entence Reads TZ 6a BBB Eii Lobb
253. he Action Group field and enter a name for the new Action Group Press the ENTER key on your keyboard to set the new Action Group name Programming 325 7 Select an Action for the alarm state 8 Assign a Priority to the alarm NOTE 1 is the highest priority 99 is the lowest If no priority is assigned no further information can be entered 9 Select a Time Zone during which the action group is activated NOTE If None is selected as the Time Zone the defined actions take effect regardless of the time 10 Select any Command Files you want activated in response to the alarm state You can choose to activate command files on any combination of Receive Acknowledge and Clear 11 If desired select a Sound File to be activated in response to receiving the alarm Gu LLLuesib0O1d 12 Select a digital video camera to be associated with the action 13 Select the appropriate check box to Print the event and or Write it to history 14 Enter a Message to be sent to the Alarm View detail in response to the action 15 Repeat this procedure for each alarm state for which you want a response 16 Click OK to save the changes and retum to the Guard Tour Record window 326 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Command File Database Text files containing device instructions are stored in the Command File database Command Files are defined by assigning a name and description to one or more commands This file is then
254. he Badge Shape O bject Properties window Dadga Elemerd Lapout Shape Colere Ponisi Shape Type Founded Fectengle Line m Aoud Incepencdent l Elpa Found On width O Rlechanghe O Amrd On Height G 7 l F width Cured 27 ine idik e Height Curved 20 a ee ee 4 Select the desired Shape Type Line Ellipse Rectangle or Rounded Rectangle 388 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 5 Enter the Line Width in points 6 Click Apply to apply the change to the shape and continue with badge design or click OK to apply the change and return to the Badge Definition window Formatting a Rounded Rectangle 1 When adding a rounded rectangle to the badge layout set the following Rounded Rectangle parameters r Rounded Rectangle Round Independent Round On Width C Round On Height Width Curved 20 Height Curved 20 2 To set the percentage of curvature for both the height and width select Rounded Independent Or select Rounded on Width or Rounded on Height to set the percentage of the height or width to be curved 3 Click Apply to apply the change to your badge and continue with badge design or click OK to apply the change and return to the Badge D efinition window Changing the Border Color of aShape 1 Right click the shape and select Properties O pen the Colors tab on the Badge Shape O bject Properties window 2 Click the Foreground Color browse button to open the Colo
255. he RapidEye digital video system For each RapidEye connected to WIN PAK a seperate device is added to the device map 4 Define Access Areas Tracking Areas and Control Areas Access Areas are defined by adding entrances doors and readers from the control panels to a tree structure Access Areas list entrances and indicate where they are located The Access Areas are then used to define Access Levels Control Areas are used to partition devices for Operator Level definitions Communication server loops panels input points output points groups and readers are added to Control Areas by placing them on a tree structure which is eventually used to create the Control Map Tracking Areas are sections of a facility defined by selecting designated readers Card reads within this area are recorded and can be seen in the Tracking and Muster view In case of an emergency card holders are instructed to go to a muster area and present their cards to a muster reader The operator can then tell if everyone has exited the Tracking Areas and if not where they last presented their card Tracking Areas are defined by mapping them on a tree structure Programming 155 5 Create Floor Plan Views Floor Plans are constructed by placing ADVs on a static background after your devices have been defined Monitoring and control functions are accessed from the floor plan view Floor Plan Backgrounds are static graphics imported as Window
256. he Template field to create a mask for the note field defining the type number and syntax of the characters to be entered When a template is used with a dropdown list a maximum of 255 characters can be entered into the field A maximum of 64 characters is allowed for each defined choice in the dropdown list Refer to the Note Field Mask Properties section ahead in this chapter for more information If the Template field is left blank the note field acts as a regular text box accepting up to 64 characters 4 Click OK when finished You are returned to the Note Field Template database window where the new note field is now displayed in the list Editing Card Holder Note Fields To edit a Note Field simply open the Note Field Template database window highlight the note to be edited and click the Edit button The Note Field window is displayed allowing you to make changes to the Name or Template fields Card Holders 409 Isolating and Deleting a Card Holder Note Field Deleting a note field not assigned to a tab is simply a matter of selecting it and clicking the Delete button on the main Note Field Template database window However since Note fields are used with cards and card holders within the access control system deleting a note field without first taking into consideration where it is used could leave the system with undefined states of operation If you attempt to delete a note field that is currentl
257. he act of creating an ID card Photo badging includes a picture on the card Bar Codes A series of black lines of various thickness that represents a code which is read through an optical reader and is interpreted by a computer or EAC system Battery Backup A battery that supplies power to a device when standard primary AC power has been abruptly cut off Battery Low Alarm A soft alarm that announces that the battery on a control panel is low Biometrics The ability to use a person s physical characteristics such as an eye to uniquely identify a person Buffer Store transactions in the panel s RAM memory Once stored the information can be retrieved at a later time called unbuffering the pand Buffer All The act of buffering all panels C Capture Acquire a graphic image by scanning or video Card Any type of credential used to carry electronic information in an electronic access control system Card Event A card read WIN PAK can be programmed to initiate a variety of actions in response to a card event depending on the status of the card Card Holder A person who has been enrolled into the access control system CCTV Closed circuit television 554 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Central Station A remotely located control and monitoring center that supplies a client with monitoring services Chain of Events A process that starts at one device and triggers numerous other devices and or actions before
258. he main Badge Layouts database window or are working from a badge layout copy you will use the Badge Definition window as your desktop while designing the badge 344 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Badge Definition Window The elements on the Badge Definition window make badge layout and design simple The outline inside the Badge Definition window shows the current badge size and shape Elements that can be placed on the badge layout are accessible via toolbar buttons a E c l we text bitmap photo barcode shape signature E batt The toolbar also includes buttons for Saving and Exiting the Badge Definition window as well as buttons for changing certain settings The badge layout Name and Description can be changed at any time while you are working in the Badge Definition window SIXI AEM hE Hare Eee NORTHERN T COMME TES ANC Fiha 1 Last Name Signaiun 1 The Badge Definition window right click menu provides access to additional control features _ E Setting the Printable Size of the Badge 1 Right click anywhere in the Badge Definition win dow and select Properties The Badge O bject Properties window is displayed Badging 345 2 Click the Positioning tab of the Badge Object Properties window Badge Element PT et z Baig Coon Piiira Track 1 Track 2 Treka Hovzontal Postion Metical Position riisin Hit fr Toe fi Height E mo o whea
259. he reader If this option is selected a reader that normally changes from green to red on a valid card read will change from red to green For NR 1 WR readers using ABA formatted cards this option should be disabled Split Time Zone The Split Time Zone option is enabled and grayed out when adding a N 1000 panel 258 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Command File Provides the name of the defined command files that contain special programming for the control panel This file can be sent manually or as part of the panel initialization process A command file must be defined before it can be selected Initialization Command The Initialization Command field displays the command string sent to the panel at initialization based on the Advanced Options selected Note that as an option is selected or deselected a corresponding string in the Initialization Command field is added or removed Host Grant Host G rant options provide fault tolerance should a card not be found in the panel Host Grant options are used when for example the total number of cards that are to be valid at a panel exceeds the panel capacity or if the card update scheduler is used and the card is presented before the scheduled update has occurred There are three modes of operation of Host Grant e Disabled The card number must exist at the panel for access to be granted The Host WIN PAK 2 0 computer will not grant any access e Open Door If a card i
260. he selected graphic file opens in the window behind the Floorplan Toolbox 4 Add ADVs links and text objects to the background NOTE Any graphic can be used for a Floor Plan background as long as it is saved as a Windows metafile wmf Copy graphic files to the FloorPlanimage folder in the WIN PAK 2 0 Database directory Programming 309 TP Adding ADVs Links and Text Objects to a Floor Plan Adding objects to the floor plan is quite simple Select an object from the Floorplan Toolbox and drag it onto the Floor Plan background Once an item is placed on the floor plan set its properties 1 Right click the object you have selected and click Control Properties Zoom UF do zoom Show View ieW Alea Du LLwuesiBbO1d Copy Selected Control Ctrl C Paste Control Ctrl V Remove Selected Control Del Control Properties Alt Enter 2 The Control Properties window is displayed for the device selected For example if a door is the device selected then a Door Control Properties window opens ADV Icons Input Commonly used to signal an alarm condition Input II Commonly used to signal an input condition or state not associated with an alarm condition Both Input and Input II use the same ADV type and allow Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Shunt Unshunt and Restore ToTime Zone control Door Used with Entrance ADV 310 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Door II Used wit
261. he system NOTE If no time zone is assigned to an operator there is no time restriction on his her log in rights 4 If necessary make an adjustment to the operator s Language Workstation Defaults Selecting Workstation Defaults from the WIN PAK 2 0 System menu allows you to change workstation settings including settings for the alarm printer search results lists system sounds even the wallpaper used for the user interface work ahalic Dl saalin User Overview 99 Use the Defaults tab to set the following Maximum Records returned from the Database for Selecting List This is the number of records retrieved from a database for display in selection lists The default for this field is 200 A range from 20 to 2000 can be specified Maximum Records returned from the Database for Find List The number of records retrieved from a database when a Find is conducted The default for this field is 20 A range from 1 to 1000 can be specified Record Retrieval and Performance Maximum Record settings can be used to adjust performance For example if a small number of records is retrieved at one time the wait time is quite short However if a large number of records is selected as you scroll through the list of records you may have to wait again as the next group of records is retrieved M NUDNO ISN A small number of records means the result is returned quicker but the records must be retrieved mo
262. he tree structure can be expanded one level at a time to show all branches and sub branches On some trees whole branches can be copied or moved Logging In to WIN PAK 2 0 Open the WIN PAK 2 0 Connect To Server window by double clicking the WIN PAK 2 0 icon on your desktop If the WIN PAK 2 0 window is already open on your desktop you can log in by clicking the Log In toolbar button or by selecting Log In from the WIN PAK 2 0 File menu Ee Hep Bwr g Eg Enter your user N ame and Password on the Connect To Server window below Press the Enter key on your keyboard or click the Connect button to log on to WIN PAK 2 0 User Overview 81 System Settings NOTE Operator Levels and Operators This section explains how to set up operators and operator levels how to configure a workstation and how to set certain system defaults such as alarm handling Operator levels should be defined after the access control hardware has been defined in the Control Map Operators are individuals with defined rights and privileges to view and or change parts of the system O perator privileges can be very broad or they can be greatly restricted e g a workstation can be set up to view alarms from just one door An administrator can view and edit all devices databases and all parts of the user interface M NUDNO ISN Operators are defined by O perator Level and Time Zone O perator Level defines the system
263. hedule and click Finish To remove a schedule select the backup schedule and click Delete Click Cancel to return to the main Backup and Restore window Database Maintenance 541 Restore 1 Select Restore from the main Backup and Restore window to restore a backup WIN PAK 2 0 s data base knows the locations that the backups were made on this machine If the backup is to be recov ered from a different location then select the View list of backups on a specific device option and navigate to the desired location iii prina Backup a Schedule Application WIN PAK 2 0 E Yaw thn in At beka a a pai lt i 2 Once the appropriate backup file is selected a viewer next illustration shows the contents of that backup Select the backup file desired If selecting a differential backup the last complete backup is automatically selected as that is required to com plete the restore process NOTE The WIN PAK 2 0 database contains the listing displayed and file location as defined when the backup was made When the View the list of backups made from this manual is selected it is expecting to find the files where it last placed them If the backup file is not found by the restore utility it will prompt you to browse the computer fo find it The backup file must be located on the same physical computer that is performing the restore Restoring across a network is not supported If the backup has been m
264. hen card holders are associated with the cards their information appears in the badge layout on the Badge tab The badge layout can be printed from the Card database Refer to the Working with Database Windows section in the User Overview chapter of this manual for details on working with the Search and Sort fields Card Holders 447 NOTE Card Activation and Expiration with Scheduler When cards are added to the Card database they can be configured for an unlimited number of uses over an indefinite period of time However you do have the option of limiting card usage in two ways When a card is selected to be active in the Card database the information is automatically sent to the panels However if you choose an activation date on that date the card information is sent to the panels The Scheduler should be set to periodically send card information to the panels at least once a day When a card Activation Deactivation scheduled event is preformed cards with an activation date prior to the event are sent to the panel Cards with a deactivation date prior to the event are deleted from the panel and changed to an inactive status The activation and expiration dates can also be changed by editing a card Refer to the Time Management section of the chapter 4 for more information on setting scheduled events Adding Editing and Deleting Cards Cards can be added and deleted individually or in batches
265. ication server configuration Programming 161 4b If the correct operating system is reported click Next to continue The Communication Port Selec tion screen will appear Pf Quick Start Wizard Communication Port Selection Operating System Windows 2000 Communication Port COM1 E 5 Select the communication port that will be con nected to the panel loop then click Next to con tinue This selection is for direct connection TCP IP and dial up configurations require manual setups The Communication Type screen appears P quick Start Wizard Communication Type ie iting System ind 2000 perang system Windows From the Communication Communication Port COM1 Loop ij C1000n amera S Communication Loop Current Loop 6 Select the loop type that will connect to the panels then click Next to continue The Loop Name screen will appear next illustration d Lm 2 9 3 3 2 162 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide P Quick Start Wizard Loop Name Operating System J Devices 5 ComServer F Communication Port Q C100 on amp Camera SA Communication Loop Modem to n s95 ac Loop Name ais Windows 2000 COM1 Current Loop Loop 1 7 If desired type a different name than the default name then click Next to continue The Panel Address screen will appear P Quick Start Wizard Panel Address lt Operatin stem ap g Sy E Com Server F Communic
266. ich determines system actions such as activating a command file or playing a sound file in reaction to transactions from the device An Action Group can be edited from the Action Group database to make global changes in all ADVs associated with a particular action group GHuLLLUeIBOId WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Using the Device Map The Device Map is set up in a graphical tree structure representing the physical connections of the devices B Device Bfe Ea J Devices gp Command File Server Communication Server Guard Tour Server D Schedule Server iti Tracking and Muster B Video Digital The highest level in the D evice Map is the D evices folder Services including the Communication Server and digital video devices are added at this level e CCTV switchers and various types of panel loops are added to the Communication Server e Panels are then added to the panel loops and CCTV cameras and monitors are added to the CCTV switchers e Card readers and keypads input points and output points are defined in the panel configuration Once these devices have been added to the Device Map and corresponding AD Vs defined they can be used in the definition of Access Areas Control Areas and Tracking and Muster Areas Device Maintenance Device configurations and ADV definitions can be edited from the Device Map Right click any device and select Configure from the menu Devices ca
267. ick OK to delete the cards or click Cancel to exit without deleting any cards NOTE By default you are asked to confirm card deletions How ever this setting can be changed in Workstation Defaults so that cards can be deleted without confirmation Change the setting by deselecting the Confirm Card Deletes check box on the Defaults tab of the Workstation Defaults window 4 If asked to confirm the deletion click Yes to delete the card or click No to cancel the deletion Associating Badges and Cards Badge designs or layouts are created using the Badge Layout Utility on the Configuration menu Once a badge design is created it can be associated with a card When the card is issued to a card holder the card holder s information is merged with the badge design resulting in an individual card Using a badge printer these badges can be printed to plain cards or used to create a photo ID They can also be printed on access control cards and or have magnetic stripes encoded resulting in an ID card that is also an access card Card Holders 457 Assigning a Badge to a Card 1 Open the Card database by selecting Card from the menu of the same name Er Card Iof x W Card Number mmj 15 Lauren Smith Smith Presley Doe Martin J Detail View Search and Sort Search Field All Criteria Edit Ja Print Badge Search For en Delete Sort By isctate Card Number x Update
268. ick the Release button to return the Alarm View to its normal functions Close To exit Alarm View click the Close button When acknowledging or clearing alarms you can select multiple contiguous alarms by holding down the SHIFT key on your keyboard and clicking the first and last alarms in the range Select multiple noncontiguous items in the list by holding down the CTRL control key while selecting each individual alarm Alarm View Right Click Menus Right click on any event in the upper pane of the Alarm View window and a control menu is made available The list of available commands depends on the type of alarm selected For example when working with inputs doors readers and panels you can acknowledge or clear an alarm open a default floor plan view live or recorded digital video from the time of the event rounded back to the nearest minute or add a note When working with a door alarm there are multiple ways to lock and unlock the door or restore time zone control to the door Filtering Alarm View It is often impossible to monitor all card reads or alarms from one view therefore WIN PAK 2 0 has several ways to filter events that appear in Alarm View You can select either card reads alarms or both Additionally by appropriately defining the Control Area you can select which devices are monitored in a given instance of the Alarm View M NUDNO JOSN 118 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Multiple A
269. if you wish to search by Card N umber or Name by selecting the appropriate radio button WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Click the Browse LJ button to open the Select dialog Esa Hubei Find what ee Searching by Card Number When searching by Card Number it is not necessary to make a selection from the Find Key field Card Number defaults into the field If the card number is known enter it in the Find What field If the card number is unknown enter one or more of the beginning digits of the number in the Find What field and click the Find button A list of all cards matching the criteria is displayed Searching by Name When searching by name select either Last Name or First Name from the Find K ey drop down list Enter the name if known or one or more of the first few letters of the name in the Find What field and click the Find button A list of all card holders with names matching the criteria is returned User Overview 111 Highlight the desired entry and click the OK button You are returned to the Locate dialog where the entry you selected is now displayed in the text field Locate by a Cud Humber E He Emih Lamr El Cc WY o a Click the View button to locate the card holder and view 0 the results 2 0 15 Sor h Lauren tet Lobe Eninance Fissde Whole Corpa OGM 161200 Hoat Gerd Gard ceerioecied Pian Lobby xj System Events The System Event win
270. ilable depends on the type of device being configured For example a supervised input point Action Group will include three sets of Actions triggered when the state of the point is Active Normal and Trouble Each state is assigned a priority and a Time Zone during which the actions apply If a state is assigned a priority of zero no actions apply The Time Zone defaults to Always meaning the action is always applicable Command files and sound files can be associated with an event The event can be written to a file and can be printed If a message is associated with the event the message appears in the Details window opened from the Alarm View window An Action Group can be edited from the Action Group database to make global changes to all AD Vs associated with a particular Action G roup Programming 195 If you wish to change an Action Group feature fora single ADV you must open the device from the D evice Map rename the Action Group Template or choose Custom and then edit the new template Once an Action Group except Custom has been created it can be used as a template for other devices of the same type The Action Group database is available by selecting Action Group from the Device option on the Configuration menu Configuration Window Help Define Ue sy d f Device Map Time Management gt a Abstract Device ADY Quick Start Wizard g Card Holder Badge
271. ilt option will define a camera as a PTZ pan tilt zoom camera Not selecting the Pan and Tilt option defines the camera as a stationary camera 6 After defining cameras click Finish The D evice window will display the newly defined RapidE ye devices Programming 217 Communication Loops Communication interfaces are programmed by adding them to an existing communication server on the Device Map You must have an available communication port or TCP IP address for each communication interface being added To add an interface open the Device Map from the Device option on the WIN PAK 2 0 Configuration menu E Device Bil x Devices E Command File Server Cor paniatan cana Panel Loop C 100 Gua conous MZAA D Soh CCTV Switcher Trac Isolate Modem Pool C 100 and 485 with HUB non ACK NAK pe Vide Delete Modem Pool 485 with HUB ACK NAK GSuLLLUeIBOJd RS 232 Connection Right click the Communication Server that you are connecting to select Add then select the interface of your choice from the pick list With the help of a configuration wizard WIN PAK 2 0 leads you through a series of dialogs and windows so that the information necessary to configure the communication interface can be entered Although the dialogs presented may vary depending on the exact loop or other communication connection being added typically you select or enter information on each dialog
272. ing Background Color to a Graphic ee ceecceee cee eeeeeeetneeeeeeeeeetaees 394 Positioning a Graphic IMaQe uu eee eee eeeteeetne tees eeee tee taeeie eter teeta 395 Deleting a Graphic Image 0 ee eeceeeete cece ere eerste ene eteeeteee taste seeeneeeeeeeaee 395 Badge Objects Badge Item Layering cece een eeeeeceeeceeteetteeteetteecetaaes 396 Changing the Layering Order of Badge Items erreen 396 Select Nextltem aage a A a ANa delitientilients 397 Configuring the Badge Printer sssssssssriesserssrssisrirrrrristiriesrsninrinrierienirrnnrnni ne 397 Configuring the Badge Printer Procedure essssssrererererenenerrne 398 VI Card Holders eiaeaen erneer aaae ae aa EEE E EE er AE 401 OVENI a ea A OEA as OO A eV Shea ede ee A ag ahaa 403 CaS a alent elelired aa a a A A sede 403 Cad Holders aie ae E vei al A Aa E a ae AAA 404 Configuring Card Holder Elements ssssssssssssssreriersrrsrisirrsrrnriernnisnnrnnrnninninrnerennee 405 Working with Card Holder Note Field sssessseserssrisiseiesrieisrrnerinisrrnernenrens 406 Adding Card Holder Note Fields 0 0 cccccccseeeeeeeecteceeeceestieeneseeeceetaetaees 408 Editing Card Holder Note Fields 0 eeeeccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeteseieeeeeecetiaetaee 408 Isolating and Deleting a Card Holder Note Field oo es seeeeereesesesenreees 409 Note Field Mask Properties ceceeceeeeceeeceeecteeetetee etter cee teeteeneeteeeeeeaeed 410 Mask DeSCriIDtlOn Six tetaivets louie Gates en ile ele ae eal shea R
273. ing placed on the floor plan is a link to another floor plan the Control Properties are slightly different Tech Level Properties Select the name of the target Floor Plan from the drop down list on the right side of the dialog Use the Open in same window option to indicate if when the onginating floor plan is closed the linked floor plan replaces it in the same floor plan window Text Properties If a Text object is being placed on the floor plan move the mouse pointer to the text box edge until the pointer changes to double arrows Then right click the mouse to bring a Font window instead of the Control Properties Using the Font dialog you can set the Font Font Style and Size for the text object Programming 315 Arranging Objects on the Floor Plan 1 Click and drag the AD Vs and other objects to the desired position on the Floor Plan background 2 To enlarge or reduce an object click it and drag a comer sizing handle until the object is the desired size 3 To rotate an object select it left click then right click and open the object s Control Properties Select the angle of rotation and click OK 4 Click Save 5 When you have added and arranged all objects click Save and Exit on the Floorplan Toolbox to close the Floor Plan window Editing a Floor Plan 1 Select the floor plan you want to edit from the Floor Plan Definition window and click Edit Du wuLULIDOId You can change the na
274. ing the Confirm Card Deletes check box on the Defaults tab of the Workstation Defaults window 3 When asked to confirm the deletion click Yes to delete the card or No to cancel the deletion Card Holders 453 Bulk Card Add and Delete Bulk Card Add can be used to get your system up and running quickly A range of cards can be added at one time provided all the cards have the same access level and activation expiration dates With Bulk Card Add you can add and activate hundreds of cards at one time All the cards added in a batch will have the same properties but can be edited later to suit the needs of individual card holders In setting up your system having several different batches of cards can provide flexibility For example a group of cards can be active immediately while another group of cards can be activated by date Each group can be assigned its own access level or they can be made available when you want to issue them to individual card holders An error message is displayed if you attempt to add duplicate cards to the system No existing cards will be modified Adding Cards in Bulk 1 Select Bulk Card Add from the WIN PAK 2 0 Card menu Card System Reports a Card fi Card Holder b Q L oJ Q 0 ui GQ Access Level fe Bulk Card Add Be Buk Card Delete The Bulk Card Add window is displayed next illustration 454 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 2 E
275. ion or angle for the graphic to appear on the badge Options include 0 Upright 90 Rotated 90 clockwise 180 Upside down 270 Rotated 90 counterclockwise To change the location or size of the box enter the information in the Top Left Height and Width fields Click Apply to view the changes or click OK to apply the changes and exit Deleting a Graphic Image To delete a graphic image right click on the graphic and click Delete Object from the subsequent menu The graphic and the graphic box are removed from the badge 396 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Badge Objects Badge Item Layering Badge items are layered as they are placed This is only noticeable if one item overlaps another item When an item is selected it is brought to the top of the layering order Layering can also be controlled using the Change Layering button on the Badge Layout toolbar In addition items on the badge can be selected from the Badge Item Layering dialog allowing the item properties to be edited without changing their layering order Changing the Layering Order of Badge Items 1 Click the Badge Item Layering t button on the Badge Definition window toolbar The Badge Item Layering window is displayed Dadga Element Layout Badge hem Lavenmg Ea 2 Select the object to be moved from the Badge Items list 3 Click the Up button to move the object up Click the Down button to move the object down Click the Top but
276. ion 8 02 level of firmware Installation Overview Given the complex nature of networked computer environments a tumkey system from Northern Computer Inc provides the simplest installation process These systems are delivered with software and hardware components installed on computer systems that meet the necessary requirements for running WIN PAK 2 0 However when WIN PAK 2 0 software is purchased for installation by the customer the hardware and software components must be propery installed and configured WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Architecture WIN PAK 2 0 is a multi part client server application comprised of three primary modules the D atabase Server Communications Server and User Interface These modules can be installed on different PCs be networked and connected via RPC and LPC This architecture allows extremely flexible implementation WIN PAK 2 0 program components run as full services in Windows X P 2000 NT No window is present in their normal operation D ebugging versions of the services which provide a console output window are also shipped with WIN PAK 2 0 However their use is reserved for error isolation and should not be used in everyday applications WIN PAK 2 0 provides a utility the System Manager to access the connection information The System Manager directs the User Interface and other remote servers to the Database Server System Setup Standalone Systems BEFORE installing WIN PA
277. is available via the Help button When you have finished all of the dialogs the Next button changes to Finish allowing you to save your entries and complete the setup process Because of the amount of information and the number of options adding panels to a large system can be very time consuming There are a few shortcuts that can speed up the process First of all note that once a panel has been defined it can be copied and then edited if necessary Second action groups act as templates once an action group is defined it can be used in defining all ADVs of the same type 246 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide In addition action groups can be copied and then edited allowing you to quickly create a variety of action groups to choose from Panel definitions are added to the Device Map They can be copied by right clicking and then dragging and dropping them onto a communication interface on the Device Map Adding Panels Adding a N 1000 Panel to a C 100 or 485 Loop Panel definitions are added to the Device Map With the Device Map open right click on a C 100 or 485 panel loop and select the Add N ew N 1000 Panel option E Device OF x EI rB C Server S C 100 loop Q Main Drop Line 9 Main Muster Drop Line Modem Pool ACK NAK Q East Coast Office warehouse e A a ea 485 Modem Pool Non 4 Parking Gate Configure 5 Q Parking Gate Isolate ansa EPR AS 929 nnm nork Delete
278. is displayed Badge Ekmen Layoul Blockin bim Daliniai Weri Mag Sipe Lat 25 oo 1S Fao Vel Mag Sipe Figh 5 00 ms ao VelPuchEenen 180 MS 140 40 Wert Purch Top 120 15 140 Aap 2 Click Add to call the Add Edit Blockout Item dialog Haii Fat Haam EE Misan hon bet edga of the printable aras i D Misia on lop edga o the peirada aita pal IIE Wirasa vith of bockout en be E Mikii haigh of Mecca dan Ad Lm J _ tae _ Enter a Name for the blockout area 4 Enter position settings for left edge top edge width and height of the blockout area You may have to measure an actual card and print a test to determine the exact position for the blockout Click OK Badging 349 Placing a Blockout on a Badge Layout To place a blockout on a badge layout right click and select Blockout from the menu When the Blockout Items Definition dialog is displayed select the desired blockout and click the Place button Deleting Objects Objects and elements placed on the badge layout can only be deleted by selecting them and using the right click menu D elete Object option Properties The Properties dialog available from the Badge Definition right click menu differs depending upon the item selected For example each of the following objects has its own set of properties e Badge Object Properties e Badge Bitmap O bject Properties e Badge Text Object Properties e Badge Photo O bject Properties e Badge
279. is restricted by the value set in your Workstation Defaults Defaults tab Maximum Records returned from the Database Find List Refer to Workstation Defaults in this chapter for additional information m Search and Sort Search Field All bi Criteria Search For Sort By Last Name b Search Field Select the name of the field for which you want to search Criteria Choose one of the operators from this list The available options vary depending on the database in which you are working but typically include G reater Than Less Than and Equal To Search For Type in a letter word phrase or numeric expression that you want to search for Sort By This selection designates the order in which the search results are displayed e g cards can be displayed by card number or last name Update List This button initiates a search based on the information entered in the Search and Sort fields M NUDNO JOESN 76 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Database Operations The action buttons on the right side of the database window allow you to perform a number of operations on the database records iL Add Opens a blank record window for entry of a new record Edit O pens an editable view of the selected record allowing the record to be changed Delete Removes the selected record from the database Isolating Database Records Some databases e g Time Zones have an Isolate function which
280. isted Holiday Group Record Ea Holidays Holiday Group Name Holidays Dffices Memorial Day Sunday May 27 2001 Independence Day Tuesday July 03 2001 every ye Labor Day Sunday September 02 2001 Thanksgiving Wednesday November 21 2001 Thanksgiving da Thursday November 22 2001 Christmas Eve Sunday December 23 2001 eve Christmas Day Monday December 24 2001 ev M Cancel Apply Help Click Add to include additional holidays in the group Highlight any holiday needing to be changed and click the Edit button The Holiday window opens allowing you to edit the holiday To delete a holiday selected it from the list and click the Delete button The holiday is instantly deleted no prompt or warning is displayed Programming 183 Isolating and Deleting a Holiday Group Holiday Groups are attached to panels within the access control system D eleting a Holiday Group not in use is simply a matter of selecting it and clicking the Delete button on the main Holiday Group database window If the Holiday Group is assigned to a control panel it can not be deleted until it is isolated from the panel Isolating Holiday Groups Use the Isolate function to determine where the Holiday Group is being used and to assign other Holiday G roups to those panels When attempting to delete a Holiday Group that needs to be isolated the following prompt indicates the group is in use WIH
281. it setting The count will be zeroed out when the operator clears the alarm Auto clear card reads limit per door The default setting allows for 100 of the most recent card events per door to be displayed in the alarm view Once the limit is achieved the oldest card event is automatically acknowledged and cleared as the new card event is received The automatic acknowledgement and clearing of the card event is logged into the history using no operator name Only when the operator manually acknowledges or clears the card event is the operator name logged into the history with the action A range of 10 to 500 card events can be set The Reader Point Cnt will only show a value of one for each card read The Auto clear limit will clear from the Alarm View card reads from the Reader that have exceeded the card read limit User Overview 109 Operations This Operations section provides details on the features and functions an operator may use on a daily basis to monitor and maintain the access control system The options described are available via toolbar buttons or the Operations menu shown below M NUDNO SN Locate Card Holder ia The Locate Card Holder function reports when and where a card was last used in the system Locating a Card s LastUse 1 Click the Locate Card H older toolbar button or select Locate from the O perations menu The Locate dialog is displayed L tit Cand Hakiti 2 Indicate
282. ition window and select Properties The Badge O bject Properties window is displayed 2 Click the Badge tab of the Badge O bject Properties window Badge Elemerd Layout Badge Colors Fosiioning Track 1 Teack 2 Track 3 Back gourd Image Ts E Seach width F Sibehch Height ie Rep Aspenet Aata F Tie imege Cm cs a 3 Click the Background Image field down arrow and select an image from the list NOTE Images can be added to the Background Image list by importing existing graphic files or by capturing live images using a computer equipped with a video camera and capture board 4 Select the Stretch Width and Stretch H eight check boxes to make the image cover the entire badge To fill as much of the badge as possible without distort ing the image select Keep Aspect Ratio 5 Click Apply to view the changes or click OK to apply the image to your badge and exit the Badge Object Properties dialog Badging 355 Importing Graphics for Backgrounds NOTE Importing existing bitmap graphics allows an infinite number of possibilities for background images For example you can scan a logo or photograph take photos with a digital camera or use a graphic design software program to create artwork When creating your background file remember the file must be saved as a Windows Bitmap bmp J PG jpg Targa tga or PCX pcx file For best results the file should be at least
283. k and enter it into this field The default should work fine Change this only if duplicate protocol points exist Create an ADV for the Schedule Server by clicking the Add button in the ADV area of the window upper right corner When you have completed the ADV click OK to return to the Schedule Server Configuration window Click N ext Then click Finish to add the Schedule Server to the Device Map Programming 211 Guard Tour Server In order to use the Guard Tour functions a G uard Tour Server must be configured on the Device Map Normally the Guard Tour Server is located on the same machine as the Database Server Configuring the Guard Tour Server 1 From the Configuration menu select Device gt Device Map The Device window will open igx Du wLULIDOId 2 In the Device window above right click on the Devices folder and select Add gt Guard Tour Server The Guard Tour Server Configuration window will be displayed Goad Tou Siei Conliguialie Marne urad Tia Served cs eS 212 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE 3 Enter a unique Name for the Guard Tour server using up to 30 characters 4 If desired enter a Description of the Guard Tour Server using up to 60 characters 5 Enter the Machine Name where the server is located This is usually the same machine as the Database Server 6 It is generally not necessary to change the Protocol End Point However there are multipl
284. k to other floor plans The link can provide a more detailed map or contain several ADVs communication room where panels modems and other devices are located that could not fit in the primary floor plan The Floor Plan Link will indicate alarms contained in the link to the main floor plan by color changes and blinking The Floor Plan Link can also 312 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide les 4 open as a separate window or in the same window as the main floor plan Text Used to provide and area on the floor plan for special instruction to be entered Command File Server Used with the command server ADV Provides the ability to select and run a command file ADV Rotation Tool Used to rotate the ADV to the desired angle Click on the desired ADV then click on the rotation tool and move the mouse to a corner of the ADV The pointer will change to the rotation symbol Adding an ADV to a Floor Plan Object Any ADV that is defined within the WIN PAK 2 0 System can be associated with an appropriate floor plan object 3 Click the Find ADV button on the G eneral tab of the Control Properties window to locate the ADV to be associated with this object The FindAD V dialog is displayed Find ADY x Name z Find Now E i Cancel 4 Click Find Now to activate the ADV list Large ADV lists can be reduced by typing in the first letter or letters of the name of the ADV in the Name box before clicking on Find Now Progr
285. ked point This is the action that the second point will take when the initial output group goes on On and Off Actions include No Action e Energize De Energize e Pulse e Pulse Off e Follow e Invert Follow Indicate the Off Action for the interlocked point This is the action the second point will take when the initial output group goes off Programming 273 Panel Configuration Readers Individual readers for the current panel are defined in the Readers configuration window The number of readers available depends on the type of panel being defined By default all available readers are active Also by default the D oor option is selected which provides the basic free egress interlocking if anti passback is not selected If anti passback is selected on the Options window the readers default to anti passback settings Panal Canhiguialinn Readeic 7 ALY gv fe Enable PN Li paj aj 2 Local Sltageon Tat eet Eai Ea amp Ite a F Delta 3 T Fese Epmis input hunt Bisha Input Shunt Desioa F Show gt Fims 1 Direct Pani Ly ou Fike Tire 10 sine lt Back Met gt Cone Hep 1 Deselect the door setting if the reader is not control ling an entrance Examples of using a reader only are a Muster Station Tracking Area exit or G uard Tour reader By deselecting D oor setting the interlocking diagram changes and a different type of ADV is used 274 WIN PAK 2 0
286. kground Color field 5 Click Apply or OK to apply the background color to your badge Due to differences in monitors printers and print media the printed badge color may be a different shade than the color displayed on your monitor 368 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Magnetic Stripe Encoding NOTE Track 1 2 and 3 tabs on the Badge O bject Properties window are used when magnetic stripe data is defined for the badge Some encoders and some cards do not support Track 3 Check your printer and card supplier before using this feature For each track specify the magnetic stripe format IATA ABA or TTS The industry standards for track format assignment are e Track 1 IATA The NR 2 WR and NR 6 WR read ABA on Track 1 e Track 2 ABA The NR 1 WR NR 3 WR NR 5 and the NR 5 KP read ABA on Track 2 Track 3 TTS The NR7 reads ABA on Track 3 Each track can have a number of data items The number of items is limited by the amount of data that will fit on a given track See your printer documentation for the number of characters that can be encoded using each format Only certain ASCII characters can be used depending on the format selected for that track IATA accepts the alphanumeric characters 0 9 and A Z plus various punctuation characters ASCII 32 95 Lower case letters are forced to uppercase as IATA doesn t understand lowercase If a field separator is required it is designated by t
287. king Est reader 2 Select an entrance or entrances 3 Click Add NOTE Entrances can be moved from one branch to another Right click an entrance and drag it to the desired branch Removing an Entrance or a Branch Right click on an entrance or branch to be removed and click Remove from the subsequent menu An entrance cannot be removed if it is assigned to an access level Programming 289 Renaming a Branch 1 Right click the branch you want to rename and select Rename 2 Type the new name in the Branch Name field on the Configure Branch dialog 3 Click OK Tracking and Mustering Areas Tracking and Muster reporting allows card holders to be located in the event of an emergency Tracking and muster areas are defined by mapping Tracking Areas and Muster Readers on a tree structure People are required to use readers when entering or leaving tracking areas In an emergency a muster is declared and people go to the muster readers and present their cards Du L LuesibOid Tracking Areas Tracking Areas are sections of a facility defined by selecting designated readers Card reads within this area are recorded and can be seen in the Muster view In case of an emergency card holders are instructed to go to a muster area and present their cards to a muster reader The operator can then tell if everyone has exited the tracking areas and if not where they last presented their card 290 WIN PAK 2 0
288. larm is gener ated requiring the ADV to be created 236 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide For 485 PCI Multiple Dropline Setup The ACK NAK check box is grayed out since this modem pool only accepts non ACK NAK 485 panels Select either or both buffer check boxes Buffer all panels on exit and Unbuffer all panels on startup to apply buffering instructions Select Buffer on Exit to automatically buffer all panels when the communication server is exited Select Unbuffer on Startup to automatically unbuffer all panels when the communication server is started NOTE Scheduled dialup buffering options are set in the Schedule database NOTE Logging in or out of the database server doesn t affect the communincation server The communication server runs until it is shut down either manually or by shutting down the operating system 6 Indicate the Time Zone in which the loop is lo cated Set the Panel Defaults I O Poll Interval defaults to 60 seconds Sets the frequency for the signal sent to the panel to verify communication and check the panel s input and output states Panel CMD Retry Count defaults to 3 seconds Sets the number of times a command is resent if the panel does not respond to the command Panel CMD Time Out defaults to 5 seconds Sets the amount of time allowed for sending a command before timing out Programming 237 8 Enter the Remote Phone Number for the loop 9 Selec
289. larm windows can be open at one time each with its own filter selections Once these views are closed the filter selections are cleared To save the control filter selection refer to the next section Linking Alarm View with a Floor Plan When a new Alarm View window is opened the default Filter Control settings both alarms and card reads from all devices are restored with no restrictions 1 In the Filters area of the Alarm View window select Alarm Card Read or Both depending on which messages you want displayed 2 To further narrow the information coming to this Alarm View click the Control button The Filter Devices window is displayed Filter Devices OF x O G Entrances and Readers O East Gate Parking Entrance Reader C East Lobby Left Entrance Reader O E East Lobby Left Exit Reader i O East Lobby Right Entrance Reader OB East Lobby Right Exit Reader O E Executive Floor Entrance Reader oO Executive Floor Exit Reader O Executive Floor HR Entrance Reader 3 Expand the tree by clicking on the plus signs User Overview 119 4 Select the branch or individual devices you want to monitor To view events from a particular branch right click on it and choose Select to include all devices in this area At this point only events from the selected devices are sent to the Alarm View You can choose as many or as few devices as you wish Filtering could be very useful for
290. llation 44 Forgiveness 255 G Generating and Printing Reports Access Area Report 485 Access Level Report 486 487 Attendance Report 488 489 Card History Report 492 496 Card Holder Tab Layout Report 500 Card Report 489 492 Command File Report 501 502 Control Area Report 503 Device Map Report 504 510 Floor Plan Report 511 512 Guard Tour Report 512 513 History Report 513 518 Holiday Group Report 519 Note Field Template Report 520 Operator Actions Report 522 Operator Level Report 526 574 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Operator Report 520 521 Schedule Report 527 Time Zone Report 528 529 Tracking and Mustering Area Report 530 Groups 256 Guard Tour 137 140 Guard Tour Server 209 210 211 212 Overview 33 Guard Tours 316 325 Check Point Alarms 322 325 Defining 317 325 Sequenced Check Points 321 322 Unsequenced Check Points 319 320 Guard Tour Database 316 H Hardware Basics 37 Hardware Options 259 Help Online 22 Holiday Groups 179 184 Defining Holiday Groups 180 181 Editing a Holiday Group 182 Isolating and Deleting a Holiday Group 183 134 Host Grant 258 Hue Saturation and Luminosity 364 I IATA 368 Importing a Language File 476 Initialization Command 258 262 Initializing Panels 280 284 Input Points Interlocking 279 Installation First Log In 54 Licensing and Registration 63 Overview 39 44 Procedure 46 62 System Requirements 37 44 Types of In
291. ly improving system performance Database Server The Database Server stores organizes and retrieves the information in the WIN PAK 2 0 database tables It makes this information available to other system components and allows the retrieval of information for editing and report generation The Database Server can be used at the same time by a communication server and multiple client workstations Introduction 33 The Database Server can be installed on the same PC as the User Interface or it can reside on another machine on the network Communication Server The Communication Server controls communication to and from the control panels and the D atabase Server It assigns priorities and resolves conflicts as information is routed from the various panel loops and devices to the Database Server and the WIN PAK 2 0 Client Workstation The Communication Server can be installed on the same PC as the client workstation or it can reside on another machine on the network Command File Guard Tour Muster and Schedule Servers In addition to the three main program modules WIN PAK 2 0 has four other servers the Command File Server Guard Tour Server Muster Server and the Schedule Server These servers are normally installed on the same machine as the D atabase Server In Windows X P 2000 NT they run as services and are transparent to the end user They are launched on start up and their task bar buttons are not visible The
292. m has the capability to have two concurrent User Interfaces More can be added until you reach the maximum specified by your licensing limit You can verify your client licenses in the User Interface by clicking Help License Contact your Northern Computers Sales Representative for additional licenses When you reach your licensing limit on clients you will not be able to open more on that database server EXAMPLE If you have five client licenses you can have five clients running simultaneously If you open a sixth client WIN PAK will notify you that you have exceeded your licensing and will not allow access to the database server You can install any number of clients but you can only log five clients on to the database server at any given time Communication Server WIN PAK 2 0 supports the use of a single Communication Server installed across a network After the D atabase Server and a User Interface have been installed the Comm Server can be installed 1 Exit any Windows programs that may be running Insert the WIN PAK 2 0 CD into the CD drive The installation program is self activating Select Install WIN PAK Installation 59 NOTE NOTE Select the Install Software option from the browser When prompted enter your name company name and CD Key Click Next A User License Agreement appears Click Yes to acknowledge that you understand and agree to the terms When prompted select Comm Server Only inst
293. matically positioned within the signature placeholder box Select the Positioning tab on the Badge Signature O bject Properties window to adjust the position of the placeholder relative to the top and left side of the badge by entering a value in millimeters in the Top and Left fields respectively Refer to the Positioning Badge Elements section of this chapter for details Deleting a Signature Placeholder To delete a signature placeholder right click on the placeholder and select Delete Object from the subsequent menu The signature placeholder is removed from the badge Badge Objects Bitmap Graphics Graphic images such as logos or symbols can be placed on the badge layout Simply create or scan an image and save it as a bitmap graphic file WIN PAK 2 0 accepts Windows Bitmap bmp JPG jpg PCX pcx or Targa tga files All graphics used in designing a badge are saved to the Badgelmage folder in the WIN PAK 2 0 directory O nce an image is added to the WIN PAK 2 0 database it appears in the Bitmap Image list on the Badge Layouts window and is available to all workstations Badging 393 Adding a Graphic Image to a Badge Layout 1 Click the Place Bitmap button on the Badge Definition window toolbar 2 Click in the badge layout area and drag the graphic box to the desired size and shape Move the graphic box by selecting it and dragging it to the desired position Resize the graphic box by selecting it an
294. me or description of the floor plan add or delete objects or change the properties of existing objects 2 To add ADVs or other objects select the type of object you want from the Floorplan Toolbox and drag it onto the Floor Plan 3 Select and right click the object and open its Con trol Properties Set the object properties as desired 4 When you have finished editing the floor plan click Save and Exit Deleting an Object from a Floor Plan Delete an object from a floor plan by selecting it and right clicking Select Remove Selected Control from the subsequent menu 316 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Guard Tours A Guard Tour is a defined series of check points that a guard must activate within a given amount of time Usually the check point is a reader where a card is presented but it can also be input points attached to other devices such as an egress button The check points can be sequenced they must be activated in a specified order or they can be unsequenced they can be activated in any order The tour definition sets the amount of time the guard has to get from one check point to the next Alarms can be defined and priorities set for early arrival late arrival unsequenced or missed check points A grace period can be defined for each check point allowing a certain number of minutes early or late to be accepted as a timely check in Guard Tour Database Guard tour definitions are stored in the Guard Tour d
295. minean a A a aa eens 29 Floor P aM MEW atar n a A T EN 30 Datta TOS E AE atvvagaand cyvat vicevtaba chet oid vererad 31 Multiple Server Design 0 0 cceecccesseeeceseeeceseeeeneesaeseeeeeeesaesneeeeeetaeseeenaetaaeeeas 32 Database Senet miai psa tia ehhh ade a AA ee 32 COMMUNICATIONS CER icicesiccivdadsdaaiacetetistive a oa ai 33 Command File Guard Tour Muster and Schedule Servers ccccecceseeeseeeeees 33 Installato Ni naana a a AA R Aaa E A N E TO 35 SySteM R guirementS oo ee asan aav aen eens anaE ERAEN k anan ARAA TEE KA EERI AADA FEAT iak 37 Operating System iernii ipine a a E E eei i 37 Hardware Basie Shmi nanait iam aaa a a eth od dads dala ana dies 37 Minimum Requirement Configuration eseese 37 Recommended Configuration sessssssesesersrrseistrerienierineiseinrinninrrnneni ernen 38 Performance Configuration ssssssssriesrsrresierssiretistrnristierineistinrinni strenne nren 38 Video Capture Card i sich ssiiedraderiiin lin hii AEA a i 39 Modems and Communication POMS ccccccceesseeesssecesssseceseseesssseeessaeesseaess 39 Bad Ging Printers ccc aii ces ole nites our irre ssn 39 Report Printen iiia e EE EEEN eons 39 EAE E E E A E A E E 39 8 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Installation Overview 0 0 ete te etter teen ete teed neste etnies ENSKE EE ENE 39 Architectre sco rch nee tee ole Aen he ait act Coheed SUE ae aed 40 SYSTEMS CUI O O cesta inh ches ced danetaat ensty sles taseatavieeden Ga 40 Upgrader anant h
296. n Group Action Message Description RS 232 Link OK The RS 232 port is communicating properly RS 232 Link Trouble The RS 232 port is NOT communicating properly Schedule Server Action Group Action Message Description Server OK The Schedule Server is operating normally Server Trouble The Schedule Server is not operating properly Verify that the WIN PAK Schedule Server is running in the WIN PAK Service Manager Tracking Server Action Group Action Message Description Server OK The Tracking Server is working Server Trouble The Tracking and Muster server is not working properly Verify that the WIN PAK Muster Server is running in the WIN PAK Service Manager Video Switcher CCTV Switcher Action Group Action Message Description CCTV Switcher OK The video switcher is working properly CCTV Switcher Trouble The video switcher is NOT working properly Programming 203 Servers Services NOTE This section describes the programming and configuration of servers or services that are configured via the Device Map to allow communication and control between various WIN PAK 2 0 devices and databases Communication Server In order to communicate with system devices including panel loops panels and CCTV switchers you must configure a Communication Server WIN PAK 2 0 supports one Communication Server During installation of the WIN PAK 2 0 software a communication server module is installed on a desi
297. n Modem Pool 240 244 485 PCI Multiple Dropline Panel Loops Adding 221 224 A ABA 368 Abstract Device Database 192 193 Abstract Devices 187 See also ADVs Abstract Device Definitions 188 Overview 29 Setting up 189 Access Areas 79 Defining 285 289 Access Control Overview 25 Access Control Management Overview 27 Access Levels 435 444 ACK NAK 238 Action Groups 194 197 Adding Panels 246 278 Admin Password 157 ADV Action Groups 197 202 ADV Control Functions 131 ADV Icons 309 320 ADVs Setting up 189 Alarm Handling System Defaults 106 108 Alarm Printer 100 Alarm View 115 121 Anti Passback 254 Associating Badges and Cards 456 458 AutoCard Lookup 121 124 Configuring 416 417 B Badge Definition Window Right Click Menus 346 Badge Object Properties 351 353 Badge Objects Badge Item Layering 396 397 Barcodes 379 399 Bitmap Graphics 392 399 Introduction 349 Photo Placeholders 377 399 Shapes 387 389 Signature Placholders 390 392 Text and Text Boxes 372 377 Badge Printer Configuring 397 399 Badge Shape Object Properties 387 388 389 Badging Badge Definition Window 344 399 Badge Layouts Database 339 343 Adding Badge Layouts to the Database 340 341 Copying a Badge Layout 341 Creating Badges 343 Editing a Badge Layout 342 Isolating and Deleting a Badge Layout 342 Overview 27 Badging Printers 39 Bitmap Image list 392 Buffer Commands 133 Bulk Card Add and Delete 453 45
298. n also be deleted from the system by deleting them from the Device Map Right click a device and click Delete However you cannot delete devices which Programming 187 have ADVs that are in use The Isolate option lets you identify where a device is used e g operator level floor plan control map and change its usage so that it can be deleted Abstract Devices An ADV is a logical representation of a physical device ADVs represent all the system hardware and services available for viewing and or control Similar to an icon an ADV is associated with an actual device in your access control system such as a panel or alarm ADVs provide a graphic interface for monitoring the status and controlling the actions of a physical device ADVs can be placed on Floor Plans for monitoring and controlling the WIN PAK 2 0 system In operation the ADV signals the state or status of the object by blinking and or changing color A sound file can also be associated with the ADV to signal a change in state GHuLLLUeIBOJd Each ADV has a control user interface that allows the user to execute functions available for that object Right clicking the ADV opens the control menu D rag and drop functionality is available in some cases For example a camera object can be selected then clicked and dropped onto a monitor object to initiate a switch Colors blinking and other ADV properties can be edited and the ADV can be resized and rotat
299. n blocks is more emphatic or contrasting clarifying information Other conventions are listed in the following table Convention Method Bold In procedures indicates the name of a screen object such as a button or menu command Click Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button usually the left once Typically used to make a selection D ouble click Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button usually the left twice Right click Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button usually the right once 22 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Online Help In addition to this manual WIN PAK 2 0 has online Help organized into functional sections which should make it easy to find the information you need Help is designed to be viewed in the Microsoft HTML Help Window If you do not have the HTML Help components installed on your computer Help will be viewed in your default browser Use the Table of Contents Index or Search function to locate the information you need In the left pane click the tab for Table of Contents Index or Search to find the information you need Press F1 to get context sensitive help at a dialog box or window You can also click a dialog box Help button to access context sensitive help When viewing help you can maximize or resize the help window to suit your requirements Click the Hide or Show navigation icons to view or hide the Table of Contents Index and Search tab
300. n ports Tape backup drive 1 parallel port badging to be done on workstation 15 SVGA color monitor 1024 x 768 256 color Supported O perating Systems Microsoft Windows XP Windows 2000 Professional Server Advanced Server with Service Pack 2 Windows NT 4 0 with Service Pack 6a Windows 98SE Workstation only 38 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE Recommended Configuration This is the recommended hardware configuration for basic access control including badging for systems with 1 to 100 readers up to 5 000 cards and up to 8 communication ports It can be used for a stand alone system a workstation or a server Additional RAM will improve performance Pentium III 700Mhz CPU 256 megabytes of RAM 6 gigabyte SCSI hard disk 2 serial communication ports 8 gigabyte SCSI tape backup 1 parallel port 2 for badging 17 1024 x 768 true color monitor Operating Systems Microsoft Windows XP Windows 2000 Professional Server Advanced Server with Service Pack 2 Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 6a Performance Configuration This configuration is recommended for systems using more than 16 communication ports It is suitable for systems using up to the system capacity for readers up to 25 000 cards and 64 communication ports It is suitable for a stand alone system or a server Pentium 4 2G hz CPU 512 megabytes of RAM 18 gigabyte 15 000rpm SCSI hard disk 2 serial communication ports 20 gigabyte SCSI tape backup 1
301. n the Configuration menu i Abstract Device ADV F The main database window next illustration opens listing all existing AD Vs Programming 193 This list can be searched and sorted by Name and Type E gt Abstract Device OF x Perf C 100 loop g Command File Server Server Communication Server Server E Computer Monitor CCT Duress Alarm at Local Storage Input T Detail View r Search and Sort Operations Search Field All he bad Criteria Edit Ei Copy Search For n Delete GHuLLLUeIBOId Sort By Isolate Name Update List Ennthepote ADVs can be edited by selecting them from the database list and clicking Edit However they can only be created and deleted from within the Device Map WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Action Groups An Action Group is a set of actions assigned to a device when its ADV is defined The Action Group defines what will happen in response to a given event For example a Loop Action G roup definition defines what happens when the state of a communication loop changes from OK to Trouble or from Trouble back to OK Responses can include sending a command file when an event is received acknowledged or cleared and or the activation of a digital camera and or sound file Additionally a message can be attached which appears in the Alarm Details view when the initiating action occurs The list of trigger events ava
302. n the card 424 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide i inai d molder Importing a Card Holder Photo 1 Open the Card Holder database from the WIN PAK 2 0 Card menu 2 Select the desired card holder and click Edit to open the Card Holder Record window 3 Click the Card Biometrics tab of the Card Holder Record window NOTE If you are adding a new card holder you must first enter the card holder s name Caid Haiii 4 Click the Import button on the Card Biometrics window The Import Image window is displayed next illustration Card Holders Import Image Ea OK x Cancel Open T Lock Aspect Aspect Ratio 1 2 Compression 5 Click Open and navigate to the folder containing your photo files 6 Select the correct file and click Open The image is displayed in the Import Image dialog 7 Select Whole Image to import the photo without changes To crop the image deselect Whole Image and a cropping guide appears on the photo SJOP JOH Pues WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 8 Move and stretch the cropping guide to the proper position To maintain a consistent ratio of height to width enter the Aspect Ratio When Lock Aspect Ratio is selected the cropping tool will maintain the same relation of height to width no matter how much of the image is selected Adjust the Compression setting at this point if desired 100 is the least compression and the best quality 30 is the most
303. n the lab but not present in the hospital To take another example note the following diagram M M Ben 1 9 are Tracking Readers A B C D are Tracking Areas e M is the Muster Reader E is the Exit Reader If we focus on the B and C areas shown above we can consider those areas in two ways Not Nested If they are not nested then Readers 3 and 6 define Area B because they allow access to Area B Reader 5 defines Area C Nested If we consider these same areas to be nested anyone in Area C is ALSO in Area B In which case Readers 3 5 and 6 define Area B and Reader 5 is also in Area C There can be many nesting levels There could be another room inside Area C which would be nested under both B and C The diagram has the following Tracking Area definitions when nested Tracking Area A Readers 1 3 4 5 6 8 9 Presenting a card at any of these readers shows the person in Tracking Area A Readers 2 and 7 both leave Tracking Area A Programming 293 Tracking Area B Readers 3 5 6 Reader 4 leaves Tracking Area B Tracking Area C Reader 5 Reader 6 leaves Tracking Area C Tracking Area D Reader 8 Reader 9 leaves Tracking Area D Reader E Exit Reader An Exit tracking area can be defined if desired If left blank all readers not assigned a tracking area are considered exit readers Designate an exit reader which card holders are required to use on leaving the facilit
304. nce to the next screen in the setup process The Information screen is displayed while the program verifies that all the services are stopped WIM PAK 2 0 ngho ko thom hit paard he metalation vl detain Tyu ae cuei running srw od the pera bu thuki warily all banans hava Hopped belori The raaior pig ah baidh het setae bo b stoppad baiza can ronirus 3 Click Next to continue installation The second Welcome screen will be displayed next illustration 7 rt Y J ct O 48 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Inhertimation fo the Instal Progam for WIHPSK 2 0 PAE 20 is broaghi lo pou bye Ire 4 Click Next and the User License Agreement window is displayed urlPern Compubers Erd User Liceenii Agrement Please need the folkoeing Leena Agee Presi he PAGE DOWN key to tos Pa tec of ihe agaian SER MOK OBCLOSURE AND LICENSE AGFEEMENT moment Thi piene n a popisy of Hothan Computers irz E g bp oopa and bade ascet his keensed HOT SOLD lor uee on a corms fired it boari onks on the Condition thal yis agit ta thi USER DISCLOSURE AHD UCERSE AGREEMERT Reed Th F you da nod in the wed m thee pissa mkan the cealedd omeia UMOPEHED to yous appin arg meise Olen Aonuman oe ges bo thee bernie Goria Aupeenent ri wath the inlallstion and tegetiebon of the aoftrsans bp calling 1 838 234576 Da a accept ha bere of hi pi Licinii Agecernent IF pou chops AEJECT inghalistion wi Torna WHPR 2
305. nction available depends on the type of object selected For example alarms can be acknow ledged and cleared from the floor plan Following is a list of typical ADVs and their control functions ADV Control Functions Alarm View CCTV Switcher Comm Server Command File Server C 100 Local Connection C 100 Remote Connection Doors Event View Input Points Links Modem Pool CCTV Monitor N 485 Remote Dialup N 485 Local Connection Output Points amp Groups Panel Pan Tilt Camera Readers Stat Camera Open Send Time amp Date Send Camera Titles Camera to Monitor Switch Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Note With digital video exclusively opens the digital video operation window Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Run Command File Buffer All Panels Unbuffer All Panels Set Retry Count Set Command Timeout Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Buffer All Panels Unbuffer All Panels Set Retry Count Set Command Timeout Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Connect Remote Disconnect Remote Unlock Lock Shunt Unshunt Pulse Timed Pulse Restore to Time Zone Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Open Acknowledge all Alarms Clear all Alarms Shunt Unshunt Restore to Time Zone Open Hang Up Modem Reset Modem Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Buffer All Panels Unbuffer All Panels Set Retry Count
306. nd Time in File Name will automatically create the default file name using the selected option The File Name box displays the name as it will be written to your file destination Previewing Reports To view a report before printing it click the Print Preview button on the report s detail window Use the Zoom tool to enlarge the page view The Next Page and Previous Page buttons allow you to scroll through a multiple page report 484 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE Printing Reports Clicking the Print button on a report detail window sets off two actions First the report generates in the background For longer reports you will see the Print Progress status window running the report Next a standard Print dialog is displayed where you can indicate the printer to which the report should be sent After setting your print parameters click the OK button to send the report to the designated printer The report prints and you are returned to the report detail window Reporting from Archived Databases WIN PAK 2 0 reports can be generated from archived databases as well as from its active database Select the Run from Archived Database check box on the report s detail window to pull report data from an archived database The Run from Archived Database check box will be grayed out if the archive service is not running After starting the archive server the operator must re login for the User Inter face to conn
307. nding to computer polling The control panel is responding normally to computer polling Control panel primary power has been lost Control panel primary power has been restored GHuLLLUeIBOId Message Description Auxiliary Port Failure Auxiliary Port Normal External 5 Volt Alarm External 5 Volt Normal Ground Fault Alarm Ground Fault Normal Low Voltage Alarm Low Voltage Normal Panel Communication Alarm Panel Communication Normal Panel Reset Poll Response Alarm Poll Response Normal Primary Power Failure Primary Power Normal Tamper Switch Alarm Tamper Switch Normal The auxiliary communication port is not working The auxiliary communication port is working The 5 volt reader power is shorted The 5 volt reader power is normal An input point is shorted to earth ground causing a ground fault An input point that caused the ground fault has returned to normal Battery voltage is low Battery voltage is normal Communication with the control panel has been lost Communication with the control panel has been restored The control panel has been reset The control panel is not responding to computer polling The control panel is responding normally to computer polling Control panel primary power has been lost Control panel primary power has been restored The control panel service door is open The control panel service door is closed 202 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide RS 232 Actio
308. new settings 104 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Restore Restore options relate to the positioning and opening of windows on the WIN PAK 2 0 desktop dork ahon Cal alt Restore Main Window Position and Size Saves the size and position of the main User Interface window as it appears prior to a user login Operator Restore Main Window Position and Size Saves the size and position settings of the main WIN PAK 2 0 window for the operator Restore Window Position and Size Saves each operator s settings for the secondary windows e g main database windows floor plan views and control maps At login secondary windows return to the size and position set when a given operator logged out Reopen Windows At logon Reopen Windows reopens any windows that were open when the operator last logged out User Overview 105 System Defaults Selecting System D efaults from the WIN PAK 2 0 System menu allows you to change certain system settings relating to ADV access card number length and alarm handling Settem Config Deteults Alm Handing iY Grant al opasa week lo AO notin Corio Arai Maem Length of Card Miebers System Bepoto Copfigquest F Opera g Operates Laval Jj workstation Dalat M NUDNO PSN Co J co j a ooe Use the Defaults tab to set the following defaults Grant all operators access to ADVs not in Control Tree All ADVs that are not added to the Control Areas are a
309. nfiguration Cameras COTW Gricha Corsa 1 5 No aby 6 No Ady 7 Ae AD B Ho AD 3 Ho AD 10 Ha aD 11 Ho i 12 Ho apy 13 No D li Ho apiy EJ AD p s T Cares 2 Ae Lobby BuLLLUeIBOJd Coed to 9 Select the check boxes next to the cameras to be controlled by the CCTV Switcher 10 Select the Pan and Tilt check box if the camera supports pan and tilt functions 11 Enter a unique Camera Title for the camera 12 An ADV must be configured for each camera se lected Click the Add button in the ADV area of the window upper right corner Once an ADV is established for the camera the Pan and Tilt option cannot be changed unless the ADV is deleted 13 After selecting all the cameras needed and setting up ADVs for each click the N ext button to advance to the CCTV Switcher Configuration Monitors win dow 228 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide CCTV Switcher Configuration Monitors Y Swatches Configuration Mono 1 J d g 7 J 14 Select the check boxes next to the monitors to be controlled by the CCTV Switcher 15 Create an ADV for each monitor selected Click the Add button in the ADV area of the window upper right corner 16 On retuming to the CCTV Switcher Configuration window click the N ext button then click Finish on the final configuration window to save the new switcher and the AD Vs for the switcher cameras and monitors Progr
310. nfiguration menu The Translate Menu Text window opens on your desktop EE Tianclatia Hara T eat Total Ling of Teit GELI Trais D Oia of Dabs o Th Dow Control El chh Al Alors El Cheer A Adore El wWiricck El HL oi El Biz Pae EJ behead El WUrahurt El Sar CE El bT ird Fikh El Ferai To Teast Zort a r a S D Show only uiraiaad Rena D Match cae oF The Total Line of Text box indicates the total number of lines that can be translated The Translated box indicates the number of lines that have been translated The O ut of Date box indicates the number of dialogs that do not match exactly to an upgrade of WIN PAK 2 0 This number will decrease after each dialog has been edited Each Out of Date dialog will be displayed by a light red highlight The Out of Date and ID column indicates the number of fields that do not match exactly to an upgrade WIN PAK 2 0 uone suedi 472 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 2 Double click a menu item to open its Translate Text dialog Tranclate Teri 3 Type the replacement text in the Translation area of the dialog The amp indicates that the character immediately following is underscored for use as an Alt Key entry hot key Care should be used not to duplicate the same character in the grouping 4 The Apply to all identical originals check box in the lower left corner of the window globally applies the tranlated phrase throughout the system and in doing so the Transla
311. nfiguring Rights Summary Chart 86 Configuring the Badge Printer 397 399 Contact Information Corporate Headquarters Technical Support 18 Continuous Card Reads 257 Control Areas Adding Devices and Branches 299 303 Defining 298 303 Removing Devices and Branches 303 Control Map 134 135 Initializing Panels 281 Controlling the Camera 125 127 Conventions 21 Creating a Text File for Translation 464 465 Creating Badges 343 Custom Access Levels 441 D Daily Operations 109 147 Alarm View 115 121 AutoCard Lookup 121 124 Command Files 136 Control Map 134 135 Event View 112 115 Floor Plan View 128 133 Guard Tour 137 140 Live Monitor View 124 127 Locate 109 111 System Events 111 Tracking and Muster 140 147 Data Trees Overview 31 Database Server 33 Database Maintenance Database Backup and Restore Utility 536 543 Backup 537 540 Restore 541 543 Schedule 540 Database Limits and Capacities 544 547 Display of Warnings and Alarms 547 Multiple Hard Drive Setup Considerations 546 547 Single Hard Drive Setup Considerations 545 546 Deleting History from Database 535 536 Overview 533 Removing Deleted Database Records 533 534 Database Reports Printing 78 Database Server Overview 32 Index 573 Database Windows 73 78 Database Operations 76 78 Database Record Lists 74 Searching and Sorting Database Lists 75 Viewing Detail Database Records 74 Date separator 412 Decimal placehol
312. ng 311 i HE Group Used with relay group ADV Provides Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Energize De energize Pulse Timed Pulse and Restore To Time Zone control Switcher Used with the CCTV switcher and digital video ADVs Provides Acknowledge All Alarms Clear All Alarms Send Time amp Date Send Camer Titles and Camera To Monitor Switch control As a digital video server the digital video operations window can be accessed Monitor Used with the monitor ADV Provides Acknowledge All Alarms and Clear All Alarms control Stationary Camera Used with the stationary CCTV and digital video camera ADVs Provides the ability to click and drag to a monitor ADV for camera switching When the ADV is a digital camera a digital popup is displayed Reader Used with the reader ADV Provides Acknowledge All Alarms and Clear All Alarms control Pan Tilt Camera Used with pan tilt camera ADV Provides the ability to click and drag to a monitor ADV for camera switching When the ADV is a digital camera a digital popup is displayed Gu LLLuesiBbO1d Event View Used to display an Event View that can be limited to a defined control area allowing the operator to see only what the viewer is programmed to view Alarm View Used to display an Alarm View that can be limited to a defined control area allowing the operator to see and control only what the viewer is programmed to view Floor Plan Link Used to lin
313. ng sure its extension is one of the follow ing bmp jpg tga pcx Double click the file name or highlight it and click Open The graphic file is added to the Bitmap Image list and is now available for use with any badge design either to be placed in a bitmap box or as a badge background image Adding Background Color to a Graphic A background color assigned to a graphic will only show if the bitmap is smaller than the graphic placeholder If you have selected both Stretch Width and Stretch Height but not Keep Aspect Ratio the graphic automatically fills the entire box and no background color is visible 1 Right click inside the graphics box and select Prop erties Select the Colors tab of the Badge Bitmap Object Properties window 2 Click the Background Color browse button to open the Color window Badging 395 3 Select the desired color swatch or create and select a custom color for the background Click OK The new background color is displayed in the Background Color field Select the Transparent Background check box to make the graphic background transparent Click Apply to preview the background color with the graphic Click OK when finished Positioning a Graphic Image 1 Right click inside the graphic box and select Proper ties Select the Positioning tab of the Badge Bitmap Object Properties window Indicate the H orizontal and Vertical Position of the graphic Select the Orientat
314. nother supplier additional SOFTWARE such as but not limited to operating systems and or system utilities compilers or computer languages It will be the user s obligation to complete and register any other SO FTWARE agreements as required by the manufacturer Northern Computers Inc assumes no responsibility for any other manufacturer s SOFTWARE Contents WElICOME airasia a gutradsen amesn ernest aan panes A a 17 ContactUs innn ioe a eh ean casauotasaugs seaucoaneaudenaecudengeumteameaanincriacaecraactnes 18 ADOULTAIS GUIDGs eniseenitnetd micinind ial A ni tea nae as 19 GONVENUONS te chacests EA A E E maida bocboatateiaa eras 21 Online Help tar aa waitin aden ain ean akina dads Bias 22 AOC Oke ETAn A A A A E T olan aee tates 23 Access Control with WIN PAK 2 0 ssessssssssssrensnennrnnnsnnnnrnnsnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnns 25 WIN PAK Z O REQtures inia n a O E OTIN 26 Database Management eeccsceesecseceneceeeeeeeeeneeeeetaeseaeetaeeteeeseetaeeaesnaeeeas 26 Access Control Management ou cece eceece rere etteeteeseetesteettesieeneetaes 27 Bad GING nE aE E ee ati A ity ghisieun arial a baatiasnies anaes 27 ards and Card Holder asic eves nonan A E wee 28 Flexible Views and Control Features ccccceccesccsssssecsssseessssseessesseessesseesseaees 28 COMMUNIGAHONS ict fever cck EE A A A 29 Software Concepts a iie atest sea e aa aa a ahaaa aa aaa Ra EAEAN 29 Wser Eate E E E A E E A ETE 29 Abstract DEVICES
315. nowledged and cleared from either the Control Map Floor Plan or Alarm view Badging WIN PAK 2 0 gives you the tools to create high quality photo IDs Badge designs can be created incorporating photos signatures barcodes magnetic stripe encoding and logos or other art work These can be printed on access control cards incorporating two security measures into one WIN PAK 2 0 includes a full featured badge layout utility for the design creation and printing of badges T his includes two sided printing and bulk printing of badges Magnetic stripe encoding up to three tracks barcoding multiple images and signatures can be placed on a badge Video images can be captured in real time or imported from another source High resolution digital images photo cropping and ghosting of images are all supported 8 Cc a ct J 28 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Cards and Card Holders WIN PAK 2 0 allows the programming of card and card holder information Forty user defined note fields are available for entering information into the Card holder database The note fields are arranged on user defined tabs so that the information can be organized to suit the user s particular needs Multiple photos signatures and cards can be used for Human Resources asset tracking or other purposes Multiple cards can be assigned to a single card holder For example a long range radio frequency tag may be issued for drive in entry throug
316. ns menu The AutoCard Lookup Waiting for card read window is displayed ET Autocad Lookup Wabng hee cand ped 2 Set the Priority threshold All reads that have a higher priority lower number than this threshold will display card information on the lookup window The status of a given card read event is set in the reader s Action Group User Overview 123 3 To further narrow the number of card reads which produce a card lookup click the Control button to open the Filter D evices window Filla Darvices E Dy Entarcer ari Fagit OD East Gate Pasting Entiance Resda OB Eset Lobby Lett Eii Raada O E Ear Lobby Right Enkanca Fead O E Ear Lobbp Right Ei Raada O i Estiva Fino Enitance Reade O E Eridi Fissi sat Fsacder O E Exe cuiess Flo HA Eniras F aai M NUDNO SN 4 Expand the tree by clicking on the plus signs 5 Right click the readers you want to monitor and click Select 6 Click OK to return to the Waiting for Card Read window I Show Note Fek As acard meeting the specifications you have set is presented at a reader the AutoCard Lookup window displays the appropriate information 7 Select the Buffer check box to freeze the current card on the lookup screen while saving any subse quent card reads in memory 124 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE 8 Click the Next button to display the next card read results while remaining in the buffer mode D
317. nssquence Guerdtowen O00 138 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Select the Guard Tour to be started and click the OK button The tour is now shown in the main Guard Tour window and the Select window is automatically presented Fare Ey Cord Murer 4 Use the Select window to indicate the card being used to validate the reader check points If the first check point is a reader the tour can begin when the card is presented at the first check point Select the Card Number to be used and click the OK button You are returned to the main Guard Tour window where the tour selected is now dis played in the list User Overview 139 Select Cancel if the card number is not known A guard tour can be started by the check point or reader When a card is not specified the first quali fied read at the reader once the tour is started is considered the card to be monitored by the tour TouNane Gud Name Het Check Pond Lesi Check Poot Tane Lel Tor Hest Check beperel Gus Wen Lobb E wit M NUDNO SN 5 Select the Record View Visible check box to see the required check points for the tour chosen Sequenced and unsequenced check points are listed on separate tabs hus Tea Leck Momie Sequenced DheckPowds Uniequenced CheckFois here have ool 001 2 wan Lobe Erirsnce Maara at ii ti 2 mei hour check piiri wheal fiat an w d Gaui tou chack poni E ar t ii ti As the tour prog
318. nter the first card number of the range to be added in the Start Number field 3 Use the End Number field to enter the last card number in the range to be added 4 Set the Status to Active Inactive and Trace are also available 5 Select a valid Access Level for the cards 6 Select an Activation Date card status must be inactive and or an Expiration Date for the cards Both these fields are optional Card Holders 455 NOTE CAUTION The Activate and Deactivate Cards schedule must be set to implement the changes Refer to the Schedule section in Time Management 7 When you have entered the required information click OK to add the cards to the system or click Cancel to exit without adding the cards After clicking OK use the bar at the bottom of the window to gauge the progress of the Bulk Card Add DO NOT close any WINPAK services or turn off the computer while the Bulk Card Add is in progress Bulk Card Delete Remove a large number of cards from your system quickly by using the Bulk Card Delete feature You can remove any group of consecutive card numbers at one time 1 Select Bulk Card Delete from the Card menu The Bulk Card D elete window opens Bulk Card Delete E Fi Gist Humber Ered Muneber Progesss mm ILe 2 Enter the first and last card number to be deleted in the Start Number and End Number fields b Q L oJ Q 0 ui 456 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Cl
319. ntered as well The D escription field can hold up to 60 characters This descrip tion will be helpful in attempting to select this ADV when setting up other aspects of your access control system Select a Default Floorplan to be associated with the device optional The floor plan specified here can be opened from an Alarm View by right clicking a message from this device and selecting Floor Plan If other ADVs of this type have been defined select an existing Action Group from the drop down list All the properties of the selected Action Group are applied to this ADV If this is the first ADV of its type click Add just beneath the Action Group field Enter a name for the Action Group and press the EN TER key on your keyboard Define the priorities command files and other properties for the selected action under the Action Group These become part of the Action Group and are available for other ADVs of this type Any changes made to this Action Group are applied to all associated AD Vs using this Action Group name If you want to to define a unique action group for this ADV then select Custom for the Action Group and define the priorities command files and other properties Programming 191 10 11 12 Select an Action from the list e g Server OK or Server Trouble This list varies depending on the type of device being configured Refer to the ADV Action Groups section of this chapter for exam
320. ntry was granted Programming 199 Command File Server Action Group Action Message Description Server OK Server Trouble The command file server is working properly The command file server is NOT working properly Verify that the WIN PAK Command File Server is running in the WIN PAK Service Manager Communication Server Action Group Action Message Description Server OK Server Trouble Door Entrance Action Group Action The communication server is working properly The communication server is NOT working properly Verify that WIN PAK Communication Server is running in the WIN PAK Service Manager Message Description Anti Passback Violation Card Not Found Door Ajar Door Normal Door Troubled Expired Card Forced Open Host Grant Card downloaded Host Grant Door unlocked Invalid PIN Invalid Site Code Invalid Time Zone Trace Card Valid Card A card was denied entry because it has already been used going in out without properly going out in A card was denied entry because it was unknown to the reader The door has been left open longer than it should be based on a valid entry GSuLLLUeIBOJd The door position is now closed The door status cannot be accurately displayed due to tampering A card was denied entry because it has been expired by date The door is in the alarm mode due to invalid entry Access was granted to the user if event is within t
321. nts to be installed MDAC Microsoft Data Access Components Used for the DB server interface to the MDB file and by the System Manager Your installation may require MDAC or Microsoft D ata Access Components be installed While this program upgrades all of your data access components our main concern is the Access OD BC drivers 7 rt Y J ct O The MDAC components are considered part of the operating system and therefore are never removed even when a full uninstall is performed DAO Data Access Components Used by the System Manager to compact and copy the database file Installed when the D atabase Server is installed The installation will install version 3 5 of DAO Your WIN PAK 2 0 installation may require Microsoft Data Access Objects to be installed The installation will be transparent and the installation will determine if a reboot is necessary INSTALLATION NOTE These components are not considered part of the operating system and therefore could be accidentally uninstalled at a later date If uninstalled the WIN PAK 2 0 System Manager utility will not function properly and DAO 3 5 must be reinstalled HHCTRL OCX HTML Help control Used to access the help system on PCs with older versions of Internet Explorer This control is installed when the User Interface is installed WIN PAK 2 0 uses state of the art online CHTML help This online help system requires that several new components be installed on
322. ol Map toolbar button or select Control Map from the Operations menu WD ies Lathy Eniste Reade WD wes Lobby Et Ainai ey inp WES Guard tou check pnr E ast BES Guard tour check point we AB Supe B Servers O E Command Fle Sarai E Conmricaten Serre GEJ Guard Tou Senn OS Schedis Seren Server Cie bre anid must E Vaden HA Laca Stet on Ta Biisi J Huth Reads Ea Gale FD Muste Reade wet Gate M NUDNO SN 2 Expand the tree by clicking the plus signs to display the devices that you want to control 3 Right click any device to open its control menu then select the desired command 136 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Command Files NOTE Text files containing device instructions are stored in the Command File database and run from the Command File option on the WIN PAK 2 0 Operations menu Command Files are defined by assigning a name and description to one or more commands then saving it as a Command File A designated command file can be activated manually or when an event takes place For example a Command File can be activated automatically on receiving acknowledging or clearing an alarm as defined in the Action Group Specific command files may be restricted by operator level rights Command Files are defined in the Command File database and a Command File Server must be defined on the Device Map The Command File Server must be running in order for Command Files to be executed Runnin
323. ol in the Device Map B E Communication Sane 2 2 C100 loop m ig Man Drop Line i Maan 4 rete Diop Line ES Est Cos Dilican T Local Stove 1H Siena Fe Modem Pood Kon AKTAR EE Pakiy Gate Essl amp Parking Gate Math BABE 7 eer AYN eet Programming 245 Panels Planning is essential when configuring panels The accumulation and understanding of a great deal of information about the setup of your access control system is required This includes card formats the type of readers and keypads used and numerous options for input and output points Panel Configuration Wizard With the help of a panel configuration wizard WIN PAK 2 0 leads you through a series of dialogs and windows that guide you through the panel definition process This is a much more detailed process than the basic system configuration wizard At each step in the setup process simply select or enter the information that applies to your system and is necessary to configure the specific communication interface being set up GSuLLLUeIBOId Although the dialogs presented may vary slightly depending upon certain selections made typically you select or enter information on each dialog and click the Next button to move to the next window The Back buttons on the dialogs allow you to review or edit information you have already added Click the Cancel button to exit the setup process without saving any information entered System documentation
324. ole Company H East Coast New York 29 Local Office Local Storage on 1st Street TZ Always On o Bg Parking Card Holders 445 Working with Cards The Card database contains information on all the cards that have been entered in your WIN PAK 2 0 System Cards can be entered into the database one at a time or via the Bulk Card Add feature Required information when adding a card includes the card number its status and access level Additional optional information includes activation and expiration dates action group assignment PIN and custom access level Open the Card database from the main WIN PAK 2 0 Card menu or click the Card toolbar button Card System Reports ec i Card Holder d Access Level AB Bulk Card Add J Buk Card Delete The Card database list displays existing cards with their associated number access level card and badge print status as well as the activation date and expiration date if they ve been assigned The Card database list also shows the first and last name of the card holder for those cards that have been assigned to a card holder SJ P OH pIe 446 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE Card Number The detail view of the Card database has two tabs Card Properties and Badge When activated card information can be edited in the detail view The Badge tab allows a badge layout to be selected for the front and back of the card W
325. om the Floor Plan Panel Configuration Options reset all of your panel s program ming Itis recommended that you select all options check the Select All check box when sending the Panel Configuration Options Programming 281 Initializing a Panel from the Control Map 1 Select Control Map from the WIN PAK 2 0 Opera tions menu 2 Right click the desired panel within the Control Map tree and select Initialize FE Control Map Iof x Ack All Alarms IES AliAletns Alarm Sounder Communication F Elevator Initialize Entrances and F encelllritralization Inputs Buffer Servers Unbuffer E Command File Server E Communication Server Fed Guard Tour Server e Schedule Server a 3 To send all options displayed on the Panel Initial ization Options dialog click Select All This will replace all panel programming with the new informa tion being sent If you just want to update selected information do not select Panel Configuration O ptions Select the check box for each type of information you want to send and click OK GHuLLLUesBOId 282 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Initializing a Panel from the Floor Plan 1 Panel Initialization Dpteons x 2 oox jo Select Floor Plan from the O perations menu and open the Floor Plan view containing the panel you wish to initialize
326. on Chapter 4 for informa tion NOTE No password is required for the initial log in but you should add a password in order to insure the security of your system Installing User Interface Only Select the User Interface Only installation for workstations on networked systems The User Interface can be installed from the CD at each workstation or it can be installed across the LAN INSTALLATION NOTE When installing over a LAN make sure the install directory resides on a drive that is shared and mapped in the target system If this is not the case the install will fail when the system reboots and attempts to reestablish the connection to the host directory To install the WIN PAK 2 0 User Interface O nly option proceed as directed in the Installation Procedure section Then when prompted select the User Interface Only installation to install only the User Interface NOTE During installation you may be asked if you want to overwrite existing dll files Keep your existing dlls When asked Do you want to keep this file click Yes A number of Windows components may be installed The software may reboot your computer after each of these components is installed This is normal When installation is complete you will be prompted to reboot your computer again 7 rt Y J ct O 56 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide When the install has been completed successfully the message WIN PAK 2 0 Setup Complet
327. onceestes 531 OVEIVIOW aire tarha is nat Naene Dilan eve even ANEA A ed eee 533 Removing Deleted Database RECOIdS cceceseseseseereereeeseneenetnetneeteeteeeeeateaes 533 Deleting History from Database ooo eceesestete tee teeteeeneeeeneeneneetieeieeeenrenrenaes 535 Database Backup and Restore Utility 0 0 eee teen ete eeee ene eeeeeneeeietee 536 BACKUP aisha teint aA E OAE Peele Tobie Poet eaten iy Bay 537 SCHEGUICS Festi oils A alr cachenars aniaiseemianyibven decir 540 RESTOS u iiiecentiesestimerba deanna prelates nae pier alate nena 541 Database Limits and Capacities 2 0 0 eerste sete tees eteeceeeetaee 544 Single Hard Drive Setup Considerations 0 ceeseseseeseeseeseeseeteeeeeeeeeeaes 545 Multiple Hard Drive Setup Considerations oo ececeeeseseeseeseeeeeneeneeseeeeeens 546 Display of Warnings and Alarms c cece ee eee enetee eter cee teteneetetaetee 547 GOSS ALY i mnavercus ciuactnatuas nladeetadaeetemeaaibel tai T niaear inti nea epidae T 549 WV OSE vic creeccka tonsa anna a aai in eaa E aS eikareavita a e a S 569 Welcome WIN PAK 2 0 is state of the art access control software that was specifically designed to run in the WindowsXP Windows 2000 Windows NT 4 0 operating systems User workstations may use Windows 98SE WIN PAK 2 0 allows the programming of card and card holder information the design and creation of badges and easy monitoring of alarms and cameras WIN PAK 2 0 software functions are separate
328. ool to be used in addition to the Floor Plan View and Control View Alarm View displays alarm and reader activity as it happens The Alarm View window is divided into two horizontal panes Incoming alarms are displayed in the upper pane according to priority and time The highest priority transactions are at the top of the list and transactions with the same priority are shown with the most recent first NOTE A camera icon in the Priority column indicates that a digital camera view is available The color of incoming messages indicates the type of event Red indicates an Alarm e Green indicates Normal e Yellow indicates Trouble a AD a ib Ta ei a a Ib TAGE e l Pol Agere haa ohh Looby Atoa Company M NUDNO SN 116 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE NOTE An N 1000 II panel can only detect a trouble condition when an AEP 5 board is used Once a point goes into alarm or trouble the color will not return to green For example if the first message from a point or card is Normal subsequent Alarm or Trouble conditions change the alarm to red or yellow After that even if the point returns to a Normal state the message stays red or alternates between yellow and red It does not return to green on a Normal state The Count column on the Alarm View window shows the number of times a point changes state Once this message is acknowledged new Normal messages are displayed in green
329. option Groups must be selected to access the AEP 3 in the Hardware O ptions section of this window Keypads Select the Keypads option if matrix style 11 wire keypads are used with the panel If using Wiegand style 5 wire keypads the keypad is treated as a reader and this option should not be selected Programming 257 NOTE NOTE PIN and Time Zone for PIN These options are available only if the Keypad option is selected Select PIN personal identification number if a keycode must be entered before presenting a card to gain access Do not select this option if the panel is using keypads without readers From the Time Zone for PIN list select the time zone during which a PIN is required For N 1000 IV panels only 2 PIN keypads can be configured Refer to Panel Configuration Readers for selection informa tion Continuous Card Reads Select this option to allow card readers to read cards continuously independent of output pulse time If the option is not selected card readers do not recognize valid cards while the corresponding output is energized GSuLLLUesBOJd For example without the Continuous Card Reads option selected and Output 1 assigned a 10 second pulse time a valid card read at Reader 1 causes Output 1 to energize for 10 seconds during which time the card reader does not recognize any other valid cards Reverse Read LEDs Select this option to reverse the standard LED operation of t
330. options found in the Search Field drop down list All Shows every operator in the system Description As written in the description field within each operator record Last Log In The last recorded time the operator logged into the system Name The operator name which does not necessarily correspond to a card holder name Operator Type Select either operator or admin Criteria If any Search Field other than All is being used you must select one of the following by which to define the search Criteria Begins With Select this criteria if you know the first letter s or number s of the field on which you are searching User Overview 93 Equals Select Equals when searching for an exact match Greater Than Use this criteria when you are searching for a range or group and need to narrow the search in ascending order Refer to the following Search For section Less Than Select this criteria if you are searching for a range or group and need to narrow the search in descending order Refer to the following Search For section Search For When using the Begins With criteria enter the first element of the item for which you are searching in the Search For field When using the Greater Than criteria enter the first element of the range for which you are searching in the Search For field For example to search for every operator whose name begins with any letter in the range M Z enter
331. ormation to personal information even biometrics as shown here Cand linije Ei All iriaren Cah Cad Binari Q psa Hore norton Mes Sige O Oboe omin vehial D Qa Frnt E O Lan Mame Q Bice y Leg eea j e o The Note Field Template allows you to label and define the note fields while the Card Holder Tab Layout provides the tools for creating and configuring tabs 406 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide The note fields and tabs should be set up before information is entered into the Card Holder database However note fields and tabs can be edited after card holders are added to the system Working with Card Holder Note Fields NOTE A note field definition is comprised of two parts e The Name which is the label that appears next to the note field on the card holder tab A Template which defines the type and number of characters that can be entered into the note field If the Template field is blank the note field acts as a regular text box Entering special characters into the template creates a mask which prompts the user to enter a certain type of data and or a certain number of characters in the note field For example a template for a Zip Code field might have five numeric placeholders A Business Phone field can be configured with a combination of numeric placeholders spaces and alpha characters to accept the area code phone number and a four digit extension See the Note Field Ma
332. otal line of Text box indicates the total number of lines that can be translated The Translated box indicates the number of lines that have been translated The Out of Date box indicates the number of dialogs that do not match exactly to an upgrade of WIN PAK 2 0 This number will decrease after each dialog has been edited Each Out of Date dialog will be displayed by a light red highlight By clicking on the column heading the columns can display information in ascending alphabetical order The English United States column is the original language of WIN PAK 2 0 The center language column is the name of the language that was added to Available Translation 475 Languages and is the current language being edited View Select Language The edited changes will be viewed in this column The Notes column is not an editable column but displays notes that pertain to certain values that are needed in the text The In File column provides a unique identity to where the text is used in WIN PAK 2 0 2 Double click a menu item to open its Translate Text dialog 3 Type the replacement text in the Translation area of the dialog 4 The Apply to all identical originals check box in the lower left corner of the window globally applies the translated phrase throughout the system and in doing so the Translated box reflects how many lines were translated 5 Click OK to save the entry and return to the Trans late O ther Text windo
333. out readers they are allowed normal entry the next morning Without forgiveness an anti passback violation occurs in this instance also Forgiveness is not available unless anti passback is selected GHuLLLUeIBOId 256 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE Forgiveness works slightly different depending on the panel firmware version Versions older than 8 03 17 will move the card status to the out mode requiring the next read to be an in read Versions 8 03 17 and greater will set the card to an unused status allowing the next valid read to be in or out If the Anti passback option is not selected WIN PAK 2 0 defaults to a free egress configuration A card is not required to exit Instead the door can be activated by a button motion detector or other device For example with an N 1000 II panel Card Reader 1 activates one door and Card Reader 2 activates a different door Inputs 3 and 4 are reserved for the exit devices for these two doors which releases locks just like a valid card read Groups Select the Groups check box if you want to create output relay groups Output relay groups allow a card read to activate more than one output relay for applications such as elevator control When the G roups option is used a valid card read on Reader 1 pulses the group while a valid card read on Reader 2 pulses Relay 2 For a valid card read on any reader to pulse the group select the All readers use the same group
334. oved to a different computer it must be moved to the computer performing the restore y ct g of n 0 S v ni 0 5 D 5 al 0 542 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Schedule Applicaton WIN PAK 2 0_ Imon Beky Hea Teip unra E ital Dade bn per ee ra TEN _ Dur a eee fo a e P iiia J Ag Taa T F Eiki to WEF Duba Berari MIRAE Artho Chetan T Faran b Him Dushan Kew Dastan reinate Fati EE O O O O Restore Cael 3 Use the Restore list to set the parameters for the backup Restoring the WIN PAK Database requires that the WIN PAK 2 0 database services be turned off The restoration process will not proceed if the services are running Restoring to WIN PAK Archive Database replaces the existing archive database and allows reports to be generated for the archive Restoring to New Database allows advanced users to view the database without adversely affecting the current or backup database 4 Click Restore to continue When finished click Cancel or Exit Database Maintenance 543 NOTE Scheduled backups run automatically as long as the MSSQLServerAgent components are running By default these components are set to run when the operating system Starts 5 To check if MSSQLServerA gent components are running double click on the icon shown below in the tray on the bottom of the Window fo SQL Server Service Manager PEG Server Prcc x Services MSSOLServer x Distribu
335. own the computer If the communication server is set to buffer on exiting the database server another buffer soft buffer command is sent to all panels When restarting the computer the services are started and based on communication server settings the panels are sent an unbuffered command soft unbuffer The previous panels that received two soft buffer commands remain buffered according the their setting before shutting down the computer A hard buffer or unbuffer command overrides any number of soft commands When a panel receives a hard buffer or unbuffer command it switches state regardless of how many soft buffer or unbuffer commands have been received M NUDNO SN 134 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Control Map The Control Map provides another means of monitoring acknowledging and clearing alarms and controlling devices Status Symbols One of three status symbols may appear before an ADV icon on the Control Map screen e Red square alarm e Green circle normal e Yellow triangle trouble e Purple question unknown The status symbols will darken after their respective conditions have been acknowledged and cleared A forbidden symbol overlayed over a status symbol indicates that the corresponding point is shunted Placing the mouse over the status symbols will bring up a textual description of the status for each ADV User Overview 135 Managing Devices from the Control Map 1 Click the Contr
336. p you can define Access Areas by creating branches on a tree structure and adding entrances to those branches Branches can also have sub branches 286 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Access Areas are ultimately used to define Access Levels 1 Select Access Areas from the Define option on the Configuration menu 2 Right click the Access Area folder and select Add Branch F Access Area El Access Area 4 East Coast Muster a Local Muster a EastC a Local H 6 Local Programming 287 NOTE On networked systems other operators may be adding information Refresh F5 updates the Access Area displaying changes made without exiting and re entering the Access Area to update Find F3 is case sensitive and will search from the selected branch downward Any character or string of characters can be searched on The Configure Branch window is displayed 3 Enter a unique Branch Name with up to 30 characters for the Access Area Gu L Luesboid 4 Click OK The new branch appears in the Access Area window Adding Entrances to an Access Area 1 Right click the new branch and click Add En trances i Access Arma SD Ert Const Muster aE Local Husie H whos Compare 4 E Eas Coas Heat Loca Othice 4 9 Loca Storage on al Steet E unh 288 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide The Add Devices window is displayed Derce Type Entarnce 5 B Est Comi Packing Enance Amka BB Esi Count Par
337. p Type Current Loop COM Port COM1 Panel Name Loop 1 Panel 1 Part of Loop Loop 1 Panel Type N 1000 Panel Address 1 Reader Information Reader Name Loop 1 Panel 1 R1 Reader Timezone None Reader Pulse Time 10 Reader Name Loop 1 Panel 1 R2 Reader Timezone one Reader Pulse Time 10 17 Click Print to print the summary or click Finish to exit the Wizard If necessary scroll down to access the Print and Finish buttons Programming 169 When you are done using the wizard initialize the panel s that were just added To initialize the panel s click on Operations then Control Map and click on the plus sign by Quick Start Control Area to open up the branch Right click on the panel that was added and select Initialize Select All and click OK A panel initialization status window will display the initialization progress Repeat the procedure for as many panels as were added to the system Multiple panels can be initialized at the same time on an RS 485 line if C 100 is being used initialize one panel at a time If this is a first time the wizard was run and there were no previously defined WIN PAK communication ports then the communication server needs to be restarted Restart the communication server by stopping it from the WIN PAK Service manager and then start it An error indicating that communication server is not responding will appear if the WIN PAK User Interface is open Click OK
338. p on which to report 3 Use the Loops to Print area of the window to select one of the following to define the report All reports on all loops One reports on an individual loop using the From field activated when the One radio button is se lected Range reports on a designated range of loops using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selected Reporting on Panel Loops Panel device reports can display all or a range of panels as well as reporting on a specific panel loop Reports 507 1 Select Panels on the Filter D evice tab to open the Panel tab of the report window Deven Fi Panel Fits Bun bein Aubin Dahabi 7 Ere di q F 1 2 An individual Loop can be selected for the report Click the browse button to the right of the Loop field When the Select window is displayed click the Find button to display a list of loops on the panel type selected Highlight the desired loop and click the OK button On returning to the Panel window note that the loop selected is now displayed in the field 3 Use the Panels to Print area of the window to select one of the following to define the report All reports on all panels One reports on an individual panel using the From field activated when the One radio button is se lected Range reports on a designated range of panels using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selected 4 Select the Prin
339. parator in international settings This character is treated as a literal for masking purposes Date separator The actual character used is the one specified as the date separator in international settings This character is treated as a literal for masking purposes Literal character qualifier Treat the next character in the mask string as a literal This allows you to include the amp A L U and characters in the mask This character is treated as a literal for mask ing purposes amp Character placeholder Valid values for this placeholder are ANSI characters in the following ranges 32 126 and 128 255 Drop down list Gives multiple choices from a drop down list For example brown blue green hazel Letter placeholder For example a z or A Z A Alphanumeric Only alphanumeric data plus spaces 0 9 and A Z or az L Lower case Accepts a z or A Z plus spaces and forces to a z U Upper case Accepts a z or A Z plus spaces and forces to A Z Literal All other symbols are displayed as literals that is as themselves If no mask characters are entered in the Template field i e the mask is an empty string the note field functions as a standard text box When an input mask is defined underscores appear beneath every placeholder in the note field You can only replace a placeholder with a character of the type specified in the input mask Card Holders 413 If an invalid charact
340. percedes the Tracking Area selection WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Card Codes Select or deselect the card transaction types to be included Note Fields Select up to three note fields to match and the range of the descrption to match the note field 9 Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report 10 Click Close to exit the History report window and return to the main Reports database window Card Holder Report 1 Select the Card Holder report from the Reports database window The Card Holder report window opens with the Card Holder tab displayed Alegent ad Blinkies 2 Select one of the following filters for the Card Holder Last Name All reports on all card holders One reports on an individual card holder using the From field activated when the One radio button is selected to indicate the card holder s last name Reports 497 Range reports on a designated range of cards holders using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selected to specify the last names range 3 The report can be further defined by selecting an Access Level Only card holders with the access level specified are included in the report NOTE The Access Level field narrows the report to card holders with a particular access level Note Fields can furthe
341. pied into this folder To select a new location for the sound files type in the new path or click the Browse button and locate the desired directory When the correct path is entered in this field click Apply to save the new directory setting Path to Language Files The current path for language files is displayed Additional language files can be copied into this folder To select a new location for the language files type in the new path or click the Browse button and locate the desired directory When the correct path is displayed in this field click Apply to save the new directory setting User Overview 103 Wallpaper Customize the wallpaper of the main WIN PAK 2 0 window using options on the Wallpaper tab of the Workstation Defaults window Dectentr Alam Prnter Sounds Desctoies Walea Restore C Daak Biman M NUDNO PSN C ee e Default Bitmap Use the default bitmap loaded in the system as the wallpaper None Applies a gray background to the WIN PAK 2 0 desktop Colored Background Click the Color button and choose from a selection of standard colors or create a custom color of your choice Click OK to retum to the Wallpaper tab Your color selection is displayed on the tab Bitmap Use a bitmap of your choice Type in the path and file name of the bitmap or click the Browse button and select the desired bitmap Click Open to return to the Wallpaper tab and click Apply to save the
342. ples Each action Alarm Normal Trouble etc requires a priority setting to be viewed in the Alarm monitor Set the Priority you want assigned to the se lected Action If the priority is 0 the action state will not be displayed in the Alarm monitor Control Map or Floor Plan view 1 is the highest priority 99 is the lowest Select the Time Zone during which you want the Action Group activated The default setting is Always meaning the defined actions take effect regardless of the time Select the Write to History option if you want the event written to the history file Du wuLULIDOId Select the Print option is you want this event printed on the alarm printer Select any Command Files you want activated in response to the selected Action A command file must be created to perform the CCTV camera monitor switching Select the Sound File to be activated in response to the Action Sounds will only play if the event is displayed in the Alarm View Select a Digital Video Camera from the list you want activated in response to the selected action Insert the Message you want sent to the Alarm Details window in response to the Action WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Abstract Device Database The Abstract D evice database contains information on all Abstract D evices AD Vs that have been defined for your access control system Open the Abstract D evice Database by selecting Abstract Device ADV from the Device option o
343. r configurations is not supported directly Windows 98 must be upgraded to Windows XP Windows 2000 or Windows NT before proceeding with this upgrade If migrating from WIN PAK 1 refer to the release notes included on the CD Verify that the amount of free space on the drive where the database exists is either 5 gigbytes or 2 5 times the current size of the WIN PAK database When prompted by the installation program choose update automatic All workstations must also be upgraded All UIs Servers must be running the same release build number Automatically Installed Microsoft Components The WIN PAK 2 0 installation program installs several utility and operating system upgrades during the normal installation session These are supplied as redistributable Microsoft packages and are deployed automatically based on the installed options The installation program provides specific information about these upgrades during actual installation Each of these components is installed by a separate installation program that runs directly from the WIN PAK 2 0 CD The computer reboots AFTER EACH OF THESE COMPONENTSIS INSTALLED The total number of reboots required for any installation depends on which components are required Installation 43 If prompted by the program always keep the latest drivers never overwrite a new driver with an old driver When operating under Windows NT WIN PAK 2 0 requires the following external compone
344. r 3 4 Aux Aux Door 4 5 8 X ver Aux Aux Aux 9 ERB option relay N A N A 9 not available with AEP 3 10 ERB option relay 10 N A N A 11 ERB option relay 11 Rdr 1 LED Rdr 1 LED 12 ERB option relay 12 Rdr 2 LED Rdr 2 LED 13 Rdr 1 LED N A Rdr 3 LED 14 Rdr 2 LED N A Rdr 4 LED 15 TTL output used N A N A 16 for AEP 17 24 AEP 3 Brd 1 AEP 3 Brd 1 AEP 3 Brd 1 25 32 AEP 3 Brd 2 AEP 3 Brd 2 AEP 3 Brd 2 270 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Panel Conligquidion Gidipa Panel Configuration Groups A Group can be defined as one or more active output points As many as 32 groups can be defined per panel Groups are created on the Panel Configuration Groups window The Groups option must be selected in the O ptions tab in order for the Groups window to display PEEFEEPE 1 In the Name list select the check box to the left of each group being defined As selections are made the Available O utputs from each group are dis played Programming 271 2 Highlight an output point or points by holding the CTRL key and left clicking selecting available outputs in the Available Outputs list and click the Move to Selected button to move it to the Se lected Outputs list Or click Select All and then click Move to Selected to add all of the available outputs to the group NOTE When using N 485 PCl only 22 25 outputs can be selected to a group depending on the output number selected 3 Use the Time Zone drop down list
345. r Guide Chjo Desbination Local in Fisse indicate whae ypu mand bo install our MA 20 iou Ten Fema eras mani ba tpaciy iha chive ihai h t tha rad kaa mata 11 Click Next to accept the default location for the floor plan files or click Browse and specify a differ ent location The User Information screen will appear User biorain Piba ariii the OD kay mamii ba hii WTA PAR 2 0 iraia i a a ee a ah tah Maire EE o 12 Fill in the User Information then click N ext to continue The Name and CD Key windows must be filled in The Company window is optional The CD Key number is located on inside front cover of the WIN PAK 2 0 Quick Reference G uide 53 After finishing the User Information screen the Icons Anyone screen appears asking the operator whether to create desktop icons OO le 2 Do you mant desktop icons bo be created for WIN PAE 2 0 and ts support anpheations aa ae 13 Click Yes or No to create desktop icons or not NOTE After selecting whether to install icons the computer will be rebooted and the MSDE database will be installed The installation will take several minutes After the computer is rebooted and the MSDE database is installed the Select Components screen will appear next illustration from which the operator will choose whether to connect the database engine to the database file automatically or manually NOTE Unless you are a software expert it is highly
346. r define the report by any of the user defined note fields 4 The Notes Fields area of the window allows you to specify very specific types of information to include in the report Using the radio buttons you can select either None for no note fields to be displayed All or Select to specify any user defined card holder note field s to include in the report If Select is chosen click the browse button just beneath the Select radio button The Select Note Fields dialog is displayed allowing you to select any card holder note fields s that are required to be printed in the report Note Fields Home Phone Significant Other Phone Significant Other Name Hair Color Doctor s Name Known Medical Conditions Medical comments 1 Medical comments 2 Dentist s Name xj v Nentist s Phone WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 5 Click OK when finished selecting the Note Fields 6 Filtering of the report can be restricted to match selected note field data and range of data Select a note field and fill in any From and To information as required Where dropdown list data is not defined general text fields the From and To data is case sensitive NOTE The To field should not be left with an open ended range e g Mary vs Mary Smith If Mary was used then Mary Smith will not show up since Mary Smith is after Mary 7 Click the Sort tab The Card Holder report can be sorted in order by up to three categories
347. r window Select a color swatch for the shape border or create and select a custom color Badging 389 3 Click OK to return to the Colors tab The new border color is displayed in the Foreground Color box 4 Click Apply to apply the change to your badge or click OK to apply the change and retum to the Badge Definition window Changing the Background Color ofa Shape 1 Right click the shape and select Properties O pen the Colors tab on the Badge Shape O bject Properties window 2 Add a colored background to the shape by making sure the Transparent Background check box is deselected then clicking the Background Color browse button to open the Color window Use the Transparent Background check box to make the shape transparent 3 Select a color swatch for the shape background or create and select a custom color 4 Click OK to return to the Colors tab The new color selection appears in the Background Color field 5 Click Apply to apply the change to your badge or click OK to apply the change and retum to the Badge Definition window Positioning Shapes Using the Top Left Height and Width fields on the Positioning tab of the Badge Shape O bject Properties window allows you to manually set certain positions for the selected shape Refer to the Positioning Badge Elements section of this chapter for details Deleting aShape Delete a shape by right clicking on the shape and selecting Delete Object from the subs
348. ra Print Prereterve SS E aan Cad Humbs Resda Tracking fuse Esim Fages Ha kej Des l Hos Gert Dor unlink aed Hodes Frair Foeld From To First N ame enter the card holder s first name or select it using the browse button Last Name enter the card holder s last name or select it using the browse button Card Number enter the card number or select it using the browse button Reader enter the reader or entrance ADV to match or select it using the browse button For a group of readers use Tracking Area Tracking Area select a predefined tracking area group of readers that should be used to filter the information The tracking areas named in the drop box are the branch names configured in the Tracking Area database 518 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Do not use Reader when using Tracking Area because the Reader selection supercedes the Tracking Area selection Card Codes select or de select the card transaction types to be included N ote Fields select up to three Note Fields to match and the range of the description to match the note field 8 The Alarm Filter tab next illustration provides additional filtering of alarm events Use the browse button to select a specific alarm point or leave blank for no restrictions Select the Alarm States that are required for the report Date and Tine Fier Tamacion Filed Cand Hokies iter Alam Fita Ber han ett aes Alsen Point Erri P
349. raup NOTE Refer to the User Interface section of chapter 3 of this manual for details on working with database window ele ments 2 Click Add to open the Holiday Group Record dialog next illustration Programming 181 Hail ap Gang Reco Holidays Hobdag Gidip Marna Federa Hokia Mare Toe ey Loo J ew fete 3 Enter the Holiday Group Name 4 Click Add to enter the first Holiday for the group Haides Gap Holidays E Ez Hara OF Feth o dak Corea Cate m a Feren Judy 04 200 F App boal pears Bu LLwuesiBb01d 5 Enter the Holiday Name 6 Click the browse button _ to the right of the Date field to open the Calendar 7 Select the date for the holiday you are adding and click OK to return to the Holidays dialog 8 Click on Apply to All Years if this is a recurring holiday that falls on the same date each year This option is a visual reference indicator only It does not effect software operation 9 Click OK The holiday is added to the new Holiday Group being created Add up to 32 holidays per Holiday Group record When you finish click OK to return to the Holiday Group database window 182 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Editing a Holiday Group To make changes to a Holiday Group record select it from the Holiday Group database window and click the Edit button The Holiday Group Record window below is displayed with all holidays for the selected group l
350. re often for longer displays The default of twenty 20 for Find lists has been selected as a general optimum value but that can change depending on the types of database searches and the speed of the computer being used Live Monitor Use the list of defined CCTV monitors to select the monitor output to be connected to the video capture card allowing the video signal to be displayed when a live monitor view is selected Confirm Card Deletes If this option is selected you are prompted to confirm a card deletion before it is removed from the database Always Show Record View This check box when selected opens the record or detail view whenever a database window is displayed Freeze Client Wait __ Minutes Freezes access to the Client Workstation after a set period from 1 to 60 minutes of operator inactivity The operator is required to log back into the system when frozen out When selected the D efault setting is 10 minutes 100 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Alarm Printer Use the Alarm Printer tab of the Workstation D efaults window to set parameters for printing alarms Work stakon Chel alt Ei Print Alarms Select this option to enable the sending of alarms to a printer Printer Any printer installed on your operating system can be selected from the Printer drop down list Alarms print one page at a time Print directly to port Select this check box to print events in real time one event at a time You m
351. red Barcode Cards A bar code card where the bar code information is opaque to visible light but transparent to Infrared light The bar coded information on the card may be read by the reader but not copied by a photocopy machine Input A point which receives information An input device such as an egress button sends information to a control panel Software monitors the state of an input When that input state changes such as when a related input device sends information to the panel software regards that input as being in a state of alarm Insertion Card or Token A card or token that is inserted into a reader rather than swiped through or passed near a reader Integration The art of controlling electronic devices through activities known as chains of events Especially in EAC controlling CCTV and other systems in a unified way 560 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Interlock Refers to creating a chain of events between input and output points Invert Follow In an interlock a second point component B takes on the opposite state as the triggering point component A See Follow J Job Specifications All the written documentation that must be followed in order for a job to be correctly completed K Key Control In an EAC system key assignment and control is managed by the controller Keypads A keyboard device often but not always limited to numbered keys between 0 to 9 L Latching The manual us
352. requiring the operator to acknowledge this new alarm M NUDNO PSN Require a Response when Acknowledging Alarms Requires the operator to add a note before acknowledging an alarm Automatically Clear Acknowledged Alarms Automatically clears alarms when they are acknowledged Clear Alarm on Normal Only Alarms can only be cleared when the source of the alarm returns to a normal state Maximum of events in view The default setting allows for 1 000 of the most recent events to be displayed in the event viewer Once the limit is achieved the oldest event is discarded as the new event is received A range of 10 to 32 000 events can be set To optimize system performance minimize the number of events being viewed and limits being set 108 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE NOTE Auto clear alarm limit per point The default setting allows for 100 of the most recent alarm events per point to be displayed in the Alarm View Once the limit is achieved the oldest alarm event is automatically cleared as the new alarm event is received An alarm acknow ledgement can only be performed by the operator and is logged into the history file accordingly The Auto clear is logged into the history using the operator that is logged in at the time A range of 10 to 500 alarm events can be set in situations where no user is logged in The alarm view Cnt alarm count will display the entire count independently of the lim
353. rersierwe st ate o F input Nomad F Inpa Alsen F lgul Tremble Fe Dar Hara F Dor Fosced iper F Dr Teue E Diti 9 Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of your report 10 Click Close to exit the History report window and return to the main Reports database window Reports 519 Holiday Group Report 1 Select the Holiday Group report from the Reports database window The Report Holiday Group report window opens with the Filter Holiday Group tab displayed Holiday Group Fite sont Bun han Aahe Dalabas 2 The Holiday Group report can be defined using one of the following options All reports on all holiday groups One reports on an individual holiday group using the From field activated when the One radio button is selected Range reports on a designated range of holiday groups using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selected 3 On the Sort tab of the report window use the Sort Order list to select a category determining how to sort the holiday groups Choose whether the category should appear in ascending or descending order 4 Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a
354. resses the main Guard Tour window reports the tour progress indicating each check point as it is validated along with the time between check points and the total time elapsed 140 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE If a point is missed it changes to red in the list and an alarm is displayed in the Alarm view To pause the tour click the Pause button Late or missed check point alarms are not generated while a tour is paused To restart the tour click Pause again Tracking and Muster NOTE Tracking and Muster reporting allows card holders to be located in the event of an emergency People are required to present their card to tracking readers when entering or leaving tracking areas If a card holder has more than one card one for the building and another for a vehicle the card holder is tracked not the card number In an emergency situation a muster is declared and people go to the muster readers to present their cards When the Muster View opens information is loaded from history showing card reads for the past eight hours or as defined in Tracking and Muster Server Configuration Make sure the Refresh List Periodically check box is selected so that the list displayed is current The list refreshes approximately every three seconds The Muster View opens in a two paned window The left pane displays the Tracking and Muster areas with their readers The right pane reports information on the card
355. ription View a badge by highlighting it in the database list and selecting the Detail View check box Click Edit to make changes in the selected badge Deleting a badge from the list removes it from the system Use the Copy Badge button to make a copy of a selected badge definition Click the Add button to open the Badge Definition window Copying a Badge Layout Copying a badge design allows you to more easily create several badges with the same basic layout but with distinguishing features e g the background color Create your basic design copy it and edit the copy to suit your needs With the Badge Layouts database window open select the badge to be copied and click the Copy Badge button at the bottom of the window The Copy Badge dialog prompts you to enter the New badge name Badge Layout Copy Badge X New badge name Cancel Click OK to save the new badge name and retum to the main Badge Layouts database window The new badge can now be edited to suit your needs 342 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Editing a Badge Layout With the Badge Layouts database window open select the badge to be edited and click the Edit button The Badge D efinition window opens allowing you to make changes to the badge layout When you have made all necessary edits to the badge layout Save the layout and close the Badge D efinition window A prompt will remind you to save changes to the layout if you forget to
356. rlock Protection MIP An option requiring that all input points tied to a single output be returned to a normal state to de energize the point Without this option only one input needs to return to the normal state to de energize the output Multi technology Cards A single card that uses several information technologies such as magnetic stripe and bar codes Muster Area A designated area where people go to be acknowledged as being safe during an emergency N NEC The National Electrical Code No Action In an interlock a second point component B does nothing in response to the state change of the triggering point component A Node A connection point on network cable It indicates that a computer is linked to the network Non Distributed System A computer or EAC network that requires a single host computer that supplies the programming and decision making resources to other computers and EAC controllers in the system 562 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Normally Closed NC Refers to contact points that always touch when a device is in its normal position Normally Open NO Refers to contact points that do not touch when a device is in its normal position Numb Mode Disables readers for a set period of time following a card read 0 Off Line D isconnecting one computer device from another that stops the flow of information between them On Line Connecting one computerized device with another in a w
357. rmware version and OL option enabled Du wuLULIDOId After setting the card format click the N ext button to advance to the Panel Configuration Time Zones window next illustration 252 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Panel Configuration Time Zones Use the Panel Configuration Time Zones window to indicate the time zones and holiday groups valid with the panel Time Zones which apply to a given panel must be added to the panel s definition tone Conligii ain Tim 2 ares tem Tam Horch Feli piit haki 1 T m Ban Honda Fida jesl holi 1 Bera Fp F dye per mak inol hobi 1 a Thi Tasenere s raves er a Ban Som Marda Fida jit he 1 NOTE Time Zones are set up via the Time Management option on the WIN PAK 2 0 Configuration menu Until a Time Zone is established it cannot be added to the panel With the Time Zones window displayed you can select the Time Zones and Holiday groups you want to use with the N 1000 panel being installed Programming 253 NOTE NOTE The Available Time Zone list shows the time zone name and Description as set up in Time Management The Number of Slots column shows how many slots on the panel this time zone requires Time Zones that use more than 1 in the no slots column create and link to other slots starting at 63 and decrement The Head Slot of the time zone is shown in the Slot column Likewise
358. rt Schedule Schedule Fite Set Bun from Seche Database I Erri Pirrien ra e r na To Export Fie Eaim Pages Dias Al Chose C faga z 2 Further define the Schedule report by selecting one of the following options All reports on all schedules One reports on an individual schedule using the From field activated when the One radio button is selected Range reports on a designated range of schedules using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selected 3 Click the Sort tab and select a Sort Order for the report indicating if the report should be sorted in ascending or descending order 4 Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report 5 Click Close to exit the Schedule report window and return to the main Reports database window 528 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Time Zone Report 1 Select the Time Zone report from the Reports database window The Time Zone report window opens with the Filter Time Zone tab displayed wt Time Zone 2 The Time Zone report can be filtered using one of the following options All reports on all time zones One reports on an individual time zone using the From field activated when the One radio button is selected Range reports on a designated range of time
359. rvice or services click on Start or Stop as necessary 62 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide System Manager The System Manager is a utility used by WIN PAK 2 0 to locate its various software components The machine name and protocol endpoint for each program component is displayed in the System Manager Generally none of the settings on the System Manager should be changed elon Boye Open the System Manager by double clicking the shortcut icon on your desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu Programs Northern Computers Inc Installation 63 Licensing and Registration WIN PAK 2 0 has a 30 day initial license period For evaluation purposes the software can be installed and used for up to 30 days without registration At the end of the 30 day period the initial license expires and is invalidated Once the license expires only the Help menu is accessible until the software is registered and a valid license restored WIN PAK 2 0 software has a CD Key found inside the cover of the user guide Make a note of this number Registering Software Before beginning software registration select the License option from the WIN PAK 2 0 Help menu When the License window is displayed note the Site Code This is a unique number that identifies your computer PI o E Shur Waij Latipise diiit 128M Cieni Lianer 5 Corn Sere Lieser CD Kay pw p fans Sava CD Kay Site Coie De me FE BA T Lerat Rey
360. s Click Back to return to the previously viewed topic Click Forward to go to the next topic Click Print to print the current topic The Options menu provides additional browse and navigation controls Many topics include a Related Topics control at the end of the text that displays a pop up menu of related topics Chapter 1 Introduction Access Control with WIN PAK 2 0 WIN PAK 2 0 Features Software Concepts Introduction 25 Access Control with WIN PAK 2 0 Access control is computerized control over entry into any area that can be secured with a lock and key Entry is only allowed to authorized people at authorized times Control of who is allowed to come and go is easily maintained The weakness of a lock and key security system is the physical key The key is readily duplicated and gives access to anyone who holds it There is no control of when a key is used and no record of its use The risk of lost or stolen keys with the expense of changing locks is a costly problem 8 Cc a ct J Access control is an effective and affordable solution to this problem With access control each person receives a card or keycode which restricts access to authorized areas at authorized times A small programmable control panel allows or denies access If a card is lost or stolen the control panel can be reprogrammed quickly and easily Many additional functions are available when access control is combined
361. s allowing you to select a text color NOTE For additional color choices click the Define Custom Colors button See Creating Custom Colors for more information 3 4 5 Click OK The new type color is displayed in the Foreground Color field Click Apply to preview the new color on the badge Click OK when finished Changing Text Background Color 1 3 Right click inside the text box and select Properties Select the Colors tab of the Badge Text O bject Properties window Click the Background Color browse button to open the Color window Select a color swatch NOTE For additional color choices click the Define Custom Colors button See Creating Custom Colors for more information 4 7 Click OK The new background color is displayed in the Background Color field If you want a transparent background for the text block the items behind it show through select the Transparent Background option Click Apply to preview the background color on the badge Click OK when finished 376 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Positioning Textin a Text Box 1 Right click inside the text box and select Properties Select the Positioning tab of the Badge Text O bject Properties window Badge Element Layout X Text Block Colors Positioning Horizontal Position Vertical Position Orientation Middle x jo x Top fi 1 9 Height jes Left 34 8 Width 45 2 Cancel Apply
362. s An event in which a card holder is being forced to provide entry into a secured area by an unauthorized person or people A keypad can be configured in a way to produce a duress alarm when the user types in the PIN number E EAC Electronic Access Control Egress Button A button by a controlled door that when pushed sends a signal to the controller indicating that someone wants to leave the area this device may also mechanically allow the door to unlock overriding the control Egress To exit See also free egress Electronic Access Control Controlling entry into a physical area by means of a controller and electronic components including locks readers sensors buttons and more Enable To make a feature or function on the system usable Enclosure An electrical utility box It can hold control panels splices power outlets etc Energize Activate Often refers to the state of an output point Output points are in a normal state when they are de energized An energized state means that the output is active EPROM Erasable Programmable Read only Memory Exit Button or Switch When pressed or tripped this device allows a person to exit from a controlled area See also free egress Exit Reader A reader that controls egress from a controlled area used in anti passback applications F Facility Codes The first part of the ID number on some cards providing a higher degree of security against a duplicate
363. s and card holders in the tracking areas including Card ID Status Card Holder if any Reader Time and D ate Tracking and muster areas are defined by Tracking Areas A muster server must be defined on the D evice Map User Overview 141 Monitoring the Tracking and Muster View 1 Select Tracking and Mustering from the WIN PAK 2 0 Operations menu The Muster View win dow is displayed Toacting and burte toes Cadh and Cand Hoda founa in Hha Sabacc D ledr snd Hurang dey 3 a Est Crad hbis Waat Lobia Eriranca BES Sn AH i D Eri Cet Oey archon AD El is coed mech ot phone Local Othe a Gora Deca a D Loa Biagi ce T Shee a DE Eat Lobes Lah Ercan fh DD Ei Lobby Fight Exnancs BD west Lotta Erian Read HE Peeing Led a meter bach f Horta Fidei ee alf His Resda weet pas M NUDNO SN Ba Fy Fo Fedia bi peria Beh Eini ce 2 Expand the tree to show the tracking and muster areas then click the top level branch to display all tracking and muster areas The right pane displays all the cards and card holders that have been presented at a tracking or muster reader along with the reader name the time and the date of the card read The muster view sorts the reads in alphabetical order by card holder with last name first 3 To display a specific area click the branch represent ing it O nly valid card reads from the readers in the selected area are displayed If one of these cards is presented
364. s Metafiles wmf The graphic can be a map a loop wiring diagram or even a simple grid Links to other floor plans can be added ADVs which can be selected from a graphical toolbox are placed on the floor plan background creating both a monitoring and control view The ADVs signal alarms and other events by changing color blinking and emitting audible signals 6 Guard Tour A Sequenced G uard Tour is a defined series of check points card readers and or alarm points that a guard must activate within a given amount of time The G uard Tour definition sets the amount of time the guard has to get from one check point to the next Alarms can be defined and priorities set for early arrival late arrival unsequenced or missed check points An Unsequenced G uard Tour is defined as a series of check points that must be activated without required time or sequencing 7 Command File Database Text files containing device instructions are stored in the Command File database Command Files are defined by assigning a name and description to one or more commands This file is then saved as a Command File In setting up an ADV Action Group Command Files can be used to set up dependencies In other words when a particular event takes place a designated command file is activated Sending out a text string to the attached device control panel CCTV switcher or other external devices connected by RS232 or TCP IP connection BuLLLUeI
365. s received as an alarm event from the N 1000 with Host G rant set to the O pen Door mode the event will be checked against the WIN PAK 2 0 database If the card is valid for access at that door and time then a pulse door Open command is sent and the event is treated as a normal card event in history The Event View will show it as Host Grant Door unlocked along with card holder name and other related event informa tion If the event oocurs outside the two minute time limit it is processed as an alarm event and access is not granted Programming 259 NOTE e Open Door and Update Panel Same as O pen or mode except the validated card is updated to the panel The event viewer will display Host Grant Card downloaded along with card holder name and other related event information If outside the two minute time limit the door is not unlocked but the card is updated at the panel so the next time the card is used at the panel it will be treated as a valid card at the panel The Host must receive Alarm card events within two minutes to be processed This two minute time limit is enforced in the event that a panel may be buffered or offline remote location for a period that exceeds two minutes therefore preventing any unauthorized door Openings Site Codes Enter up to 8 site codes in this section Site codes are encoded on cards along with a card number to ensure that cards belong to the facility where access is
366. se a time line can be created for each day separately 5 Create a time range for Saturday Sunday and Holi days if desired 6 Click OK to save the Time Zone Clicking Cancel returns to the main database window without saving the Time Zone definition BuLLLUeIBOJd Editing Time Zones Editing a Time Zone is simply a matter of selecting it from the Time Zone database window and clicking the Edit button The detail window becomes active allowing changes to be made When you have made all the necessary edits click OK to return to the Time Zone database window Isolating and Deleting Time Zones Time Zones are used in many places throughout the access control system Deleting a Time Zone not in use anywhere in the system is just a matter of selecting it from the Time Zone database list and clicking the D elete button If the Time Zone is used elsewhere it can not be deleted until it is isolated from its other connections 174 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Isolating Time Zones Use the Isolate function to determine where the Time Zone is being used and to reassign those devices to other Time Zones When attempting to delete a Time Zone that needs to be isolated the following prompt indicates the type of device and number currently using the Time Zone WIH PAE 2 E IN Th Tine Zone cannot ba deleied lor the bokong aaioni 1 Operators eheee tas Tie Zoe 13 Panels reference this Tine Zone ALL references in ih
367. section of Digital Video window For live video use the camera controls in the lower left portion of the digital display window to adjust the camera as necessary See D igital Camera Controls 4 Repeat the above steps to display additional camera views Multiple cameras can be selected by using the Shift or Control keys while selecting cameras Filter Control 1 Click the Filter button to open the Event Filter window 2 Click on the Event Filter tabs to define which events to display in the Digital Video window D efined events will subsequently be displayed in the D igital Video window 146 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide eoneg gt Events associated with a digital camera will be displayed with either a fixed camera icon or a PTZ pan tilt zoom camera icon represented with a zoom lense Selecting one of these events will automatically select its associated camera and recorded video clip for display Clicking Show will display the associated recorded video clip unless live video is selected in which case the associated camera will display live video Digital Camera Controls Live View Controls PaniTi x Zoom x Focus Controls Iris Controls Zoom Controls Pan and Tilt Controls To adjust Pan Tilt click on the control button then in the Pan Tilt adjustment window shown at right above click within the blue circle and drag the mouse in the desired direction The camera position will change accordingly To a
368. she aap Eea aia ieee 383 Editing Barcode Colors irienna a a i i a a eE 384 Changing the Barcode Background Color sssssssssssrrssierssrierirresriernernnrneeers 385 Positioning a Barcode orma aa aa ie a i RA E 385 Deleting a Barcode eee cececsesneeee cess eteee tree taser seer sees eee teseeseieeneeneniaeed 386 Badge ObjectSs Shapes ieii anaa a ate diet Mie ee 387 Adding Shapes to a Badge Layout 387 Formatting a Rounded Rectangle o ccccccceeseeeeeeeeceeeseeseseeeteeeseetseeeaes 388 Changing the Border Color ofa Shape esseere 388 Changing the Background Color of a Shape ee ceeeceeeeteeeeeneeeteeeteeteeeees 389 POSITIONING SHAPES oo eeeeeeeeeecee eee e eee cette a a e a 389 Deleting a Shape witcnt wiatereiei vid aie ee eee ee ae 1d 389 Badge Objects Signature Placeholder 0 ceeeceeeeseeeeeeee eter eieeneeeteeeetneeenee tae 390 Adding a Signature Placeholder to a Badge Layout eccerre 390 Formatting a Signature Placeholder 0 eeeeeeeeeee eee eeteeee eter te tteteeeeetaee 391 Changing the Background Color of a Signature Placeholder sess 391 Positioning a Signature Placeholder eeceeeceeeteee ee eee tee ettetteeteeteeeee 392 Deleting a Signature Placeholder oo eee cette eect ettetaeeieeeteeeaee 392 Badge Objects Bitmap Graphics cece cece etter terete eeteeteeeieeeeeteeeeetaee 392 Adding a Graphic Image to a Badge Layout 393 Importing Graphics for the Badge Layout oc ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaaes 394 Add
369. size badge layout items If it is difficult to select an object use the Change Layering button M or the Select Next Item button to locate the item you want to select Moving Objects Move the cursor over the object to be repositioned until the cursor becomes a four headed arrow Click the object and drag it to the desired location then release the mouse button Badging 351 Resizing Objects Click on an item in the badge area of the window to select it for modification Move the cursor over a sizing handle on the edge of the selected object until the cursor changes to a double headed arrow f Click and drag the sizing handle until the object is the desired size and shape Release the mouse button Badge Object Properties The basic Properties dialog available from the Badge Definition right click menu includes six tabs allowing for settings that apply to the badge layout including Badge Colors Positioning and Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 The Badge tab allows you to import or capture background images The Badge tab is also used to indicate how the image will fit into the available space Use the Colors tab to select the background color for the badge The Positioning tab allows you to change the size and orientation of the badge Track 1 Track 2 and Track 3 tabs are used for magnetic stripe encoding Badge Tab The Badge Layout Utility can set a colored or graphic background for the entire printable
370. sk Properties section of this chapter for a complete list of mask characters and their values The software monitoring data entry can tell the difference between alphabetic and numeric characters but it cannot verify the accuracy of the information The Note Field Template database is opened by selecting N ote Field Template from the Card Holder option on the Configuration menu Card Holders 407 Cogtiquaton window He Z Define G T Deven TT Time Hanegement F B Duit hat wired BR dclega E Cod Hoddier Tab Lapat The Note Field Template database window lists notes by name template and tab if one has been defined for the note fag Note Field Template Ioj Xx PY Name Template Tabs 4l ja Car Lic Plate 1 All Informati ij Car Lic Plate 2 All Informati Car Make 1 All Informati 5 Car Make 2 All Informati ae hdndal 1 All Lekaren ah Tl Detail View m Search and Sort Operations Search Field Per All Criteria Edit a Copy Search For E Delete Sort By Isolate Name Print Report b Q L oJ Q 0 ui 408 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Adding Card Holder Note Fields 1 Click the Add button on the Note Field Template database window The Note Field dialog is displayed Note Field x Name Template ee Cancel 2 Enter a unique Name with up to 30 characters for the note field 3 Use t
371. splayed until the card is issued to a card holder who has photos and or signatures in the card holder database b Q L oJ Q 0 ui 13 Click the down arrow to the right of the Front Side field to select the layout for the front of the card 14 Click the down arrow to the right of the Back Side field and select a layout for the back of the card 15 Click OK to save the card definition Click Cancel to return to the Card database window without saving the new card definition The Print Status box indicates if this badge has been printed 452 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE NOTE Editing a Card 1 With the Card database window open highlight the card to be edited 2 Click the Edit button The Card Record window opens displaying the Card Properties tab 3 Make the desired changes and click OK to save the changes Click Cancel to return to the Card database window without saving the changes To select a different badge layout for the card open the Badge tab of the Card Record window and make a selection To change the badge layout design open the Badge Layout Utility on the Configuration menu Deleting a Card 1 With the Card database window open highlight the card to be deleted 2 Click Delete By default you are asked to confirm card deletions How ever this setting can be changed in Workstation Defaults so that cards can be deleted without confirmation Change the setting by deselect
372. stallation see your Windows documentation Previewing a Badge You can preview a card by selecting it in the Card database window and clicking the Print Badge button as shown below Print Badge Preview 1 of 2 Ed COMPUTERS INC Lauren Smith Previous A Print Cancel The Print Badge Preview allows you to view the cards before printing them If you are printing a batch of cards use the N ext and Previous buttons to scroll through the preview SJOPIOH PueD 460 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Printing a Card 1 Select the card s to be printed from the Card data base window NOTE To select a continuous range of cards hold down the SHIFT key while clicking the first card in the range and the last card in the range To select a noncontiguous group of cards hold down the CTRL control key and click on each individual card to be printed 2 Click the Print button at the bottom of the database window The Select Printed O utput dialog is dis played Printing badge 1 of 2 3 Click Print Cards The Print Badge Preview window opens allowing you to view each card in a batch 4 Click Print to send the cards to the designated printer Chapter 7 Translation Translating Text amp Selecting Languages Creating a Text File for Translation Selecting a Language for Translation Translating Dialogs Menus and Other Text Testing Translations Importing a Language File Translation 46
373. stallations 45 Uninstalling WIN PAK 2 0 60 Installation Overview 39 44 Installation System Requirements 37 44 Badging Printers 39 Hardware 37 Modems and Communications Ports 39 Panel Firmware 39 Performance Configuration 38 Recommended Configuration 38 Report Printers 39 Video Capture Card 39 Interlocking Input and Output Points 279 K Keypads 256 L Letter placeholder 412 License Files 65 Licensing 63 Literal 412 Literal character qualifier 412 Live Monitor View 124 127 Locate 109 111 Log In First Log In 54 Logging In to WIN PAK 2 0 80 M Magnetic Stripe Encoding 368 371 Mask Character Descriptions 411 414 Mask Descriptions 411 Menus User Interface 71 72 Modem Pools 231 244 485 with HUB ACK NAK Modem Pool Con figuration 238 244 C 100 amp 485 with HUB non ACK NAK Modem Pools 233 237 Modems and Communication Ports System Requirements 39 Multiple Interlock Protection MIP 261 Muster Server Configuration 213 Muster Areas 291 Muster Server Overview 33 Muster System Precautions 293 295 Index 575 N Panel Configuration Advanced Options 260 Nesting Areas 291 Panel Configuration Basic 247 248 Networked Systems Panel Configuration Card Format 249 System Setup 41 Norton Utilities 65 Note Field Mask Properties 410 Null String 411 O OH 25 bit card number plus site code 262 OJ 20 bit card number plus site code 261 OL 16 bit card number pl
374. t Note Field Mask Properties Use mask properties to determine and direct the input of information in note fields The Template field on the Note Field dialog is used to enter mask characters For example in the following illustration a mask is entered for a phone number Card Holders 411 Note Field x Name Phone Template jess HHH HHHH extension HHHH Cancel Entering mask characters in the Template field requires the user to enter a like number of the same character when filling in the note field while setting up card holders Following are examples of standard input masks that can be used Mask Descriptions Null String Default No mask Functions as a standard text box U S medium date 20 May 00 U S short date 05 20 00 2 Medium time 05 36 AM Military time 17 23 Mask Character Descriptions Digit placeholder A digit must be entered 0 9 Decimal placeholder The actual character used is the one specified as the decimal placeholder in international settings This character is treated as a literal for masking purposes Thousands separator The actual character used is the one specified as the thousands separator in international settings This character is treated as a literal for masking purposes J SJOPIOH PueD 412 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Time separator The actual character used is the one specified as the time se
375. t Advanced Options check box to include a N 1000 Panel s advanced options in the report 508 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Reporting on CCTV Switcher Devices The CCTV Switcher device reports can display all or a range of CCTV Switchers 1 Select CCTV Switcher on the Device Filter tab to open the Switcher Filter tab of the report window 2 Use the Switchers to Print area of the window to select one of the following to define the report All reports on all CCTV Switchers One reports on an individual Switcher using the From field activated when the One radio button is selected Range reports on a designated range of Switchers using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selected Reports 509 Reporting on Modem Pools Reports generated on Modem Pools can display all modem pools or arange of modem pools 1 Select Modem Pools on the Device Filter tab to open the Modem Pool tab of the report window Device Fier Loop Fite lun feo achive Database I Type Find C SPO 2 Select the appropriate radio button to indicate the Type of modem pool device on which to report The C100 refers to non ACK NAK modem pools and 485 PCI refers to ACK NAK modem pools 3 Use the Loops to Print area of the window to select one of the following to define the report All reports on all modem pools One reports on an individual modem pool using the From field activated when the One radio but
376. t has been dragged from the toolbox onto the floor plan it has a right click menu that allows you to set its properties copy it or delete it NOTE A Floor Plan object must be selected left click before its properties can be changed Be sure you have selected the correct object there is a visible box around the selected object before attempting to set its properties 306 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Adding a Floor Plan 1 Open the Floor Plan database by selecting Floor Plan Definition from the WIN PAK 2 0 Configura tion menu tha koral bauer or 2 Click Add to open the Floor Plan design window along with the Floorplan Toolbox Programming 307 Opening a Floor Plan Background 1 Ope wkn ae a SH EI Enter the Name for the floor plan A name is required The name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters in length Enter a Description of the floor plan if desired The description can be up to 60 alphanumeric characters in length Complete the procedures in the following three sections In the Background area of the Floorplan Toolbox click the Open button The O pen window is dis played edina holed meee U setloresge Du wuLULIDOId me S O 2 Navigate to WIN PAK2 Database FloorPlanImage directory and select a Floor Plan background A sample image called Cosmic Studio 1 wmf can be found in this directory 308 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Click Open T
377. t the operation User Overview 91 NOTE To reassign all the operators in an Operator Level click Reassign All instead of Reassign 6 When finished click OK to close the Isolate window 7 Highlight the operator level in the database list and click Delete Operator Database The Operator D atabase contains information on all WIN PAK 2 0 operators Operators can view and or change various parts of the WIN PAK 2 0 System based on their operator level and the rights assigned to that level Existing O perators are displayed in the O perator database list accessed via the O perator option on the System menu M NUDNO PSN E Ce Pria duris Ajans Upra Ma Test Leaps ir B John Doe Spt Ader Aii GPL Zee H Lowen Sah Pama Dei Operatic HA test Linggedl lr J bi Jom al bi m Li wo fa ae If the D etail View check box is selected the D etail View Operator window is also displayed Clicking either the Add or Edit button activates the Detail View O perator window allowing information to be added or edited 92 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Searching and Sorting the Operator Database List The O perator list can be sorted by O perator Description Last Log In Name or O perator Type using the Search and Sort features Search and Sort Search Field Description 7 Criteria Begins With x Search For Sort By Name w Search Field Define your search using the following
378. t the Modem in the pool that WIN PAK will use to call the remote location 10 Create an ADV for the remote loop configuration click Add in the ADV area of the configuration window 11 On retuming to the Loop Configuration window after setting up the ADV click Next to advance to the Finish window Click Finish and the new panel loop is added to the modem pool in the Device Map E Device OF Xx amp C 100 loop Q Main Drop Line 9 Main Muster Drop Line Modem Pool Non ACK NAK Q Parking Gate East H Q Parking Gate North EA RS 232 com port 8 19200 baud g Video Switcher TR SE GSuLLLUeIBOId 238 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 485 with HUB ACK NAK Modem Pool Configuration Select Modem Pool 485 with HUB ACK NAK from the Communication Server Add menu pick list available by right clicking the Communication Server E Command File Server E E Communication Served aE C00 bop a Man Diop Line L R Man herie Dine The Modem Pool Configuration window is displayed Modem Pool Configuration om LEMAR lanc lamman es aS 1 Enter a unique Name for the Modem Pool using up to 30 characters This is a required field Programming 239 2 Enter a Description of the Modem Pool optional using up to 60 characters 3 Click Add in the Modems in Pool area of the window to open the Modem Configuration dialog
379. tabase See the Action Groups section of the Device Map section of this chapter for further information Programming 323 Setting Check Point Alarms 1 Open the Guard Tour database Configuration menu and select a guard tour from the list 2 Click Edit to open the associated Guard Tour Record 3 Click either the Sequenced Check Point or Unsequenced Check Point tab Bui Tew Recoid Name Sequenced Check Por Uniequanced Check Por ee Alr 2 Duti m t Loca Shonege on 1 KA wm hoo hi 3 Dunes at Emi Cost Oies ooo ooo Emi Coss Oke Taip Ha OO mran ooo 5 Gua tour check pairt Emi ooo ooo E Guged tour check pari win Hia n oo ooo T Loca Sinaga on li Steet Tape KA mran ooo B Moth Gabe Faig Enimie Taig Kia n mran ooo 4 In the Alarms area of the window select the Visible check box to view the current action group settings on the ADV window 5 Click the Update button on the Guard Tour Record window to edit these settings The Abstract D evice Record for the check point is displayed Gu LLLUesiBO1d 324 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 6 Select an Action Group If an action group for reader check points has been defined select it from the Action Group list All of the properties of the selected action group are then applied to this check point Click OK to retum to the Guard Tour Record window If no action group has been defined click the Add button just beneath t
380. tails on the features and functions used on a daily basis to monitor and maintain your access control system The WIN PAK 2 0 graphical user interface allows you to easily and logically set up monitor and maintain all aspects of your access control system The WIN PAK 2 0 Window WIN PAK 2 0 employs a typical GUI to provide access to the system Toolbar Buttons Toolbar buttons along the top of the WIN PAK 2 0 window provide shortcuts to some of the more frequently used options Log In Logs the user out of WIN PAK 2 0 after a prompt and reopens the log in window allowing the user to log in again and reconnect to the database server M NUDNO SN 70 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide m A N E pa a tT Alarm View Opens the Alarm View window from which incoming alarms can be viewed acknowledged and cleared Event View O pens the Event View window which displays current system activity in real time Control Map O pens the Control Map window for operator control of devices Also provides an alternate means of acknowledging and clearing alarms Run Command File Calls the Run Command File dialog allowing the user to run text files containing device instructions stored in the Command Files database Open Floor Plan O pens the O pen Floor Plan database window allowing the operator to open selected floor plans Locate Card H older O pens the Locate Card Holder dialog allowing the opera
381. ted Transaction Coordinator MSSOLServer A SOLServerdgent a Stop IV Auto start service when OS starts MPHGIG MSSQLServer Running SQL Server Service Manager 6 From the Services box select MSSQ L Server The message on the bottom of the SQL Server Service Manager windows will give you the com puter name followed by MSSQ LServer Running Select the SQLServerAgent The message on the bottom of the SQL Server Service Manager windows will give you the computer name followed by SQ LServerA gent Running 7 If MSSQLServerA gent components are not running click on the Start Continue button y rt g of n 0 S v ni 0 5 D 5 A 0 544 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Database Limits and Capacities Database Limits and Capacities monitors the available space for the database system programming and history excluding floor plans photo and badging images and available hard drive space Each monitoring feature has two programmable alarm thresholds One is a warning that action should be scheduled the second is an alarm that immediate action should be taken Only the WIN PAK administrator has permissions to change the threshold values of these alarms Database Limits and Capacities Ed Database Current Size 8 34 MB 0 42 N Warming Threshold 1600 MB 80 00 3 Alarm Threshold 1800 MB 90 00 m Database Disk Drive Free Space Current Free Space 3283 MB 82 24 IN Warming Thr
382. ted box reflects how many lines were translated Translation 473 5 Click OK to save the entry and return to the Trans late Menu Text window Retioie Ta Taek Sone sewchie ec D Siew only untnanclated tarma M Hach coe oF 6 Select the next menu to translate Continue this procedure until all the desired menus have been translated Searching Menu Text Use the Search for field at the bottom of the Translate Menu Text window to search through the list Enter text in the field and click the Find button The first instance of the searchable item is highlighted in the menu list When the Match case box is selected the Search for field becomes case sensitive uone suedi Sorting Untranslated Items Select the Show only untranslated items check box in the lower left corner of the Translate Menu Text window to restrict the items displayed to those still needing translation This can be helpful as you work through a large list of menu items The Total Line of Text will reflect the remaining lines that have not yet been translated 474 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Changing Other System Text Throughout the system the same procedures outlined for changing menu text are used to change text warn ings prompts messages etc that does not fall into the dialog or menu category 1 Select Other Text from the Translate option on the Configuration menu The Translate O ther Text window is displayed of The T
383. tem parameter such as the state of an alarm point Supervision Special electronic protection of a communications line that is accomplished by sending a continuous or coded signal through the circuit When this feature is enabled any change of the circuit will be detected and a tamper alarm will result Surge Protection A device that prevents power surges in system or power wiring from affecting or damaging the EAC system or its components System Administrator A system operator who maintains full privileges to all applications that are part of the access control system This person is familiar with hardware components and the software that controls them He or she is also responsible for assigning passwords and privileges to other system operators System Operators Users The people who operate the system directly through WIN PAK 2 0 O perator privilege is determined by O perator Level System Thresholds The maximum number of components the system is designed to handle T Tailgating In access control this is the act of two or more people entering a controlled area by using a single card Also known as piggyback ing Tamper Alarm An alarm related to the tampering of the systems such as opening the N 1000 control panels cabinet or removing a reader from a wall etc Glossary 567 Tamper Switch A special switch or contact sensor used to create an alarm when an enclosure or device is opened in an unauthorized
384. tem is properly configured Networked Systems BEFORE installing WIN PAK 2 0 for the first time ensure that conditions listed under Standalone Systems and the following listed conditions are met Install network cards on PCs that are used in a networked system Any standard Windows compat ible network card can be used Ensure that machine names use only alphanumeric characters without spaces and that the first charac ter is always alpha i e standard UNC connections e Ensure that networked computers are communicat ing with one another The workstations need to be electronically visible to each other If the computers can communicate you can ping both ways client to server and vice versa Any firewalls proxies rout ers etc between workstations could cause problems unless a clear unrestricted permanent path can be established 7 rt Y J ct O 42 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Upgrades If you are upgrading from a beta or earlier release version of WIN PAK 2 0 or migrating from WIN PAK 1 x make a backup copy of your database files Also make backup copies of floor plan backgrounds card holder photos and signatures When upgrading from release 2 and older versions of WIN PAK 2 0 access database compact and repair the database This will reduce the existing database size which increases the amount of free space and shortens the upgrade time Upgrading from Windows 98 stand alone or serve
385. ter from the Badge option on the Configuration menu 2 When the Badge Printer Setup window is displayed select the printer you want to use for badge printing All the printers installed in your Windows system appear in the list Badge Printer Setup s fe J Pint Both Sides Badging 399 If you are encoding magnetic stripe information select the Encode Mag Stripe check box If you are only encoding the magnetic stripe informa tion and not printing it select Encode Only Select the correct Orientation for your badges The default badge has a landscape orientation Some printer drivers automatically set the correct page size others do not If the correct page size is not displayed use the Page Size options to enter the correct page size in either inches or millimeters The default badge size is 53 5 mm x 85 mm When finished click OK to save the settings and close the Badge Printer Setup window Chapter 6 Card Holders Overview Configuring Card Holder Elements Setting Up Card Holders Access Levels Working with Cards Card Holders 403 Overview Simply stated within the WIN PAK 2 0 System a card is typically a combination of a card holder record and a badge template The Card and Card Holder Databases work together in WIN PAK 2 0 the separation of cards and card holders into two databases adds flexibility to the system A card holder can be issued multiple cards to use as replace
386. tervals Photos can be ghosted that is faded or lightened so they look like a watermark A ghosted photo is harder to photocopy and may provide added security against unauthorized reproduction of ID cards Adding a Photo Placeholder to a Badge Layout 1 Click the Place Photo f3 Badge Definition window toolbar button 2 Click in the badge layout area and drag the box to the desired size and shape NOTE Move the photo placeholder by selecting it and dragging it to the desired position Resize the photo placeholder by selecting it and dragging one of the sizing handles until it is the desired size 378 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Formatting a Photo Placeholder 1 Right click inside the photo placeholder and select Properties Select the Photo tab of the Badge Photo Object Properties window Badge Element Layout X Photo Colors Positioning Photo Index yf IV Stretch width IV Stretch Height M Keep Aspect Ratio Ghosting Low High Kija 2 2 Set the Photo Index if necessary The Photo Index indicates which card holder picture will appear on the badge The default is 1 Select the Stretch Width Stretch Height and Keep Aspect Ratio options to automatically size the photo to fill the placeholder without distorting the photo s proportions Use the Colors and Positioning tabs as documented in the Working with Colors and Positioning Badge Elements sections of this chapter 4 Click OK
387. that the muster system is functioning properly Check that all panels are maintaining the correct time and date It is critical that the time and date be correct on card reads at the muster readers If the time and or date are earlier than that of other reads in the system they will be ignored Program the Scheduler to update panel time and date at least once a day Create a check list for muster procedures Hold regular drills to practice muster procedures Test the Muster Report printer At the Time of Muster Verify that muster reads from the panel have the correct time and date If the date and time are wrong stop the presentation of cards and send the time and date to the panel Programming 295 Test the correction e Repeat all card presentations Multiple presentations of the same card at the Muster reader does not adversely affect the result of the Muster as the most recent time date stamp is the one that is displayed CAUTION A cold restart of the access control panel sometimes occurs if there is a serious power surge on the power or communica tion lines This can cause corruption of the panel s database and time functions The N 1000 panels address the time problem by generating a system alarm 99 Panel Database System Alarms Panel Reset Alarm when the panel experi ences a cold restart WIN PAK 2 0 then sends the current Time and Date to the panel within 60 seconds of receiving this alarm The
388. the alarm has been acknowledged or cleared and the name of the operator Alain Met aili The operator can acknowledge the selected alarm from the Alarm Details window by clicking the Ack button and can clear the alarm by selecting it and clicking Clear A note can be added to an alarm before it is cleared By right clicking on the alarm the operator can open a floor plan or view digital video The message box displays any notes added by the operator plus messages associated with the alarm state User Overview 121 Adding a Note to an Alarm 1 Select the alarm from the Alarm Details list and click the Add Note button The Add Operator Note dialog is displayed Opecsion Hote Deewnineded coud bo fest Lobby pare Loo J aa M NUDNO SN 2 Type a message in the O perator Note free form text area 3 Click OK These notes are included in history and can be printed with the History report NOTE You can also add a note by right clicking on the alarm in the main Alarm View window and selecting Add Note from the subsequent control menu AutoCard Lookup The AutoCard Lookup feature of WIN PAK 2 0 automatically looks up cards from designated readers or card reads with a status priority higher than a designated threshold When activated AutoCard Lookup opens a lookup window that can be left open while other views are monitored A dditioally a digital video popup will be displayed based on the asso
389. the camera you want to view Capturing a Frame from the Live Monitor View Freeze a view by right clicking anywhere in live view area and select Live Right click again and select Save Select a path enter a filename and click Save The image is saved as a jpg file Controlling the Camera As long as the switcher and cameras support focus aperture adjustment zoom pan and tilt and homing presets these features can be controlled remotely from a WIN PAK 2 0 workstation Refer to the CCTV equipment manual to verify that title and time and date features are supported If so the title of the camera viewed on the appropriate monitor by right clicking in the live view area and selecting Send Camera Titles This will display titles on the camera view being monitored The Time and D ate can also be viewed on the screen by right clicking in the live view area and selecting Send Time and Date M NUDNO SN Adjusting Focus Click and hold the upper half of the Focus In Focus Out button to slowly focus on closer objects Click and hold the lower half of the button to slowly focus on distant objects Adjusting Aperture Click and hold the top half of the Iris In Iris Out button to slowly increase the aperture opening of the camera iris allowing more light in Click and hold the bottom half of the button to slowly decrease the aperture of the camera iris letting in less light 126 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Adjusting Zoom
390. the scroll bars to move through the list and data fields Typically all records in the database are displayed in the list while the default sort order varies depending on the database For example Card Holders are displayed alphabetically by last name Search and Sort fields allow you to sort the list in a particular order or to search for records with a particular characteristic The search results are displayed in the list Select records in the database list by highlighting them A range of records can be selected in some databases by holding down the SHIFT key on your keyboard while clicking the first and last record in the range Multiple non contiguous records can be selected by holding down the CTRL key on your keyboard and clicking on each record desired Viewing Detail Database Records Select the Detail View check box at the bottom of a database list in the middle of the window to open the detailed view of a selected database record The Detail View can also be activated by highlighting a record in the list and clicking the Edit button on the database window When accessed via the Edit button a database record can actually be edited as opposed to merely viewed User Overview 75 NOTE Searching and Sorting Database Lists Use the Search and Sort area of the database window to indicate search characteristics to be applied to the records list The number of records returned from the result of your search
391. the scroll bars to reach the end of the list Then click on Ack which will acknowledge the alarms Use the same process to select the acknowledged alarms then click on Clear to clear the alarms Your system is now operational Refer to the rest of this manual to learn how to further customize your WIN PAK system Programming 159 Procedure Quick Start Wizard steps the user through setting up a basic configuration of WIN PAK 2 0 To use the Wizard simply follow the prompts indicated on the screens The initial screen is brought up automatically after logging in with administrator authority Pf Quick Start Wizard g z E Welcome to the WIN PAK 2 0 Quick Start Wizard d The Quick Start Wizard will step the user through a basic configuration of WIN PAK 2 0 making use of common default settings in order to expedite the process Any settings configured by the Quick Start Wizard can be changed using the core program after the wizard is finished Press Help or consult the manual for details Lm 2 9 3 ce Click Next to continue M Show the Quick Start Wizard after each Log in Next gt Cancel 1 Click Next to proceed with configuration The Time Zones screen will appear Pf Quick Start Wizard Access Time Zones A x included in the configuration F Always On 24 Hours 7 days per week incl holidays M 8am 5pm M F 8am 5pm Monday Friday excl holidays 4pm 12am M
392. then select Configure Use the subsequent Configure Area Access dialog to set access for all entrances in this area and to select a time zone Configuring an access area at the topmost branch of the Access Area tree applies the settings to all sub branches To further refine your settings you can repeat this procedure for individual readers Adding an Access Level 1 Open the Access Level database from the WIN PAK 2 0 Card menu 2 Click the Add button to open the Access Level dialog next illustration b Q L oJ Q 0 ui 438 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Entera Name for the access level A name is required The Name field accepts up to 30 charac ters 4 If desired enter a Description of the access level using up to 60 characters 5 Click OK to save the new access level and add it to the Access Level database list Keep in mind how ever that at this point the access level has no rights assigned to it You must now configure the access level Card Holders 439 Configuring an Access Level You can usually save time by configuring a whole Access Area branch then adjusting individual readers For example the Cleaning access level shown in the following illustration has access to all entrances with the exception of HR entrance To configure this access level first grant access to the entire Local Office branch then go back and restrict the one exception 1 With the Cleaning access level selected in t
393. through the end of the To date and time If the check box Only list events between these hours each day is marked only the time range each day will be reported omitting information outside the time range Select a Time Zone that the report should use as a reference For example if you are generating a report for a facility that is located in a different Time Zone select that facility s Time Zone The report will be generated based on the time requested in that Time Zone the time relative to where the report is being generated In other words if you are located in Seattle G MT 08 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada Tijuana and your current time is 7 00 am and you want to generate a report for today from Reports 515 8 00 to 10 00 am for the facility in New York you would select GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada to indicate that the time elements are relative to New York 3 hours ahead in the future relative to your time 5 Use the Transaction Filter tab to select the Trans action Type and Alarm amp Card events the report should include Select all that apply Transaction type possibilities are listed below Transaction Types Alarm reports alarm point alarm and normals System Alarm reports system type alarms not wired points such as Poll Response alarms Operator reports operator activities such as login and logout Database reports basic database activities such as time d
394. time zones communication loops panels cards and card holders and other pertinent information for your system WIN PAK 2 0 uses MSDE as its database engine WIN PAK 2 0 supports alarm partitioning by operator making it possible to control which alarms a particular operator monitors Highly detailed operator definitions down to the level of individual points readers and note fields allow the protection of confidential information while making needed information available WIN PAK 2 0 database information is easily edited searched and sorted A wide variety of reports can be exported viewed on screen or printed Introduction 27 Access Control Management WIN PAK 2 0 uses Floor Plan views to monitor and control many of the daily functions of access control The floor plan provides a graphic representation of devices including doors panels inputs outputs and CCTV equipment Representations of system devices abstract devices or ADVs signal the state of system hardware and give the user control over these devices For example a door can be locked or unlocked from an ADV on the floor plan a CCTV camera view can be switched from one monitor to another and information can be sent to a control panel Control Areas are defined by adding devices to a Control Map which provides another way to control the devices Separate Event and Alarm views display alarms and other system information in list form Alarms can be ack
395. ting Home Position T A Home Position is the most utilized camera view Home Position can be set for each camera so that it will return to its home position with the correct focus aperture and zoom settings when the Home button located in the center of the pan tilt arrows is clicked The Home button is a square button located among the the pan tilt arrows The following steps outline setting a home position 1 Adjust the pan tilt and aperture settings for the view that you want to make your home position 2 Right click the Home button and click Set Home Now your camera will return to this view anytime you click the Home button WIN PAK 2 0 CCTV Options Pan Camera Time Pan Tilt Zoom Focus Iris Seek Set Select Brand Switch Title Date Tilt Zoom Iris Limit Limit Limit Limit Home Home Monitor Burle X X X X X X o o o o X X o Dedicated Micros X X X X X o o o o fe o fe 0 Geutebruk x o x x x x o o o o x x o J avelin x x x x x x x x x x x x o NCI CCTV X x x x x x x x x x x x o Panasonic X o o X X X o o o o X o o Pelco X o fe X X X o o o fe X X X Vicon X fe X X X X o o o o X X X X option is available and usable through WIN PAK 2 0 O option either not available or not supported by WIN PAK 2 0 M NUDNO JOSN 128 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Floor Plan View Floor plan views can be used to both monitor and control devices in the access control system The design of your access
396. tion tab 8 Close the Service Manager User Interface Workstation 1 If the User Interface is running exit it 2 Run the System Manager on the client PC On Windows XP systems Click on Start right click on My Computer select Properties then select the Computer Name tab Use the full computer name When fininished close System Properties 3 Select the User Interface tab 4 Click the Add button 5 In the Display Name text box type a descriptive name to identify the database server in the list 6 In the Database Server N ode Name text box type the machine name of the server machine If you wish you can put the IP address in place of the machine name 7 Verify that the RPC Endpoint is the same as the one you wrote down in step 3 of the Server setup 8 In the Database Archive Server N ode Name text box type the machine name of the server machine If you wish you can put the IP address in place of the name 9 Verify the RPC Endpoint is the same as the one you wrote down in step 5 of the Server setup 10 Click OK 11 Click OK 7 rt Y J ct O 58 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide At this point you re ready to start up the User Interface with the new database server 1 Run the WIN PAK 2 0 User Interface 2 Type in your login name and password 3 If displayed select the server from the drop down list in the Server Name area 4 Click Connect 5 Click OK Concurrent Connections Now your syste
397. tnsintnntnntintnnnnnannntnnnnnnnna 180 Editing a Holiday Group s sssssssssssissrssssrrsiersstrstitnnnrisinntnnrinintrnnrnnintrnnrnnn trent 182 Isolating and Deleting a Holiday Group sesssssssrererrirreererirriererierrernerenn 183 Device Map sretnima ra a ea adh Ee Eaa e chad han Mead hens 185 Physical Devices and Abstract Devices 0 eeeeeeeeteeeeeete terete eeteteeetiettetneeenee 185 Using the Device Map ou eeccsecesesneeee cess eteeeeeetaeeeseeeeeeesaeesaeeaeeeaeseneeeeeeeenaas 186 Device Maintenance ennonn aina aaia a aa a a a i aS 186 AbSstraGt DeC OSa aaa aa E n cuits AA a aA Ona A nets inane eae 187 Abstract Device Definitions ssssesssssssesistrsrirrerinersrirtnsineistnntnsinernrnnentnernn 188 Setting UP ADVS i ina a aoa o er eaaa bleed niet AEE 189 Abstract Device Database ssesssssisiressssssistittt ttn sttt tut Ant AStA tANENSESEENEA NENEKA EENEN EE 192 ACUN Group Sra e arna ita dio an nt a aa a aahi 194 ADV ACON GROUPS atenir asie a a A ia t eaa e aaea alle 197 ServerS SEMicess icss niian a needs tect a ag A a aaia 203 COMMUNICATION Serner iensen aa a iiaa E AA ATES 203 Command File Server sssessssssissessssirinistrsrnttntinnstnntnsinintnnttntnnnnnntnnnnnn ana 207 Schedule SEVEn miannan a aa a e e e eat A a ieee 209 GUard Tour Senei tiiiga a ra fended ithe aaa iaa 211 Tracking and Muster Server ssseisssiseisisiieistnttitiitisitinnritinn areni nni nanena 213 RapidEye Digital Video ee eeesesseeee cess eeeeeeneee
398. to which it is attached For example Custom Access Level 3 is attached to Card 3 442 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Customizing One Entrance 4a Customize one entrance by right clicking it and selecting Configure Access The Configure En trance Access window is displayed Configure Entrance Access x IV Customize access for this entrance Remove Access from this entrance Set Access for this entrance Time Zone 6am 7pm x 7 days Bam 7pm 7 days per week incl holidays g J gt Gostormize aroun for this panel Cancel Select the Customize access for this entrance check box Indicate whether the custom access level should Re move access from this entrance or Set access for this entrance Select a Time Zone for the custom access level Click OK to return to the Custom Access Level window Customizing a Group of Entrances 4b To customize a group of entrances right click the branch containing the group and select Configure Access The Configure Area Access window is displayed Indicate whether to Remove access from all entrances in this area or to Set access for all entrances in this area Select a Time Zone for the custom access level Card Holders 443 NOTE Time zones that are common to all readers in the branch are shown A time zone that is unique to a specific reader can only be defined by the individual reader not as the whole group Click OK to return to
399. to 300ppi pixels per inch Keep in mind the orientation and size of the badge as well as the placement of photos barcodes and text so important parts of your background are not obscured Create your background image to be as close in size as possible to the printable area of your badge K eeping the sizes the same will avoid distortion or loss of image quality caused by resizing or stretching the image to fill the badge To Import a Background Graphic 1 Right click in the badge background area of the Badge Definition window and select Properties Open the Badge tab of the Badge Object Properties window 2 Click the Import button The familiar O pen dialog is displayed allowing you to navigate to the folder containing the graphic file to be imported and select the file 3 Double click the file name or highlight it and click Open The graphic file is added to the Background Image list and to the Badge Image folder in the WIN PAK 2 0 database 356 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Positioning Badge Elements The Positioning tab of the Badge O bject Properties window allows you to change the size of the badge or its orientation determine the alignment of objects within a photo or graphic placeholder rotate an object on the badge layout and adjust a background image s position on the badge For example To Work with a Background Image 1 Right click in the badge background area of the Badge Definition window and select
400. ton is selected Range reports on a designated range of modem pools using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selected 510 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Reporting on RapidEye Devices The RapidEye device reports can display all or a range of RapidEye devices 1 Select RapidEye on the Device Filter tab to open the RapidEye tab of the report window 2 Use the Devices to Print area of the window to select one of the following to define the report All reports on all RapidEye servers One reports on an individual RapidE ye server using the From field activated when the One radio button is selected Range reports on a designated range of RapidEye server using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selected Reports 5 m 1 Floor Plan Report 1 Select the Report Floor Plan report from the Reports database window The Floor Plan report window opens with the Filter Floor Plan tab displayed Report Fipa Plan Floor Plan Fite Sort i Floor Plans to Fint Fiom E A l access coniro epiiriari r m One Hanga Flos 3 Local Buld Bitia Have r Fietaiis ADW Tipa ADN Eae Floor Emit E yet p 2 Use the Floor Plans to Print area of the window to select one of the following to define the report All reports on all floor plans One reports on an individual floor plan using the From field activated when the One r
401. ton to bring the selected object to the top layer of the badge 4 Click the Properties button to edit an object s properties without changing its order except for blockout Badging 397 Select Next Item Badge items are layered as they are placed which may occasionally make it difficult to select a badge item either because it is overlapped by another item or because its color makes it difficult to see In such cases use the Select Next Item i button on the Badge Definition window toolbar to select the next item in the layering order Each time you Click the button it moves to the next item in the layering order Continue selecting items until you have the one you want Configuring the Badge Printer WIN PAK 2 0 can print cards to a variety of printers Most any badge printer supported by the Windows operating system can be used for badge printing Two sided PVC printing or magnetic stripe encoding requires printers that are configured for these features Supported printers include D ataCard ICII II IV Express Select and Magna Ultra Electronics Turbo and Northern Fargo 4250 C25 L20 printers In addition Windows compatible laser printers can be used to print cards to plain paper Install your printer or printers using the Windows Control Panel Consult your Microsoft documentation for more information 398 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Configuring the Badge Printer Procedure 1 Select Configure Badge Prin
402. tor the initialization process To cancel panel initialization right click on the Panel and select Cancel Initialization Programming 285 Defining Access Tracking amp Control Areas Access Areas Access Areas are defined by adding entrances doors and readers from the control panels to a tree structure An ADV must be defined for an entrance before it is available for selection Access Areas list entrances and indicate where they are located The Access Areas are then used to define Access Levels Access Levels are added to cards as they are entered into the Card database A card must have an Access Level which allows the card holder entry to selected areas during assigned times and restricts access to all other areas and to unassigned times An Access Level is defined by choosing selected entrances in an Access Area and a selected time zone during which access is allowed BuLLLUeIBOJd For example to define an Executive Access Level having access to all doors 24 hours a day you would select all entrances in the Access Areas assign access rights and a 24 hour 7 day time zone For a Visitor Access Level you might select the main door between 8 00 am and 5 p m Monday through Friday Defining Access Areas Access Areas provide a logical map of your access control system showing entrances doors and their relative location within the system Once panels and readers have been defined and added to the Device Ma
403. tor to search by card holder name or card number for the last time and place a card was used Card Opens the main Card database window allowing the operator to search and sort the card list and to add edit or delete cards Card Holder Database O pens the Card Holder Database window allowing the operator to search and sort the cardholder list and to add edit or delete card holders Reports O pens the Reports database window allowing the user to generate view and print reports Help Topics O pens the Help menu providing access to on line help files Log Out Logs the operator out of the user interface and logs the client out of all servers User Overview 71 Menus The following menus and menu options are available from the main WIN PAK 2 0 window File Menu Log In Log Out Configure Badge Printer Reports Workstation Defaults System Defaults Database Maintenance Database Limits Capacities Exit View Menu Select Language Toolbar Status Bar Operations Menu Locate System Events Events Alarms AutoCard Lookup Live Monitor Floor Plan Control Map Command File Guard Tour Tracking and Mustering Digital Video Card Menu Card Card Holder Access Level Bulk Card Add Bulk Card Delete System Menu Operator Operator Level Workstation Defaults System Defaults Reports Menu Reports M NUDNO JOSN 72 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Configuration M
404. tricted during a time zone Set up a master time zone of 24 hours a day 8 days per week Sunday through Saturday plus holidays D esignate additional time zones to meet the needs of your facilities for example day shift second shift third shift etc Holiday time blocks can be included in any time zone Holiday Groups are established because holidays are often treated differently than other days For example only certain employees may have access on these days or doors that are normally unlocked during business hours might be locked on holidays A Holiday Group is a selection of days designated as holidays They must be defined in the Holiday database then be selected in the time zone definition of the appropriate control panel 3 Define the Device Map Devices must be defined and added to the system via the Device Map It is not necessary to have all the devices operational before they are defined Devices include communication hardware servers panels readers CCTV and digital video equipment Programming 153 Device ioj x E Command File Server Communication Server EA Guard Tour Server ED Schedule Server i Tracking and Muster BA Video Digital Following is an overview of device types that must be added to the Device Map Communication Server is a branch on the Device Map which defines your operating system active commun ication ports and any multi port boards Information you need to kno
405. ts on a designated range of guard tours using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selecte Reports 513 3 Further refine the report by selecting one of the following Check Point Types Input reports on inputs exclusively Reader reports on readers exclusively Both reports on both inputs and readers 4 On the Sort tab of the report window use the Sort Order list to select a category determining how to sort the guard tours Choose whether the category should appear in ascending or descending order 5 Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report 6 Click Close to exit the G uard Tour report window and return to the main Reports database window History Report 1 Select the History report from the Reports database window next illustration The Report History report window opens with the Date and Time Filter tab displayed 514 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Hope Halep GM T Ceai Taree ES A Caead 2 Indicate a D ate Range for the report using the From and To fields and browse buttons Set precise time for the report using the spinner boxes to the right of the Date Range fields Use the Daily Time Range area of the window to set a specific time frame for the report The time will begin at the From date and time continuous
406. tter teenie tee tneetneetee teenie 330 Adding Custom Commands nrinig teei heeds el eed aE ES 331 Editing Command Files ceceeceee cette eet e eee eee eettetne eens see te EnEn nnn Ennan E aa 332 Deleting COMMANGA Fil S 0 ee eeetee ee eee eete eee tee sees te a a oa A ta a 332 Digital Video Configuration 0 eee ee tte ee nett ete tee eete tne ttee tee taeteenieeeeetaee 333 Alarm View and Auto POPUP ou cece cette etteteeeeteeeceetaetaesieetieeeneetaetaaes 335 12 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide V BO GUNG ies rnein EE AE EE E EEA ieeniains 337 Badge Layouts Database sssssssssesiserstttintitttnttntittantAnNANEANEAEAEENSEAEEANANES EEEN En EEEE na 339 Adding Badge Layouts to the Database seseeeerreeerierieiernrrennren 340 Copying a Badge Layout cece eeeeene eens eeeeeetee eee teeeeeteetieeeeeeaes 341 Editing a Badge Layout eee et eee sete eeie eter tite stesnieeeeecenaetaee 342 Isolating and Deleting a Badge Layout eect eeeeeteeeeeeeeeaee 342 Creating Badges iinei a aaan a oaa ne aa catia cneeasnnaiuialhaes 343 Badge Definition WINdOW s ssssssssrssssssstrsrsssnstietattnintitttntnntantuntnntantnnnnnAAnnn nn cee eaenee 344 Badge Definition Window Right Click M NUS ssssssssssrisrssrssrsersrrsrrsriernrreernernes 346 Badge Objects Introduction sssssssssssseissrseistiseistntrrstistntrittnttntr tntan nn nrnna ranean ea 349 Adding Objects to the Badge Layout sssssessrreeerierierierirrinrieninrrernerenn 350 Movin
407. tting on the control panel and falls within the range of 1 to 63 for a C 100 or 1 to 31 for a 485 loop Consult the N 1000 Installation Manual for details Create an ADV for the panel by clicking the Add button in the ADV section upper right corner of the configuration window On returning to the Panel Configuration Basic window after creating the ADV click the Next button to advance to the Panel Configuration Card Format window next illustration Programming 249 Panel Configuration Card Format Panel Conliguiaion Caid Fidi 2 AB qe Fl Porsaseresnm ooo 2 a ERE Pret ff Fish o fi fer fez fes fee te Pret f2 022 7s o E fo fer fez e3 ee ca Prat fat is hf fer ee es Be cas rer ELT err TT T ees e ATT T rarer TTT TTT m T ff T m T ff T Du wuLULIDOId cg yee Cani He Select either ABA or Wiegand as the card type The Inverse Card Formats section allows the selected Card Format to be read inverted These default values will rarely need to be changed If in doubt accept the Wiegand Non inverse default as this is the most common application ABA Card Format If ABA is selected as the card type 12 digit 16 digit or a user defined card format can be selected m e Fea Przsase7esoin iz r EA oe fet EE r Fi 250 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Wiegand Card Formats If Wiegand is selected as the card type the fields in the lower area of the window are active and show
408. ture as to which entrances are included in this access level The Device Map is displayed on a tree but unlike the other tree structures devices are defined as they are added to the Device Map 8 Cc a ct J 32 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Multiple Server Design WIN PAK 2 0 is a true 32 bit application which is designed to operate in Microsoft Windows X P 2000 NT operating systems The WIN PAK 2 0 server modules load as services WIN PAK s multi threading design takes full advantage of multiple processor computers as supported by the Windows operating systems WIN PAK 2 0 is a three tier client server application based on Microsoft tools and standards This design provides a robust reliable and flexible program Because it is ODBC Open Database Connectivity compliant existing databases can be converted for use with WIN PAK 2 0 WIN PAK 2 0 is comprised of three primary modules the Database Server Communications Server and User Interface These modules can be installed on one computer or on different machines on a network Communications are handled by the Communication Server which can be on its own computer The databases are handled by the Database Server which can be on another computer The User Interface can be installed on one or more other computers which serve as client workstations This provides a distribution of system activities and processes across the defined computers thereby significant
409. uence an action on one point causes a reaction from a second point Interlocks initiated by an input point change of state are defined on the Panel Configuration Inputs window To edit input interlocking expand the Device Map and right click the panel you want to edit Select Configure and click the Inputs tab Interlocks initiated by an output point change of state are defined on the Panel Configuration Outputs window To edit output interlocking expand the Device Map and right click the panel you want to edit Select Configure and click the Outputs tab ComponentA From the Name list on the Inputs or Outputs window select the check box to indicate the input or output point that will initiate the interlock sequence For the purposes of this explanation this point will be called Component A A change of state on Component A causes a reaction to Component B Select the Interlocking check box to activate the Interlocking area of the window GSuLLLUeIBOJd Component B Select I O or G for an input point output point or group respectively then select the Point to react to a change of state of Component A This point will be Component B 280 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Input Action 1 Specify the action Component B takes when Component A goes into an active state input or on output Action 2 Specify the action for Component B to take when Component A returns to a normal state input or off output
410. un from Archive Database Select Tracking or Muster Area Print Preview Tracking and Mustering Areas Print Sort Order Time and Date x Ascending Export File Estim Pages C Descending Clear All Close REEL Use the Select Tracking or Muster Area drop down list to indicate the area on which to report Select the Sort Order and whether Ascending or Descending Click the Print button A standard print dialog is presented indicate the printer to which the report should be sent M NUDNO SN 144 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Digital Video EI Chapt all Piia BP Sie Comers Ee Show BP Sted Comer t C Che From RP Sici Comer t SP Giet Comers 1 vaa 1 31 45 M 1 Select Digital Video from the Operations menu to open the Digital Video window shown above 2 Inthe Digital Video window select a desired camera 3 Select whether to view live video or recorded video Clip From in the View Video section of the win dow then click Show to operate the desired camera or display recorded video from the camera Depending on the selection either the D igital Video Retrieved window for recorded video or the D igital Video Display for live video will open next illustration User Overview frat al Fikes Depli Masaru video Digla 16 NOTE C WA 0 3 s 2 The recorded video displayed will be displayed for the time selected in the View Video
411. until it receives the same number of unbuffer commands If the panel receives a hard unbuffer command it changes to unbuffered mode regardless of the number of soft buffer commands it has received Hard Unbuffer Soft Unbuffer A hard unbuffer command overrides any number of soft buffer unbuffer commands The software keeps track of the number of buffer commands received by panels The panel remains in buffered mode until it receives the same number of unbuffer commands If the panel receives a hard unbuffer command it changes to unbuffered mode regardless of the number of soft buffer commands it has received Glossary 559 Hardware Components The individual physical components in an access control system These include the communications loop panels locks readers sensors CCTV cameras and monitors printers and workstations Hardware The physical equipment that makes up an access control system Hardwired A system of control panels connected to a communication line loop or multi drop that is connected directly to a computer Holidays Exceptions to the normal way of operating an EAC system A holiday on a weekday for example can cause normally opened doors to remain locked Host Computer The main computer in an EAC network that is directly connected to a controller or controller network Holds EAC software and databases and manages the system I Icons A picture or graphic that represents a concept Infra
412. us site code 261 Online Help 22 Online Registration 64 Operating System Overview 37 Operator Database 91 98 Adding Operators 95 96 Operator Information 97 98 Searching and Sorting 92 94 Setting Operator Passwords 96 97 Operator Guide Overview 69 Operator Level Database 81 Adding an Operator Level 82 Configuring Operator Levels 83 86 Configuring Rights Summary Chart 86 Copying an Operator Level 87 Editing Operator Levels 88 Isolating and Deleting an Operator Level 88 91 Viewing and Reassigning Operators 89 91 Operator Levels and Operators 81 Operators Adding 95 96 Output Points Interlocking 279 P Panel Buffer Commands 133 Panel Firmware Required 39 Panel Loops Editing 231 Panels 245 284 Adding Panels 246 278 Panel Configuration Inputs 263 Panel Configuration Options 254 Panel Configuration Outputs 267 Panel Configuration Readers 273 Panel Configuration Time Zones 252 253 Configuration Wizard 245 246 Initializing Panels 280 284 From Control Map 281 From Floor Plan 282 Interlocking Input and Output Points 279 Passwords 97 156 Performance Configuration For Installation 38 PFR Power Fail Reroute 261 Physical Devices and Abstract Devices 185 Previewing and Printing Cards 459 460 Print Alarms 100 Reports 484 Programming Command File Database 326 335 Defining Access Tracking amp Control Areas 285 303 Device Map 185 Floor Plans 3
413. used at selected readers Badge layouts or designs are templates that define the size and properties of a badge as well as the placement of elements on the badge Badge templates are then associated with cards When a card is issued to a card holder his or her information is automatically merged with the badge template creating an individual card Badges can be printed on Technology or non Technology cards Most any Windows compatible printer ink jet laser or PVC card printer can be used to print badges Special PVC card printers allow two sided printing and magnetic stripe encoding The Badge Layout utility can also be applied in Human Resources applications providing photos and other Card Holder information The Badge Layouts database contains information on various badge layouts and designs in your WIN PAK 2 0 System The Badge database also provides access to the Badge Layout Utility which is used to create and edit badges The Badge Layouts database contains badge templates or designs not access cards 340 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Adding Badge Layouts to the Database Open the Badge Layouts database by selecting Badge Layout Utility from the Badge option from the Configuration menu ea Card Back Please Return Statement 55 Standard Card Photo Name Sig and Barcode Badging 341 The main database window contains a list of badges which can be searched and sorted either by name or desc
414. ust use a dot matrix printer to view the printed event immediately If you choose to use a laser printer the alarms will print one page at a time a page being defined by the number of lines in the Lines Per Page field User Overview 101 NOTE When printing to a port do not use the same printer for alarms and reports Since alarm messages bypass the spooling queues alarm messages may appear in the middle of a report Port Name Select the port to which your printer is connected Lines per page Indicate the number of lines per page 66 is the default Sounds Use the Sounds tab to indicate instances when you may want sound files to run when an alarm is triggered Work stator Cheuk Dectetr Alam Panter Sound Directories Wakneper Restore F Enables Sgram Soundi Enable Cad F Erabile Ack I Enab Oes F Enss Operaio Hote o Jo ca e foo e Click the Enable System Sounds check box to enable sound files triggered by system events Select each of the options where you want sound files to be activated NOTE The sound card must be present in the operating system to enable the sounds option M NUDNO PSN 102 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Directories The Directories tab of the Workstation D efaults window is used to indicate the path to the Sound and Language files Path to Sound Files The current path for sound files is displayed Additional sound files can be co
415. utton 6 When you have completed the data item list click OK to save your changes Badging 371 NOTE Magnetic Stripe Encoding Options The options available for a given track depend on which format is selected Expression Any combination of text or database fields can be entered Either type the desired text or double click an item in the Fields list to enter it in the Expression field Fields Select a field and double click it to add it to the expression All the Card and Card Holder note fields are displayed in this list Variable Length If the Variable Length check box is selected the field length is adjusted to match the number of characters in the data item Length If a value is entered for Length the data item is truncated or padded so that it is precisely that number of characters Fill Enter the character to be used to pad the data to fit a fixed length field Justify This only applies to fixed length data items If a data item is shorter than the number of characters allotted for it it can be justified left center or right within those characters All other characters are set to the Fill character 372 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Badge Objects Text and Text Boxes Text is added to badge layouts by first drawing a text box then typing in the text The appearance of the text can be changed by changing its font color size or orientation Text can be justified horizontally and
416. vailable to all operators Normally only ADVs that are added to Control Areas and configured for an operator s level are available This could cause a problem if an operator creates an ADV An administrator would be required to add the ADV to the Control Areas and provide access to the new ADV in the operator level Selecting the Grant all operators option means an operator can create an ADV and then use it in the system Once an ADV is added to the Control Areas those settings override the global access 106 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Maximum Length of Card Numbers Use the drop down list to indicate if the maximum length of card numbers is 5 12 or 16 This setting determines the largest card number handled by the software The setting does not affect the control panel Allow only numeric Card Numbers Prevents alpha characters from being entered into the card number field of the card database Alarm Handling The Alarm Handling tab of the System D efaults window is used to indicate how alarms should be handled within the system Setien Conlig w Dates Alsen Handing Fe hub Popup Alan Vi Safire D Beep Urii Alam Aicrowkediged Fe Qin Hot Close sirios Lindi al Akas are dock rodeciged F Pts Unetaned Aad I Aequie a Resconse when dchnovdedging Alann Autoruticely Cies Acknovdecged Aans E Caa Alain on Homa Ony Miedema fof avaris navani vier 00 Buile alara lint per point 107 Autocar cand raads im per doe
417. ve 2 Reenter the password in the Confirm N ew Pass word field User Overview 97 Working with Passwords A good strategy for choosing a password that is both easy to remember but hard to decode is to pick a simple phrase preceded or followed by one or more numbers Enter it without spaces and capitalize each word Such a password cannot be easily decoded either by a random number generator or by a dictionary decoder For the greatest security use a combination of both letters and numbers Avoid familiar terms such as your company name initials birth dates etc IWARNING Passwords are case sensitive When choosing a password remember whether the letters are capitalized or not Operator Information Use the O perator Information tab of the O perator Record window to set more specific details for this M NUDNO PSN particular operator Upersho Necmi Ei Operas Paced pmao infcamadon Operate Ler Ce Hii Tare Zora E nH F Language a a ee ee LL 1 Use the Operator Level list to associate an O pera tor Level with this operator 98 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 2 If the operator is also a Card Holder use the list or browse button to locate them and add them to the Operator Information window NOTE Operators do not necessarily have to be card holders For example an operator can simply be Guard 3 Indicate the Time Zone during which the operator will be able to log on to t
418. ve custom access levels assigned to them 492 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 9 Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report 10 Click Close to exit the Card report window and return to the main Reports database window Card History Report 1 Select the Card History report from the Reports database window The Report Card History report window opens with the Date and Time Filter tab displayed E E E 2 Indicate a Date Range for the report using the From and To fields and browse buttons Set precise time for the report using the spinner boxes to the right of the D ate Range fields Reports 493 3 Use the Daily Time Range area of the window to set a specific time frame for the report The time will begin at the From date and time through the end of the To date and time If the check box Only list events between these hours each day is marked only the time range each day will be reported omit ting information outside the time range Select a Time Zone that the report should use as a reference For example if you are generating a report for a facility that is located in a different Time Zone select that facility s Time Zone the time relative to where the report is being generated In other words if you are located in Seattle G MT 08 00 Pacific Time US amp
419. ve length of light reflected by or transmitted through an object It is the characteristic commonly called color and identified by color names such as yellow green or orange Hue values range from 0 red through 239 running through the spectrum and returning to red Badging 365 Saturation is the strength of the color It indicates the amount of gray in the color Saturation values range from 0 gray with no trace of color through 240 fully saturated color with no gray e Luminosity is the relative brightness or darkness of the color Luminosity values range from 0 black through 240 white with the untinted color at about 120 Red Green Blue The RGB model is based on the representation of the visible spectrum by mixing red green and blue light Computer monitors are based on this model creating colors by emitting light through red green and blue phosphors The RGB model assigns a value for each pixel ranging from 0 black to 255 white for each color component For example the red on the Basic color palette has a Red value of 255 a Green value of 0 and a Blue value of 6 Color Solid The color swatch shows the color as it appears on the monitor and gives an approximation of how the color appears when printed Because monitors can only show a certain number of colors at a time the colors may be dithered This dithering appears on the monitor only The color prints as a solid The Solid swatch shows
420. vels 0 ee ceceesesseeeeceseeeneeseeeeeteeeeseesaeseaesneneneetaeeeenieeas 88 Isolating and Deleting an Operator Level 0 0 eee eteeeeeeteeeeeteeteetnaeees 88 Operator Databases it cots dissidents ements anne tute A iota aAa 91 Searching and Sorting the Operator Database List 92 Adding Operators oein i eia a A Eaa a E EE O ani 95 Contents 9 Setting Operator PASSWOMS 0 eect ee ee eee test teeter tees te etetteeteeteenee tae 96 Operator Informations ati aie ene Ch tei enna ae 97 Workstation Defaults c cece ceeeeteec etter ene eene ete teste snes ceeeaeceeseecaetaecieeseetaes 98 Alarm Pinte fameen a Mane ale adalat net eta Deledarteetahe 100 SOURS i citty cauicie tina a Lanett ieda thatthe A stats feratitia atta dee 101 DIFE CLONES trex ote tale Peace Pirie att Oa ea OR at Oe ree se ete ae es 102 Wallpap Chic victacets ieries ith aie Aaa gece ee ekg A 103 RESTON eaa edoae A EEA ten Pee N AAA E A A 104 System Defaults ieis siia ae aia a ia a ote dieu edi EEE OTERA 105 Alarm HandlinG t cocci toads GAD ATA acai tnt Bae A R eh 106 Operate e anaupata Ais Maa aad eet a tas Gn hee ae 109 Locate Card Holder reniei Mem ht Aide i duten Lat 109 Locating a Card s LaStUSC oo eee ene eens etter tee teetestaeseiesneeeceeeaes 109 SySteMiE VENG aai iin saria E AA natn ade dein A E a A i 111 Viewing System Events cecccccesecsecneecneceneseeeeeeeeeeeseesaesesseeseeeteeetaetaae 112 EVENEVICW finigis Want iti ahd a a eid ath hee
421. w 6 Select the next menu to translate Continue this procedure until all the desired menus have been translated uone jsueaIL WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Searching Menu Text Use the Search for field at the bottom of the Translate Menu Text window to search through the list Enter text in the field and click the Find button The first instance of the searchable item is highlighted in the menu list When the Match case box is selected the Search for field becomes case sensitive Sorting Untranslated Items Select the Show only untranslated items check box in the lower left corner of the Translate Menu Text window to restrict the items displayed to those still needing translation This can be helpful as you work through a large list of menu items The Total Line of Text will reflect the remaining lines that have not yet been translated Testing Translations To test a translation click Select Language from the Configuration menu and choose the desired language from the list Click OK The terms you have entered should appear in hte User Interface dialogs menus and other messages Importing a Language File If you have a translation file for a given language copy the file to the WIN PAK 2 0 Language Files folder The default path is C Program Files WIN PA K 2 Language Files You can verify or change this path by selecting Workstation Defaults from the WIN PAK 2 0 System menu opening the Directories tab and checkin
422. w when setting up a Communication Server include the machine name the operating system and the available communication ports Communication Loops branch off the Communication Server Once you have a Communication Server defined CCTV video switchers RS232 ports and communication loops can be added to it You will enter a definition for the type of communication the loop uses e g RS 232 or RS 485 and the communication settings for your com ports or TCP IP address Once a loop is added to a Communication Server panels can be added to the loop Panels are added to communication loops The panel definition includes basic information on the type of panel e g N 1000 N 1000 III or N 1000 IV the card format it accepts time zones inputs outputs groups and readers Interlocking of input points and output points as well as shunt times and similar details are entered in the panel definition Du wuLULIDOId 154 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Servers configured on the Device Map allow communication and control between various WIN PAK 2 0 devices and databases including the Command File Server Communication Servers Guard Tour Server Schedule Server and Tracking and Muster Server ADVs abstract devices should be created as each device is defined The ADV can be assigned to an object placed on floor plans or control map that have both monitoring and control functions RapidEye is a branch on the device map which defines t
423. when you are installing a workstation on a networked system User Interface and Comm Server Select User Interface and Comm Server installation when you are installing the communication server on a networked system and the PC may also be used as a workstation Communication Server Only Select the Comm Server Only installation when you are installing the communication server on a networked system To optimize resources in high use systems use the System Manager to disable unused system modules e g the Guard Tour Server or the Muster Server 7 rt Y J ct O 46 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Installation Procedure NOTE WIN PAK 2 0 software is distributed on an autorun CD along with the CD release notes and other technical documents This procedure describes the Complete Installation option The User Interface Only option is described later The procedure is the same for both up to Step 6 where the user is given the option of choosing which type of installation is desired During installation you may be asked if you want to overwrite existing files Keep your existing dll files Whenever asked Do you want to keep this file click Yes Depending on the computer and OS one or more screens displayed in this procedure may or may not appear Allow approximately 45 minutes for a first time not upgrade installation 1 Exit any Windows programs that may be running Insert the WIN PAK 2 0 CD
424. wo minutes of computer time The control panel was updated with valid card information Access was granted to the user if event is within two minutes of computer time The control panel was not updated with valid card information A card was denied entry because it was used with an invalid PIN A card was denied entry because it did not have a proper facility code A card was denied entry because it was used outside its time period A card that is being traced was used and entry was granted A valid card has been used and entry was granted 200 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Door Output Action Group Action Message Description De energized The output of the door is not energized Energized The output of the door is energized Trouble The output of the door is not responding Group Action Group Action Message Description De energized The group of relays is not energized Energized The group of relays is energized Guard Tour Sequenced Action Group Action Message Description Early Arrival The guard arrived early at the designated check point reader Late Arrival The guard arrived late at the designated check point reader Missed The guard missed the designated check point reader Out of Sequence The guard is out of sequence Guard Tour Server Action Group Action Message Description Server OK The Guard Tour server is working properly Server Trouble The Guard Tour server is NOT working properly Verify that
425. x to have the font automatically sized to fit the text box NOTE Enabling this option changes the text size to fit the text box when resized The text will grow or shrink proportionally when the box is resized This may not be desirable in fields where the data is a variable such as a name as the size of the font will change 5 Click Apply to preview the text on the badge 6 Click OK when finished 374 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide NOTE Changing Fonts and Sizes Format text by right clicking inside the text box and selecting Properties Select the Text Block tab of the Badge Text O bject Properties window Click the Font button A familiar Windows style Font window is displayed The fonts listed are those installed via your Windows operating system Using standard selection conventions select a Font Font Style Size and specify any Effects you want assigned to the font If the Size Font to Box option is selected the font size will adjust automatically to fill the text box Changing Text Color 1 Right click inside the text box and select Properties Select the Colors tab of the Badge Text O bject Properties window Badge Element Layout X Text Block Colors Positioning Foreground Color Background Color le I Transparent Background OK Cancel Apply Help Badging 375 2 Click the browse button to the right of the Fore ground Color field The Color window open
426. xisting floor plans by name and description Information in the Floor Plan database can be searched and sorted by name and description The Add Edit and D elete buttons allow you to create new floor plans edit existing ones or remove floor plan definitions from the system Programming 305 Floor Plan Definition Designing a floor plan begins with a background This background is a static graphic image that can be an actual floor plan drawing a photo or a simple graph Floor plan backgrounds are imported as Windows metafile graphics wmf that are scalable so the floor plan view can be easily enlarged or reduced without distortion Floor plans can also be created without a background graphic The next step in floor plan definition is to add an ADV for each device you want to monitor or control from the floor plan You can choose from any of the ADVs that have been defined Different objects e g doors panels C 100 loops are available in the Floorplan Toolbox representing the different types of AD Vs Links to other floor plans or to an Alarm or Event view can also be added In addition a text block can be added to the floor plan For example if you want to create a legend explaining the color codes of the ADVs or give special instructions for the operator viewing a particular floor plan just select the text object from the toolbox drag it onto the background and type in the text Du wuLULIDOId Once an objec
427. y Paghi Eidi Frewedien TZ Eare Tp E whole Company bar 7pm all daps Geneeal office hour E Elston TZ barpa 7 days Bam Tora BB Eie Plow Eniros leader TZ ban BBB Eue Flows Est Resda TZ Gspan 6 Continue with branches and entrances until the access level has the required configuration Card Holders 441 Custom Access Levels In certain cases a general access level may not meet the needs of a specific card holder In these cases a customized access level can be created for a card holder Creating a Custom Access Level 1 Open the Card database by selecting the Card menu option of the same name When the database win dow opens select the card to which you are adding a custom access level 2 Click Edit to open the Card Record window 3 Click the Add button in the Custom Access Level area of the window The Custom Access Level window opens with the Access Level tree displayed The tree is a combination of entrances and assigned time zones Citim Acoria Level 3 2 Aanu Eat Cad kucia Ligal IM up i ED e Compare H E Esi Coad Hai Yik H 0 Loca Dice 4 fig Local Storage o 18 Street TZ Abvays On J Parking TZ Abvay On Een Gate Parking Enhance Resda TZ Aleve On Hoth Gate Parking Enina Resda TZ Aleve On SJOP JOH Pues Show Dagmal ficcess Dri I Fisi waka uaii Hons Clew Let Vaid Daia Hone Ciemi Lox ma A custom access level is named after the card number
428. y When mapping the tracking areas this reader or readers defines the exit area Reader E causes the card holder information to be entered into the Exit tracking This information is not displayed Reader M Muster Reader If M readers are defined as muster readers a card read removes the card holder from the tracking area and moves them to the muster area Muster System Precautions When designing a muster system for use with WIN PAK 2 0 it is important to keep the following precautions in mind e Use a separate dropline communication port to isolate muster readers from tracking units An alternate additional communication path from the N 1000 to the computer can be achieved by using the N485D RLA Digital Redundant Loop Adapter e Run a special line for the muster units to provide a unique data path even if the wiring from the main facility is damaged Ideally the tracking units should also have a unique data path BuLLLUeIBOJd 294 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Use 485 communications with ACK NAK enabled A battery backup power supply is required for the 485 API 2 on any N 1000 II Control Panel Provide a UPS or other backup power source for the WIN PAK 2 0 computer N 485 PCI 2 and other associated communication devices Provide a safe location for the computer and com munication Keep the muster system on line not buffered to ensure timely and complete information Perform regular checks to insure
429. y assigned to a card holder and is in use the following warning prompt alerts you that you must remove the field from the instances where it is in use before it can be deleted WIN PAK 2 This Note Field is still in use by at least one Tab You must remove this field from these tabs before you can delete this Note Field The WIN PAK 2 0 Isolate function displays a list of card holders who have data entered in the selected note field It also displays the tabs where the note field appears You can modify the usage of a note field using the Isolate window functions After receiving the warning prompt shown above return to the main Note Field Template database window highlight the note field in question and click the Isolate button A list is produced next illustration showing the Card Holders and Tabs using the selected note b Q L oJ Q 0 ui 410 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide Cad Holders tabs Card Hedeets ah daia in Heie Field Tar Lic Plate 1 Tekste wall concn the daa in Dhar Mote Fiski bo be daimio thaze Cad Hokka Dese Deke Bl The Isolate list allows you to make adjustments in the card holder definitions possibly removing the need for this note Remove the data from the card holder listed in the Static list Then remove the note field from the tabs where it is displayed When you return to the main Note Field Template database window you can select the note and delete i
430. y defined RapidEye devices Programming 335 Alarm View and Auto Popup If a digital video camera is selected as an ADV Action in an Abstract Device Record window see Setting Up ADVs the associated alarm will be displayed with a camera icon in the left most column of the Alarm View see below MeEVRVO BULLLUeIBOd Right clicking on a reported alarm with a camera icon will provide the option of selecting either a live or recorded view from the associated camera If a recorded or retrieved view is selected the retrieved view time will start at the time the associated alarm was activated As with other alarms if an alarm is activated multiple times as indicated in the Cnt column click the Details box to view the previous alarm reports If the Auto Popup Alarm View Window option is selected in the System Config window System menu gt System Defaults gt Alarm Handling tab a live view from the associated camera will automatically open when the Alarm View is opened Likewise if AutoCard Lookup is opened Chapter 5 Badging Badge Layouts Database Badge Definition Window Badging 339 Badge Layouts Database NOTE The WIN PAK 2 0 integrated badging utility allows you to design and print badges from within the system itself Video images and signatures can be imported or with the appropriate hardware captured and saved for printing badges or for viewing video images in AutoCard Lookup when
431. yout report window is displayed The Filter tab is blank The Card Holder Tab Layout report shows the Note Fields associated with each Tab on the Card Holder Layout 3 Click the Print Preview button to view the report prior to printing it Click Print to send a copy of the report to your printer or select Export File to define and create a txt copy of the report 4 Click Close to exit the Card Holder Tab Layout report window and return to the main Reports database Ul oO m Reports Command File Report 1 Select the Command File report from the Reports database window The Report Command File report window opens with the Filter Command File tab displayed Report Command File X Command File Filter Sort Run from Archive Database Print Preview m Command file From C All Ea 1 Executive x Print C One To Export File Range Normal Elevator Contro Estim Pages Clear All Close PRR 2 Select one of the following to define the Command File report to the degree necessary All reports on every Command File One reports on an individual Command File using the From field activated when the One radio button is selected Range reports on a range of Command Files using the From and To fields activated when the Range radio button is selected 502 WIN PAK 2 0 User Guide 3 Click the Sort tab and select a category to determine the Sort Order for the commands
432. zation Database Disk Drive Free Space Warning Threshold 3600MB 120 of recommended free space Alarm Threshold 3000MB 100 of recommended free space for MSDE Assuming that a typical photo ID depending on compression settings is approximately 100K B this configuration allows for 20 000 photo ID images before the alarm threshold is presented Display of Warnings and Alarms Warnings and Alarms are only displayed when an operator logs into WIN PAK The alarm windows that the operator would see when logging in are indicated below Databace Seaver Waning a The database serve ii approaching capacity Comiat the WIHAPGE simnai in backup and rice the datshare me Database Server Alarm x Ukgeri Alas it cbc iha the datsbare sens be seraced Contact the WIH PAE adminas n backup ond serice the databse re y ct g of n 0 S v ni 0 5 D 5 A 0 Glossary Glossary 551 Symbols 12 Digit Cards Cards that use a combination of a 9 digit card number with a 3 digit issue number This term is also refers to applications that require a card number greater than 65 535 It is usually implemented for barcode and magnetic stripe applications WIN PAK supports up to 16 digits but these are still referred to as 12 digit applications 485 ACK N AK A communications verification system of the 485 converter which double checks that information packets have been sent and received from one

WIN-PAK 2, Release 4 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents